manualshive.com logo in svg

Blackmagicdesign ATEM 1 M/E Production Studio 4K, Installation And Operation Manual, Page: 2232 / 2267

Share
Download
Blackmagicdesign ATEM 1 M/E Production Studio 4K Installation And Operation Manual Download Page 2232

Ayrıca, LCD’de ‘bank off’ (sıra kapalı) ibaresi görülene kadar ‘bank’ yazılım butonunu basılı 
tutarak da sıraları etkisiz hale getirebilirsiniz.

Sıraları kapatma, gerekli olduğunda kamera kontrol ünitelerini, başka kameralara değiştirmenizi 
sağlar. Bunlar, her an ulaşabileceğiniz, her bir sırada kullanıma hazır belirli bir kamera takımıdır. 
Sıraları etkinleştirmek için, ‘bank’ (sıra) butonuna tekrar basın. 

Sıra ayarları; dört kamera kontrol ünitesine 2 sıra kamera atamanıza ve sonra ‘bank’ 
yazılım butonuna basarak, anında aralarında değiştirmenize imkan tanır.

BİLGİ 

Her bir kamera kontrol ünitesinde, her iki sıradan herhangi bir kamera seçilebilir. 

Örneğin; başka kamera sırasına geçtikten sonra bile kamera 1 üzerinde devamlı kontrol 
istediğinizi farz edin. Tek yapmanız gereken, her bir sırada, kamera kontrol 
ünitelerinden birinde daima kamera 1’in seçili olduğundan emin olmaktır. 

Settings (Ayarlar)

Ana ekranda ‘settings’ butonuna basılması, kamera kontrol paneliniz için tüm ayarları açar. Ok 
yazılım butonuna basarak ayarların sayfalarında gezinin. DHCP ve IP adresi ayarları da dahil 
olmak üzere, ağ ayarları sıradaki ilk sayfalardandır. Bu ayarlar, kamera kontrol panelini ATEM 
switcher’inize bağlarken ağ ayarlarının nasıl değiştirildiğini gösteren bölümde açıklanmıştır. 
Kamera kontrol paneliniz için ilave ayarlar hakkında bilgi için, bu bölümü okumaya devam edin.

Auxiliary Select (Aux Çıkışı Seçimi)

Kamera kontrole atamak istediğiniz auxiliary çıkışını seçin. Bir auxiliary çıkışı seçmek için, 
LCD’nin altındaki auxiliary kontrol düğmesini saat yönünde veya saat yönünün tersine çevirin.

NOT 

Bağlandığınız ATEM switcher’e bağlı olarak auxiliary seçimi değişir. Mesela, 1 

auxiliary çıkışı olan bir switcher, auxiliary 1’i sağlayacak veya hiç birisini 
bulundurmayacaktır. Daha fazla auxiliary çıkışı olan bir switcher, kamera kontrole hangi 
çıkışın atanacağını seçmenizi sağlar. Auxiliary çıkışlarının başka kaynaklara atanmasını 
istiyorsanız ‘none’ (hiç biri) şıkkını seçiniz. ATEM Constellation 8K, çıkışlarından 
herhangi birini seçmenize imkan tanır.

2232

ATEM Camera Control Panel’in Kullanımı

Summary of Contents for ATEM 1 M/E Production Studio 4K

Page 1: ...Installation and Operation Manual June 2020 ATEM Live Production Switchers English Fran ais Deutsch Espa ol Italiano Portugu s and T rk e...

Page 2: ...To go directly to your preferred language simply click on the hyperlinks listed in the contents below English 3 208 Fran ais 414 Deutsch 620 Espa ol 826 1032 1238 1444 Italiano 1650 Portugu s 1856 T...

Page 3: ...un with your live production This instruction manual should contain all the information you ll need for installing your ATEM Production Switcher The ATEM switcher includes a software control panel whi...

Page 4: ...dio Mixer 43 Camera Control 44 Switcher Settings 44 Using the Software Control Panel 45 Processing Palettes 49 Media Players Tab 51 Using the Audio Mixer 51 Headphones Settings on ATEM Constellation 8...

Page 5: ...Powering the Panel 167 Connecting the Panel to your Switcher 168 Changing Network Settings 169 Camera Control Panel Layout 170 Controlling Cameras 175 Using Tally 183 Sending Tally Signals via a GPI...

Page 6: ...e connected to control the same switcher by simple Ethernet connections The ATEM software control panel can be installed on as many computers as you like at no extra cost You can build a custom ATEM l...

Page 7: ...the transition control section This is a very powerful way to use a switcher because you can select your source on the preview row and see it on the preview video output to confirm that you have the...

Page 8: ...ng time then you might be used to older style A B direct switchers and you can easily set your ATEM switcher to A B direct switching in the ATEM software preferences See the Transition Control section...

Page 9: ...way up to 8K 4320p59 94 The built in control panel with LCD and talkback lets you switch directly from the front panel so you can quickly confirm all your sources and test your production setup before...

Page 10: ...nector The front panel keypad lets you select between 6 auxiliary output sources and you can monitor the outputs on the large built in LCD ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K NOTE If you have an ATEM 2 M E...

Page 11: ...don t see the multi view on your television then double check your power connection to make sure your ATEM is powered on Plugging in an ATEM Hardware Panel If you have purchased an ATEM hardware pane...

Page 12: ...echnically minded friend who understands how to set IP addresses By default the switcher is set to a fixed IP address of 192 168 10 240 and the ATEM advanced panels are set to a fixed IP of 192 168 10...

Page 13: ...ollowing components which are used by ATEM Switchers ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup Blackmagic ATEM Setup is used to configure network settings including IP address plus lets you update y...

Page 14: ...ction manual and some example graphics Use the example graphics to explore the internal media pool and keying functionality Installing Blackmagic ATEM Software on Windows It is a good idea to uninstal...

Page 15: ...phics Use the example graphics to explore the internal media pool and keying functionality Plugging in your Computer You can plug your computer directly into the ATEM switcher so you can control the s...

Page 16: ...case your ATEM switcher is still not found don t be concerned The solution is likely a network setting on your computer Changing network settings is fast and will only take a moment To change network...

Page 17: ...ft side of the interface to open the settings window of the ATEM Software Control Set the switcher video standard You can set the video standard to suit the region in which you are broadcasting such a...

Page 18: ...es show up in the multi view video input windows Set Audio Preferences The audio tab lets you select which outputs to use for audio monitoring You can also mute incoming talkback on SDI inputs and out...

Page 19: ...ews in the multi view arranged as 2 large views and 8 small views and ATEM Constellation 8K has additional options for 4 7 13 or 16 input views This lets you select from a range of external and intern...

Page 20: ...multi view for ATEM Constellation 8K Audio meters can be turned on or off within each source view or all at once by clicking on the respective icons in each view or the all on button respectively You...

Page 21: ...to connect HyperDecks to your ATEM switcher and control them using ATEM Software Control or by an ATEM hardware control panel refer to the HyperDeck control section of this manual Each connector on t...

Page 22: ...ly encrypts the video data in the HDMI video cable so the manufacturer does not allow the content to be seen on anything other than a television You won t be able to see images from these devices Devi...

Page 23: ...needs a fixed IP address so control panels have a stable location to connect to This means you need to find a free fixed IP address in the range of your network that you can use The control panels ca...

Page 24: ...close the dialog box Change network setting using the configure tab in Blackmagic ATEM Setup Understanding ATEM Hardware Panel Network Settings The hardware panel s network settings are configured fr...

Page 25: ...knobs to set the correct IP address for your switcher 4 Press the save changes soft button to confirm the setting Your panel will now connect with your switcher On the ATEM Advanced Panel press the ne...

Page 26: ...be automatically assigned an IP address from a DHCP server Set DHCP on or off by pressing the corresponding DHCP ON OFF soft button NOTE If you re connecting direct to a switcher without a network the...

Page 27: ...r sources and control the switcher directly from the front panel This is a practical way to establish everything is set up correctly from the switcher being the heart of the production chain This sect...

Page 28: ...exactly what you need to hear 4 After you have confirmed talkback functionality it s a good idea to check that tally is working on all cameras To do this press an input source button to switch it to t...

Page 29: ...n installed on your computer Always update all your equipment at the same time so it s all running the same version of software ATEM Software Installer To perform an update you can directly connect yo...

Page 30: ...you can update via the Ethernet connection NOTE When upgrading software via USB make sure the advanced panel is the only ATEM device connected via USB to the computer running the setup utility softwar...

Page 31: ...MI Program Output Similar to the SDI program output this output switches between Ultra HD HD and SD It outputs the main program video output of the switcher and can be connected to televisions video p...

Page 32: ...as well as preview transitions This output is perfect when you want to use a full resolution preview monitor The audio on this output is embedded SDI program audio M E Output ATEM 2 M E Production St...

Page 33: ...you first turn on the switcher you will see input 1 is the button illuminated red This means that input 1 is on air and if you have a video source connected to input 1 it will appear on the program o...

Page 34: ...ble to you Each one of the transition types listed in the LCD menus can also be selected in ATEM Software Control or a hardware control panel if you have one As well as the group of main input buttons...

Page 35: ...ton and you will see the settings menu page will be selected 4 Scroll down the list to the mode menu and select it by pressing the set button 5 Scroll to the cut bus mode and select it by pressing set...

Page 36: ...knob on the front panel is primarily for audio level adjustment although it is used for menu selection when you are in the LCD menus Normally it s used for audio level control and you can tell what i...

Page 37: ...to bring it on and off air The duration of the transition when pressing the button will be set in the downstream key LCD menu or on a control panel You can feed a keyer with an input or a media playe...

Page 38: ...r available In the examples in this section we used the menus and it s a good idea to explore the menus to see what s available If you have used the software control panel on an ATEM switcher in the p...

Page 39: ...ring talkback and program mix using ATEM Software Control or the front panel The selected button is lit red meaning you can adjust its level with the up and down buttons The back panel of ATEM Constel...

Page 40: ...tions General Preferences ATEM Software Control can be set to display in English German Spanish French Italian Japanese Korean Portuguese Russian Turkish and simplified Chinese languages When running...

Page 41: ...el will not affect the button mapping set on a hardware control panel You can assign a camera from the drop down menu Switcher Control Panel The software control panel has four main control windows Sw...

Page 42: ...t switching remains on and the CUT button is lit red Control Shift 1 0 Hot switches source on switcher Inputs 11 20 to Program output Press and release Control then Shift 1 0 Hot switches source on sw...

Page 43: ...select a media player as a key source for example Media Player 1 both the fill and the key are automatically selected so you don t have to select them separately However the key can still be routed s...

Page 44: ...ol cameras however with ATEM switchers this functionality is built into the software so it s always available Settings such as iris gain focus detail and zoom control are easily adjusted using compati...

Page 45: ...information about using HyperDeck disk recorders with your ATEM switcher refer to the HyperDeck control section of this manual You can also set your switcher s remote behaviour using the remote tab Th...

Page 46: ...Color black source internally generated by the switcher SUPERSOURCE This feature is active on all ATEM switchers with more than 1 M E Shift select for Bars BARS Color bars source internally generated...

Page 47: ...e transition progresses If an ATEM advanced panel is connected the fader bar Indicator on the panel updates to provide visual feedback on the progress of the transition Transition Style The transition...

Page 48: ...transition at the rate specified in the RATE display of the transition control block If the DSK is tied the signal routing to the clean feed 1 is unaffected ON AIR The ON AIR button is used to cut the...

Page 49: ...on the model you re connected to and are an easy way to see what processing is available in the switcher Different ATEM models will have different features so the palettes can change The palettes als...

Page 50: ...e you can configure the parameters of each transition style For example for the dip transition the palette has a drop down menu where you can select the dip source and for the wipe transition the pale...

Page 51: ...s Using the Audio Mixer The audio tab is used to mix audio sources connected to any ATEM switcher via HDMI SDI external audio and also from the built in media players in ATEM 1 M E 2 M E and 4 M E swi...

Page 52: ...et the gain on the audio level for each camera and audio source The green number under each audio level meter shows the maximum audio level set by the fader The number above the audio meter shows the...

Page 53: ...ecting the direct mix to ON allows an audio input to be permanently mixed into the program output even when the associated video source is not on air The red tally light will always be lit because the...

Page 54: ...o monitoring via the monitor XLR output Deselect ON to disable all audio via the monitor XLR output DIM Select DIM to temporarily reduce the monitor audio level without having to adjust the fader Sele...

Page 55: ...light Controls ATEM Constellation 8K has advanced Fairlight audio controls that let you enhance and refine the quality of sound on each input and master output including input level controls a 6 band...

Page 56: ...ding equalizer indicator Click on an input s equalizer indicator to open a 6 band parametric equalizer The first item you will notice is the graph along the top of the window with numbered indicators...

Page 57: ...om the band filter dropdown list and then click on each range preset You will see the filter effect move to a position along the graph curve that corresponds to the range preset you choose This lets y...

Page 58: ...ncrease or decrease the level of volume for lower frequencies along the graph Notch High Pass Low Pass This filter lets you remove or cut a defined frequency Smoothly removes extreme low end frequenci...

Page 59: ...te the expander once the signal level drops below 40dB Range This setting defines the range of decibels affected by the function Ratio Defines the maximum strength of the function once initiated Attac...

Page 60: ...er sounds or to smoothen changes in audio levels within the signal TIP It s a good idea to apply the compressor after you have set the EQ controls Make Up The make up setting lets you increase the ove...

Page 61: ...n the channel strip s level indicator 2 If you want to split any mono inputs into two separate channels for stereo output go to the general switcher settings and navigate to the audio tab Enable the c...

Page 62: ...avigate your computer to look for graphics files All attached drives on your computer are displayed and you can select folders from them View sub folders by clicking on the arrows next to each folder...

Page 63: ...rneath the slot so you can keep track of stills and clips you have loaded This is very useful as in the media player palette in the switcher tab as well as the Photoshop plug in you will see a list of...

Page 64: ...eo setting is used to select the operating video standard of the ATEM switcher and this must be set to the same video standard as the video sources you are plugging into the ATEM switcher If they don...

Page 65: ...p59 94 1080p59 94 2160p23 98 2160p23 98 2160p23 98 2160p24 2160p24 2160p24 2160p25 2160p25 2160p25 2160p29 97 2160p29 97 2160p29 97 2160p50 2160p50 2160p59 94 2160p59 94 4320p23 98 4320p24 4320p25 432...

Page 66: ...D video at 59 94 or 50 frames per second the multi view will display HD video at 29 97 or 25 frames per second respectively Setting the Down Converter Outputs When running ATEM Production Studio 4K mo...

Page 67: ...e solo audio source even if it is not on air These monitor settings are only available to the audio mixer when monitor audio is selected for the audio out setting in the settings window Set the audio...

Page 68: ...he maximum number of frames If you need a clip to be longer adjust the balance of frames It s worth remembering that lengthening one clip will shorten the other Setting the Media Pool Clip Length Clip...

Page 69: ...be turned on or off for all the switcher sources and program view by enabling the All On button in the multi view settings or you can turn them on or off individually by clicking the audio meter icon...

Page 70: ...SDI You can identify switchable connections on the rear of the switcher because all inputs are numbered and any inputs that can switch will have the same input number on their label Label settings Fo...

Page 71: ...e short label HyperDeck Settings HyperDeck settings Connect up to 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio disk recorders and control them using ATEM Software Control When connecting HyperDecks use these setting...

Page 72: ...utputs menu This lets you select from 24 HD or Ultra HD outputs or six 8K outputs and then select the source you want routed to that output There is a range of sources available including black all vi...

Page 73: ...fault If you save with Select All enabled ATEM Software Control saves your entire switcher settings If you want to choose specific settings to save you can deselect settings individually or to remove...

Page 74: ...our saved files when the production is over If you have settings you want to keep save them to your computer and an external drive such as a USB drive This means you can carry your settings with you a...

Page 75: ...detect the control packets in the SDI link and allow you to control features in the camera itself You can control cameras via both regular SDI or optical fiber SDI connections when an optional SFP mo...

Page 76: ...her by pressing the camera s pgm button Connect multiple Blackmagic Studio Cameras via optical fiber using an ATEM Studio Converter You ll need to have an optional SFP module installed in your Studio...

Page 77: ...which setting to adjust by clicking on the three selection buttons above the color wheel Master Wheel Use the master wheel below the color wheel to make contrast adjustments to all YRGB channels at o...

Page 78: ...of the iris pedestal control and is used to limit the iris range This feature helps you prevent over exposed images from going to air To set your coarse threshold completely open the iris using the ir...

Page 79: ...r images Shutter Speed Control The shutter speed control is located in the section between the color wheel and the iris pedestal control Decrease or increase the shutter speed by hovering your mouse p...

Page 80: ...terface Click on the DaVinci Resolve primary color corrector button to expand the color correction window and adjust settings You have color wheels and settings such as saturation available and you ca...

Page 81: ...e and create unique affects by adjusting the Y channel only Y channel adjustments work best when the Lum Mix setting is set to the right side to use YRGB processing vs the left side to use regular RGB...

Page 82: ...cess and there is no right and wrong The best setting is what you like the most and what you think looks good Drag the sliders left or right to adjust Contrast Saturation Hue and Lum Mix settings Sync...

Page 83: ...evel Y Gamma Allows you to modify image contrast via a Y only adjustment for gamma Y Gain Allows you to modify image contrast via a Y only adjustment for highlights Contrast Rotate clockwise to increa...

Page 84: ...eme Control Connecting HyperDecks Connecting Blackmagic HyperDecks to your switcher is very similar to connecting cameras and other video sources via your switcher s SDI or HDMI inputs The only additi...

Page 85: ...e necessary details is as easy as typing in your HyperDeck s IP address in the IP Address box and choosing the source it s plugged into from the input dropdown menu Click connect and your HyperDeck is...

Page 86: ...ATEM Software Control To control the HyperDecks connected to your switcher click the media players tab in the software control panel and choose the HyperDecks palette Here you can choose between each...

Page 87: ...Deck s media list Loop Click loop once to loop the currently selected clip and again to loop all of the clips in your HyperDeck s media list To move through a clip use the shuttle jog slider underneat...

Page 88: ...e connected your HyperDeck to your switcher as detailed in the connecting HyperDecks section use ATEM Advanced Panel s system control and LCD soft buttons to setup and control your HyperDecks To begin...

Page 89: ...via Ethernet To enter a HyperDeck s IP address navigate to the third HyperDeck settings page with the left or right arrow buttons or pressing 3 on the numeric keypad while in the HyperDeck settings m...

Page 90: ...ommencing playback the actual cut will be delayed a preset number of frames to ensure a clean transition This is just like setting a preroll on a videotape machine You can adjust the length of this de...

Page 91: ...re HyperDeck controls including play stop loop playback and forward and reverse skip for moving between clips TIP To play all clips hold down the shift button and press the play soft button In the fou...

Page 92: ...utton and press the panel soft control knob Using the right arrow button navigate to the 4th page for transport controls Using the rotating soft control you can set your HyperDeck to a set of transpor...

Page 93: ...same time You can also plug in more than one hardware panel if you need a more advanced solution This section shows how to use the different ATEM panels that are available should you need a hardware...

Page 94: ...ow of button in the source select row program row and preview row Pressing the SHIFT button will change the source names display to show extra sources called shifted sources allowing selection of up t...

Page 95: ...names display and is used to assign sources to auxiliary outputs and keyers When the macro button is enabled this row of buttons is also used for loading and running macros recorded to the correspondi...

Page 96: ...ARM is currently disabled and will be enabled in a future update PREV TRANS The PREV TRANS button enables the preview transition mode allowing the operator to verify a transition by performing it on t...

Page 97: ...cording Macros using an ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel section Downstream Keyers DSK TIE The DSK TIE button will enable the DSK on the preview output along with the next transition effects and tie it to th...

Page 98: ...CD menu this means there is more than one page of settings and you can move through the pages by pressing the left and right arrow buttons For example to change the border softness on a wipe transitio...

Page 99: ...sily control a bank of cameras one at a time by pressing the camera control button and then selecting each camera via the numbered buttons on the numeric keypad Make your pan and tilt adjustments with...

Page 100: ...tect the connected devices 1 Press the VISCA soft button to select VISCA control 2 Press the detect soft button The first camera connected to your switcher will appear on the LCD as camera 1 If you ha...

Page 101: ...m built PTZ unit using a standard RS 422 port DB 9 connector refer to the section labeled Serial Port Pin Connections for Control Cables Button Mapping ATEM software and hardware control panels suppor...

Page 102: ...y The large LCD screens with soft control knobs and buttons which lets you adjust settings dynamically as you control your switcher This is a fast and convenient way of working with your panel This se...

Page 103: ...on preview is now on program and vice versa TIP It s recommended to use the transition control block to perform transitions because it provides the opportunity to verify the video content on the prev...

Page 104: ...te allowing you to perform faster transitions by selecting the transition type and pressing the AUTO button The previously used transition rate is remembered for that transition type until it is chang...

Page 105: ...dip transition gradually mixes through a third source the dip source For example the dip transition can be used for a transition that calls for a white flash or a transition that quickly flashes the...

Page 106: ...ogram output for a wipe transition To perform a wipe transition on an ATEM advanced panel 1 On the preview bus select the video source that you want on the program output 2 Press the WIPE button to se...

Page 107: ...n be used for sponsorship or branding Wipe transition parameters Rate The length of the wipe transition in seconds and frames Symmetry Symmetry can be used to control the aspect ratio of the pattern F...

Page 108: ...aken off air and off next transition Refer to sharing DVE resources later in this section for more information 3 In the DVE LCD menu use the soft control knobs and buttons to configure the DVE paramet...

Page 109: ...phic across the screen over a background transition For example the logo wipe moves a graphic over a horizontal wipe essentially replacing the wipe border A logo mix spins the graphic across the scree...

Page 110: ...a manual transition Graphic wipe parameters Rate Rate specifies the length of the transition in seconds and frames The rate can be adjusted using the rate knob or by entering a number on the number pa...

Page 111: ...manual transition 1 On the preview bus select the video source that you want on the program output 2 Select the transition type using the transition type buttons in the transition control block 3 Man...

Page 112: ...rol to navigate to the profile page 3 Using the soft control knob select an empty profile slot 4 Press the soft save button above the LCD to save the profile Now your profile is saved to the panel The...

Page 113: ...ond page 2 Using the soft control knob navigate to the user profile you want to overwrite If the user profile is currently in use the text above the profile number will be orange 3 Press the soft clea...

Page 114: ...dip through colors for a dip transition such as dip through white To adjust a color source on the software control panel simply go to the color palette and click the color chip and the color picker wi...

Page 115: ...the media player palette 2 Use the select media drop down list to select a clip or still from the media pool 3 If you have selected a motion clip the begin step back play pause step forward and loop t...

Page 116: ...t transition is performed from the program bus only the background will be changed and all upstream and downstream keys will maintain their current state To perform a cut transition from the program b...

Page 117: ...ansition on the software control panel using a keyboard 1 Ensure that caps lock is off 2 Press the number key on the keyboard corresponding to the video source that you want on the program output The...

Page 118: ...ing the TRANSITION STYLE buttons in the transition control block 3 In the transition palette select the settings tab for the same transition type as the transition control block 4 Set the transition r...

Page 119: ...are exchanged to indicate that the video source that was on preview is now on program and vice versa To perform an auto transition on an ATEM advanced panel 1 On the preview bus select the video sourc...

Page 120: ...rate Program output for a mix transition Mix Transition rate setting To perform a mix transition on the software control panel 1 On the preview bus select the video source that you want on the progra...

Page 121: ...The length of the dip transition and the dip source can both be customized Program output for a dip transition Dip Transition Settings To perform a dip transition on the software control panel 1 On t...

Page 122: ...control knob to select the dip source You can also use the select bus to select a dip source 5 Perform the transition as an auto transition or manual transition from the transition control block Press...

Page 123: ...sition palette and select wipe from the transition types bar 4 Use the settings in the wipe palette to customize the wipe transition 5 Perform the transition as an auto transition or manual transition...

Page 124: ...elected FlipFlop When FlipFlop mode is toggled on the transition changes between normal to reverse every time the transition is executed The text will illuminate orange when selected Border Width of t...

Page 125: ...e media player which will be used to play the clip for the animated transition Clip Duration Clip duration refers to the length of the animation The duration should normally match the length of the an...

Page 126: ...2 Rotate the LCD menu soft control knob labelled source to select the desired media player Use the arrow buttons to adjust the preroll trigger mix and duration times as needed 3 Now that you have set...

Page 127: ...clip that is playing back on the media player Adjust the gain value until the edge softness is desirable but the background video luminance brightness is not affected Invert Key Inverts the key It is...

Page 128: ...e LCD menu NOTE If the DVE is already being used in an upstream key the DVE transition type will not be available for selection until the key is taken off air and off next transition Refer to sharing...

Page 129: ...the key signal Sharing DVE resources ATEM features a DVE channel which can be used to perform DVE transitions or used in an upstream keyer When you select a DVE transition if the DVE is used elsewher...

Page 130: ...on in the transition control block The DVE settings menu will appear on the LCD If the DVE is already being used in an upstream key the DVE transition type will not be available for selection until th...

Page 131: ...the transition is executed The Normal or Reverse light indicates the direction of the next transition Fill Source The fill signal is the graphic used to move across the top of the transition Key Sour...

Page 132: ...ons on the program and preview buses both turn red to indicate that you are in the middle of a transition On the advanced panel the fader bar indicator also displays the position and progress of the t...

Page 133: ...images to be used as fill or key sources Fill and key signals are selected on the software control panel from drop down lists in the upstream and downstream key palettes On the advanced panel fill an...

Page 134: ...the fill signal and the key or cut signal The fill signal contains a video image which is to be stacked on top of the background while the key signal contains a grayscale mask that is used to define...

Page 135: ...hotoshop document that the ATEM can use for blending the graphic over the live video Then when saved as a Targa image file or downloaded direct to the media pool you can select pre multiplied in the k...

Page 136: ...e the fill source and key source control knobs to choose a fill and key source TIP You can also press the corresponding buttons on the source select bus to select the fill and key source 5 Once you ha...

Page 137: ...djust the key parameters to refine the key Downstream Keyer Settings To set up a luma linear key on downstream keyer 1 on an ATEM advanced panel 1 Press the DSK 1 tie button to enable the downstream k...

Page 138: ...eckLink or Intensity range and then play back video clips to your ATEM switcher If you render a green background on your animations you can then key this green to create fast and clean animations of a...

Page 139: ...access additional key parameters you may want to adjust such as hue gain y suppress lift and masking TIP When making adjustments on ATEM Advanced Panel you can restore all settings to their defaults b...

Page 140: ...oint and the constellation of the 6 color bar dots will rotate around the screen 4 Adjust the gain until the color bars are near their target boxes on the vector scope Adjusting the gain will expand a...

Page 141: ...an also select a fill source by pressing the corresponding button in the source select bus 4 Use the right arrow buttons to access the chroma adjustments screen 5 Click the sample chroma button Choose...

Page 142: ...ny small foreground artifacts left over in the area of the image you want to remove We recommend moving the slider until your keyed area is consistently opaque Key Edge The key edge slider and control...

Page 143: ...es of foreground elements For example green reflections bouncing off a green screen Flare Suppression Flare suppression removes overall green tint evenly across all foreground elements Matching your f...

Page 144: ...generator can create 18 shapes that can be sized and positioned to produce the desired key signal Combining a background with a fill and pattern key Background A full screen image Fill Another full sc...

Page 145: ...ir when the next transition is performed 2 In the keyers LCD menu select the pattern key type using the corresponding key type control knob 3 Select the fill source using the corresponding soft contro...

Page 146: ...position a pattern navigate to the pattern selection page of the keyer you are setting up Use the joystick or control knobs to move the pattern vertically and horizontally To re center the pattern pr...

Page 147: ...to the table below DVE Key Settings To set up a DVE key on upstream keyer 1 on an ATEM advanced panel 1 Press the KEY 1 next transition button to enable the keyer on the preview output 2 In the keyer...

Page 148: ...l In Bevel in 3D border DVE border parameters The knobs and soft buttons in the system control are used to adjust the border parameters There are multiple parameters each requiring an adjustment there...

Page 149: ...ls Masking can also be used as a creative tool to build rectangular cut outs on screen On the hardware panel the mask is set up for each upstream and downstream key from the system control mask menu w...

Page 150: ...e the next transition will change the state of key 1 and turn it ON so that it is visible on the program output Program output after transition Program output before transition Control paneal next tra...

Page 151: ...AUTO button to gradually transition the downstream key on or off the program output at the rate displayed in the DSK rate window 3 Use the DSK TIE button to link the downstream key with the main tran...

Page 152: ...er Location The first time the Photoshop export plug in is run it will ask you to select your switcher location This is the IP address of the switcher so the plug in can find the switcher to communica...

Page 153: ...ensure your graphic has smooth edges which blend in to the video Using Auxiliary Outputs Auxiliary outputs are extra SDI outputs that can have various inputs and internal sources routed to them They...

Page 154: ...puts Control Menus on Windows ATEM Software Control menus for routing outputs for ATEM Constellation 8K Routing the Aux Output using an ATEM Hardware Panel On ATEM hardware panels you can route the au...

Page 155: ...his is identical to the program output however does not include any of the downstream keyer contents It s useful when you want to record a master output without logos or bugs on the downstream keyers...

Page 156: ...ght You may then wish to alter the parameters of boxes 2 to 4 by doing similar steps If you make a mistake click on the cog symbol on the RHS of the Box Control tab and you can easily reset the parame...

Page 157: ...the source for the background via the Select bus on the 1 M E panel or the dedicated Destination bus on the 2 M E panel This will result in the selected video source being placed behind the enabled b...

Page 158: ...an quickly easily copy the settings of the currently selected box to any of the other boxes making an exact clone in just one click The copied boxes will appear directly behind the master box and will...

Page 159: ...EM Software Control click on macros in the title bar or you can also press shift command M for Mac or shift control M for Windows The macros window is a floating window you can move freely about your...

Page 160: ...d to so you can create the specific effects you want Recording a Macro using ATEM Software Control In the example below we re going to create a macro that will set your ATEM switcher to perform a 3 se...

Page 161: ...hen you only want a 2 second pause That s because when the mix transition occurs it takes 3 seconds to complete So if you want to add a pause you need to consider the transition duration plus the paus...

Page 162: ...und your software control panel to indicate a macro is playing If your macro doesn t perform the way you expect it to simply rerecord the macro you just created following the previous steps ATEM Softw...

Page 163: ...mall macros you want to change then compiling your small macros back into your large macro To compile small macros into a large macro 1 Start recording a new macro then while the macro is recording cl...

Page 164: ...ing your macros When a macro is selected it also displays any notes you have included Macro buttons After recording a macro to a selected macro slot your macro will appear as a macro button 20 macro b...

Page 165: ...is time you will create a macro in macro slot 6 1 Press the macro soft button to open the macros LCD menu 2 Using the macro knob under the LCD select the macro slot you want to record to For this exam...

Page 166: ...You can name your macro and add notes by clicking on the edit macro button in ATEM Software Control To run the macro press the macro button to set your panel s source select row to macro mode The butt...

Page 167: ...panel or if you have more than four cameras you can use additional panels if you want to assign each camera with a dedicated CCU It s completely up to you NOTE Blackmagic Design cameras that can be co...

Page 168: ...then be the middle unit in the chain Now connect the camera control panel s spare Ethernet port to your computer or network If you are using the camera control panel with just your switcher and a com...

Page 169: ...n the CCU s LCD To access the network settings press the settings soft button Press the settings soft button on the LCD home screen to access all the camera control panel s settings The DHCP setting i...

Page 170: ...way to cross check your network settings between each unit To set the switcher s IP address on your camera control panel 1 Press the arrow soft button to navigate to the switcher IP address setting 2...

Page 171: ...set to the home screen you will see the camera bank setting at the top of the display This setting displays which bank of cameras you are controlling For example imagine you are controlling 8 cameras...

Page 172: ...pages of settings by pressing the arrow soft button The network settings including DHCP and IP address settings are the first pages in the sequence These settings are described in the section that sh...

Page 173: ...s and LCDs on your camera control panel Rotate the corresponding control knobs for each setting clockwise or counter clockwise to brighten or dim the lights CCU Panel Controls The panel controls for e...

Page 174: ...ontrol This increases or decreases the overall luminance or brightness of the image More information about color balance control is provided in the following controlling cameras section Lens Controls...

Page 175: ...atures on each CCU and a general overview on how to approach camera control The first step to controlling cameras is to assign a camera for a CCU Assigning a Camera to a CCU At the bottom of the LCD h...

Page 176: ...or broadcast you can then save all the parameters for each camera and recall them later It s a very fast process To store a scene file 1 Press the store button on a CCU The button will illuminate red...

Page 177: ...ene file 1 for each independent CCU NOTE While this feature is very powerful and helpful please use with care as it affects all cameras including the camera switched to the program output We recommend...

Page 178: ...urn to sync with the controller as you make changes The process is almost invisible and it s likely you won t even notice Absolute Control In absolute control mode the settings are always synchronized...

Page 179: ...display let you change the camera s shutter speed Press the up arrow to increase the shutter speed and down to decrease For general production use the shutter speed is typically set to 50 meaning 1 5...

Page 180: ...ill illuminate providing an approximate display of the camera s exposure For a precise assessment of the exposure f stop observe the iris indicator Located around the collar of the joystick s handle i...

Page 181: ...xposure To do this 1 Lean the joystick to its highest position to increase the gain setting to its maximum 2 Now decrease the coarse setting by rotating the coarse knob counter clockwise until the gai...

Page 182: ...and the darkest shadows Call Holding down the call button will flash the tally light on the CCU s selected camera This is a helpful way of seeking the camera operators attention or to let your operat...

Page 183: ...connected to video equipment that supports contact closure tally signals such as Blackmagic SmartView Duo and SmartView HD Up to 8 tally receiving devices can be supported with a single GPI and Tally...

Page 184: ...gic ATEM Setup 4 If your ATEM switcher connects directly to your computer or ATEM advanced panel without an Ethernet network switch choose to Configure Address Using Static IP The GPI and Tally Interf...

Page 185: ...o Switcher Inputs 1 8 unless you are configuring a second unit to provide tally outputs for switcher inputs 9 16 of an ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher 7 Click Apply The white LED to the right of the US...

Page 186: ...tors are useful when using audio from consumer equipment such as a HiFi system or iPod Plug external HiFi audio into your switcher via the RCA inputs Unique to ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K and ATEM...

Page 187: ...for every video source You don t need an external audio mixer unless you prefer to use one The audio is mixed in the Audio tab of ATEM Software Control and output over the SDI and HDMI program outputs...

Page 188: ...TRS connectors for analog audio in and out MADI In MADI channels 1 64 receive digital audio at 24 bit depth with a sampling rate of 48 kHz These are connected to an extra 64 channels in the audio mix...

Page 189: ...t 2 In 8K mode MADI Out 2 sends these sources Channels 1 10 Channels 3 and 4 of SDI inputs 1 10 Channel 11 Media player audio Channel 12 External mic Channel 13 TRS analog audio input Channel 14 PGM a...

Page 190: ...urface is recognized by your computer as a MIDI device For Mac computers go to Applications Utilities Audio MIDI Setup and launch the application Go to the Window menu and choose Show MIDI Window Ensu...

Page 191: ...l surface and verify that the audio mixer faders show a corresponding movement in the software on your computer screen The MUTE button In the ATEM audio mixer interface audio is always on or present i...

Page 192: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Serial Port Pin Connections for Control Cables RS 422 Pin Connections for Control Cables RS 422 is a broadcast standard using a common DE 9 or RJ12 connector You can easily rewir...

Page 193: ...protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 194: ...meter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for paramete...

Page 195: ...128 through 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and opera...

Page 196: ...values from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate...

Page 197: ...1 4 3 2 2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4...

Page 198: ...de _ _ BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd...

Page 199: ...pause ve multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage med...

Page 200: ...002710 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 201: ...ough the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they a...

Page 202: ...s 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on...

Page 203: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF Relative...

Page 204: ...ign support office Checking the version currently installed To check which version of ATEM software is installed on your computer open the About ATEM Software Control window On Mac open ATEM Software...

Page 205: ...nd used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this product in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case...

Page 206: ...serviceable parts inside product Refer servicing to your local Blackmagic Design service center Use only at altitudes not more than 2000m above sea level State of California statement This product ca...

Page 207: ...from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Blackmagic Design parts or supplies or d to service a product that has been mod...

Page 208: ...ATEM 2020 6...

Page 209: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM www blackmagicdesign com jp ATEM USB ATEM Blackmagic Design CEO...

Page 210: ...L 245 ATEM Software Control 246 246 247 248 248 250 250 251 255 257 257 ATEM Constellation 8K 260 Fairlight 261 6 262 264 Fairlight 267 268 ATEM 269 270 281 DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel 288 HyperDeck 2...

Page 211: ...EM Camera ControlPanel 373 373 374 375 376 381 389 GPI and Tally Interface 389 392 392 SDI HDMI 393 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI 394 396 398 398 398 Developer Information 399 Blackmagic SDI Camera Contr...

Page 212: ...ATEM ATEM Production Studio Switcher ATEM M E A B ATEM A B ATEM ATEM 1 ATEM Software Control ATEM M E M E M E ATEM ATEM ATEM M E ATEM 212...

Page 213: ...M E M E ATEM M E CUT AUTO DVE ATEM M E ATEM M E 1 ATEM M E 1 213...

Page 214: ...FTB FTB M E Aux Aux M E M E A B A B ATEM ATEM A B A B A B 1 1 A B 1 M E M E M E 214...

Page 215: ...D HD 1080p59 94 Ultra HD 2160p59 94 8K 4320p59 94 LCD ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Production Studio 4K SD HD Ultra HD SDI HDMI 8 Aux LCD Aux ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K SD...

Page 216: ...duction Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K HD Ultra HD SDI 20 4 Ultra HD 12G SDI 2160p59 94 Ultra HD BNC 6 Aux LCD ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 7 3 ATEM 4 M...

Page 217: ...ATEM HDMI SDI 8 2 ATEM ATEM Multi View ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 2 IEC ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel 12v XLR UPS 12v 2 1 3 Switcher Control 217...

Page 218: ...ATEM Advanced Panel IP 192 168 10 60 ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel Blackmagic ATEM Mac ATEM 1 www blackmagicdesign com jp support 2 Blackmagic ATEM Swi...

Page 219: ...3 Continue Agree Install 4 ATEM Switcher ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP ATEM ATEM Software Control 219...

Page 220: ...lackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Broadcast Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP Blackmagic ATEM Windows ATEM Windows ATEM 1 www blackmagicdesign com jp support 2 Blackmagic ATEM Switchers Black...

Page 221: ...oftware Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Mini Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP ATEM ATEM 1 ATEM ATEM 2...

Page 222: ...Software Control ATEM ATEM IP Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM IP Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP ATEM 1 Windows Mac Manual 2 IP 192 168 10 50 IP 51 Apply ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM A...

Page 223: ...Mac IP Windows IP ATEM Software Control NTSC 2160p29 97 1080i59 94 720p59 94 525i59 94 NTSC PAL 1080i50 720p50 625i50 PAL 223...

Page 224: ...SD NTSC 525i59 94 16 9 PAL 625i50 16 9 HDMI HD Ultra HD SDI ATEM Television Studio HD ATEM Television Studio Pro HD ATEM Television Studio Pro 4K SDI 5 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 10 8K 40 HD Ultra HD ATE...

Page 225: ...ATEM ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K 1 HDMI SDI 2 4 ATEM 30 Advanced Panel ATEM 10 x2 x8 ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 13 16 ATEM 6 9 ATEM Ultra HD 2 225...

Page 226: ...ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 10 13 16 16 HyperDeck ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 4 16 64 ATEM Constellation 8K HyperDeck ATEM 6 8 4 HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 226...

Page 227: ...1920 1080 M E 2 Control Panel HDMI SDI ATEM ATEM 6 8 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio 4 ATEM Software Control HyperDeck SDI HDMI HyperDeck ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM HyperDeck ATEM ATEM ATEM HDMI HD...

Page 228: ...320p 4320x7680 Ultra HD 2160p 3840x2160 1080i 1920x1080 HD 720p 1280 x 720 NTSC 720 x 486 PAL 720 x 576 HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDCP HDCP HDMI DVD HDCP HDCP Mini Converter Analog to SDI ATEM 1 M E Product...

Page 229: ...ATEM VPN ATEM Software Control IP IP IP ATEM IP IP DHCP IP DHCP IP IP IP 3 IP IP ATEM IP USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Advanced Panel DHCP IP IP IP IP ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATE...

Page 230: ...Blackmagic ATEM Setup USB 1 Blackmagic ATEM Setup USB 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 IP Configure IP Cancel Blackmagic ATEM Setup 4 IP Save 5 ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup Configure ATEM IP IP 230...

Page 231: ...IP ATEM Advanced Panel IP 1 LCD IP IP LCD 2 LCD IP 3 LCD IP 4 ATEM Advanced Panel LCD LCD IP IP IP IP IP IP USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup 231...

Page 232: ...IP ATEM Advanced Panel LCD 1 HOME LCD 2 3 IP DHCP IP DHCP DHCP DHCP IP DHCP ATEM Advanced Panel IP 192 168 10 60 DHCP IP DHCP IP IP DHCP 232...

Page 233: ...4 IP IP IP IP 5 6 ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 1 HyperDeck CUT AUTO 2 720p 1080i 8K 233...

Page 234: ...3 ATEM Constellation 8K 2 2 PROD TALK 4 Blackmagic Design CUT AUTO 5 CALL SDI Blackmagic Design 234...

Page 235: ...ATEM Blackmagic Design ATEM ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Software Installer ATEM Advanced Panel USB Blackmagic ATEM Switcher Mac PC ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Setup 235...

Page 236: ...tup Utility USB ATEM ATEM 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Update 4 ATEM 1 ATEM USB USB Advanced Panel Setup Utility USB ATEM ATEM 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Update 4 Advanced Panel ATEM Advanced Panel USB AT...

Page 237: ...tra HD HD SD SDI ATEM HDMI SDI XLR ATEM Production Switcher HDMI SDI HDMI Ultra HD HD SD Blackmagic Design H 264 HyperDeck HDMI SDI XLR SDI HDMI ATEM HD ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K HD Ultra HD ATEM...

Page 238: ...6 Aux Aux Aux SDI ATEM Constellation 8K Aux SDI SDI SDI M E ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 1 SDI M E 1 2 HD Ultra HD SDI 1 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 4 M E M...

Page 239: ...ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 40 HD Ultra HD 40 8K 10 8K 1 1 1 ATEM Constellation 8K 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 CUT AUTO CUT 4 4 AUTO 1 4 AUTO 239 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 240: ...LCD 4 DVE 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET DVE 6 SET MENU LCD AUTO LCD ATEM Software Control MP1 MP2 1 2 ATEM Constellation 8K 8K 1 HD Ultra HD 4 LCD 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 MENU 240 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 241: ...BARS CUT AUTO LCD CUT AUTO 2 LCD 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 SET 5 SET 6 MENU 1 CUT AUTO CUT AUTO 241 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 242: ...CUT CUT AUTO AUTO LCD LCD AUTO LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD SDI LCD 4 1 4 2 LCD 4 3 LCD 242 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 243: ...1 SET SET 2 LCD ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control 1 DSK 1 MIX 1 1 DSK 1 MIX LCD LCD DSK 1 MIX 1 ATEM FTB FTB FTB LCD 243 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 244: ...FTB Lock Lock Lock Lock Lock LCD PROD TALK ENG TALK LOCK 1 LOCK 2 ATEM Constellation 8K LCD LCD ATEM LCD SDI LCD ATEM Constellation 8K 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 7 SET 8 MENU 244 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 245: ...MENU LCD 4 ATEM Constellation 8K PROD TALK ENG TALK 5 XLR PROD TALK ENG TALK 2 2 ATEM Software Control ATEM Constellation 8K CALL CALL ATEM Constellation 8K 245 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 246: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1 ATEM Software Control 2 ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Contro...

Page 247: ...Blackmagic SDI ATEM ATEM Software Control 4 SHIFT 247 ATEM Software Control...

Page 248: ...Shift 1 0 11 20 Control Shift 1 0 11 20 CUT Control CUT Space CUT Return Enter AUTO ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K HD 64 4 Ultra HD 64 4 8K 24 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 64 2 ATEM Pro...

Page 249: ...4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 64 2 ATEM Constellation 8K 100 8K 1 HD 4K Ultra HD 4 1 ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM ATEM Software Control Audio HDMI SDI ATEM XLR RCA XLR 249 ATEM Software C...

Page 250: ...Studio 4K ATEM Production Broadcast Studio ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM Blackmagic 1 8 1 DaVinci Resolve ATEM Software Control ATEM Camera Control Blackmagic Setting ATEM Advanced Panel 250 ATEM So...

Page 251: ...E 2 ATEM Production Broadcast Studio 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 10 13 16 Aux 1 Blackmagic HyperDeck IP HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck RS 422 GVG ATEM Software Control 2 1 2 1 2 251 ATEM Software...

Page 252: ...ATEM Cam Blk SouperSource SSrc 2 M E ATEM SHIFT Bars 1 1 Col1 SHIFT 2 1 2 MP1 MP2 ATEM 3 SHIFT M E 2 Prg2 2 M E 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 3 M E 4 252 ATEM Software Control...

Page 253: ...CUT CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO ATEM Advanced Panel AUTO AUTO ATEM Advanced Panel DVE 5 ATEM Production Studio 4K DVE PREV TRANS DVE PREV TRANS 253 ATEM Software Control...

Page 254: ...BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 BKGD ON AIR TIE TIE DSK DSK tie DSK DSK DSK 1 ON AIR ON AIR DSK DSK AUTO AUTO DSK AUTO FTB FTB Fade To Black FTB 1 AFV 254 ATEM Software Control...

Page 255: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM 255 ATEM Software Control...

Page 256: ...1 2 ATEM 2 SuperSource 2 M E ATEM SuperSource PIP SuperSource ATEM M E 4 DVE DVE 1 M E M E 1 2 M E 4 M E M E 1 2 ATEM 2 Fade to Black Audio Follow Video AFV 256 ATEM Software Control...

Page 257: ...roadcast Studio 4K 4 HyperDeck ATEM 6 8 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio 4 ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDeck USB ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM ATEM 1 M E 2 M E 4 M E SDI HDMI ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broad...

Page 258: ...AFV EXT Cam 4 Cam 7 ON AFV AFV 258 ATEM Software Control...

Page 259: ...4 M E ATEM Cam 1 ON AFV Cam 2 AFV Cam 4 Cam 7 ON Cam 4 Cam 7 Cam 3 Cam 5 Cam 6 Cam 8 ON AFV ON ON AFV AFV AFV Audio Follow Video ON ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast Studio XLR 259 ATEM Software C...

Page 260: ...V AFV FTB AFV ON XLR ON XLR DIM DIM DIM XLR ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 5 XLR ATEM Constellation 8K XLR ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast Studio 260 ATEM Soft...

Page 261: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Fairlight ATEM Constellation 8K Fairlight 6 Fairlight Input Level 261 ATEM Software Control...

Page 262: ...6 6 6 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 6 6 262 ATEM Software Control...

Page 263: ...L ML MH H L 30 395Hz L 30Hz 395Hz ML 100Hz 1 48kHz MH 450Hz 7 91kHz 1 4 kHz 21 7 kHz Q Q Factor Q 2 3 4 5 Q 263 ATEM Software Control...

Page 264: ...6 3 4 5 6 264 ATEM Software Control...

Page 265: ...20dB 20dB 40dB 40dB 15 20dB 265 ATEM Software Control...

Page 266: ...EQ 8dB 50dB 45dB 0dB 0dB 18dB 60dB 1 0 1 1 1 1 10 1 0 5ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 50dB 45dB 0dB 0dB 18dB 60dB 0 5ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 266 ATEM Software Control...

Page 267: ...1 0 1 2 0 1 10 1 0 7ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 50dB 12dB 0dB 0 7ms 0 7ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 35dB XLR 45dB Fairlight Fairlight 1 0dB 2 2 2 1 3 EQ 4 EQ 5 EQ EQ 6 267 ATEM So...

Page 268: ...Fairlight EQ SHIFT 2 268 ATEM Software Control...

Page 269: ...1 1 ATEM PNG TGA BMP GIF JPEG TIFF WAV MP3 AIFF ATEM Photoshop ATEM 3 SHIFT ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel Photoshop 269 ATEM Software Control...

Page 270: ...HyperDeck ATEM ATEM 270 ATEM Software Control...

Page 271: ...0i59 94 1080i59 94 1080i59 94 1080p23 98 1080p23 98 1080p23 98 1080p24 1080p24 1080p24 1080p25 1080p25 1080p25 1080p29 97 1080p29 97 1080p29 97 1080p50 1080p50 1080p50 1080p59 94 1080p59 94 1080p59 94...

Page 272: ...94 Multi View Ultra HD Multi View 2160p29 97 HD 1080i59 94 1080p29 97 1080p59 94 SD HD HD 59 94fps 50fps Ultra HD 29 97fps 25fps HD ATEM Production Studio 4K Ultra HD HD SDI HD 1081i HD SDI HD SD HD...

Page 273: ...Level B Level A Level A 3G SDI XLR ATEM Constellation 8K XLR BNC MADI SDI HDMI SDI 15 16 ATEM 1 SDI 15 16 SDI 15 16 ATEM Constellation 8K SDI 13 14 15 16 ATEM Talkback Converter 4K ATEM Camera Conver...

Page 274: ...HD Ultra HD ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K 720p 3200 1080i 1080p 1600 2060p 400 4320p 100 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 720p 3200 1080i 1080p 1440 2060p 360 ATEM 1 M E 2 M E Production Studio 4K SD 900 7...

Page 275: ...Aux 8 1 8 1 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 1 8K 4 HD Ultra HD 8K 4 7 10 13 16 8 16 HD 16 9 4 3 SD 4 1 275 ATEM Software Control...

Page 276: ...ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K 1 HDMI SDI Input 1 1 HDMI SDI 276 ATEM Software Control...

Page 277: ...ced Panel Advanced Panel Camera 1 Camera 1 CAM1 HyperDeck HyperDeck 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM Software Control HyperDeck IP HyperDeck Blackmagic HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck RS 422 VISC...

Page 278: ...DI Aux Aux ATEM 1 6 Aux ATEM Constellation 8K Aux Mac Aux Aux Aux Aux Aux ATEM Constellation 8K Aux ATEM Software Control 24 HD Ultra HD 6 8K Aux Aux Aux Aux ATEM A B ATEM M E A B A B ATEM Software Co...

Page 279: ...ATEM Software Control USB 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 ATEM ATEM Software Control 4 ATEM Software Control XML ATEM Mac Command S Windows Ctrl S XML ATEM Software Control 279 ATEM Software Control...

Page 280: ...1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 ATEM 4 ATEM USB ATEM Software Control ATEM USB 280 ATEM Software Control...

Page 281: ...ro Studio Camera URSA Mini URSA Broadcast ATEM Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve ATEM ATEM SDI ATEM SDI SDI SDI SDI Studio Camera SFP ATEM SDI 1 Blackmagic SDI ATEM SDI 2 ATEM SDI SDI SDI 3 ID ATEM Cam 1 Stu...

Page 282: ...EM SDI 3 ATEM SDI ATEM SDI SDI 4 Blackmagic LCD Studio Camera 1 ATEM Cam 1 Camera Number 1 ATEM Software Control Blackmagic PGM ATEM Studio Converter Blackmagic Studio Camera Studio Camera SFP ATEM So...

Page 283: ...YRGB Blackmagic Detail DaVinci Resolve YRGB 3 YRGB Paste to all 283...

Page 284: ...SHIFT Mac command Windows CONTROL 284...

Page 285: ...dB 285...

Page 286: ...DaVinci Resolve CCU Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve RGB 286...

Page 287: ...YRGB YRGB Y ALT Command YRGB Y Y YRGB RGB DaVinci Resolve YRGB 50 50 180 287...

Page 288: ...B 100 RGB YRGB ATEM Blackmagic ATEM DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel ATEM DaVinci Resolve 12 5 5 ATEM Switcher 7 1 DaVinci Resolve Mi...

Page 289: ...DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve ATEM Software Control 3 DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel Y LIFT Y Y GAMMA Y Y GAIN Y CONTRAST HIGHLIGHTS SATURATION HUE LUM MIX RGB YRGB 289...

Page 290: ...EM Advanced Panel ATEM HyperDeck Extreme 8K HDR HyperDeck Extreme Control HyperDeck Blackmagic HyperDeck SDI HDMI ATEM HyperDeck 1 HyperDeck ATEM 2 HyperDeck REM REM HyperDeck HyperDeck Studio Mini LC...

Page 291: ...ation 8K SDI HyperDeck IP ATEM ATEM ATEM Software Control HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Software Control HyperDeck 4 HyperDeck IP HyperDeck IP HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck Hy...

Page 292: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck 5 HyperDeck ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 4 1 HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 292...

Page 293: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 2 HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck 293 HyperDeck...

Page 294: ...LED HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel LCD HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel LCD 4 4 HYPERDECK HyperDeck LCD HYPERDECK HYPERDECK ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel 3 A...

Page 295: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck 1 SDI 4 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck 1 2 3 4 IP HyperDeck IP ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck IP HyperDeck 3 3 HyperDeck IP IP 1 IP HyperDeck IP HyperDeck IP HYPERDECK HyperDeck 29...

Page 296: ...rDeck HYPERDECK 2 HYPERDECK 2 LCD HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck HYPERDECK HyperDeck 3 HyperDeck HYPERDECK HyperDeck 296 Hype...

Page 297: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck LCD 3 4 HyperDeck SHIFT 4 HyperDeck 297 HyperDeck...

Page 298: ...ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel 3 3 HyperDeck ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck 4 HyperDeck 1 ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel 3 LCD HyperDeck 298 HyperDeck...

Page 299: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM M E ATEM Advanced Panel 1 ATEM ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel 1 M E ATEM 1 1 4 M E LCD ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel 1 M E ATEM 1 299 ATEM...

Page 300: ...ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel ATEM Constellation 8K 4 M E ATEM ATEM SHIFT 20 2 SHIFT Aux 1 2 PROGRAM PROGRAM SHIFT 300 ATEM...

Page 301: ...PREVIEW PREVIEW SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT 2 2 Aux Aux 1 2 CUT CUT AUTO AUTO LCD LCD AUTO LED 301 ATEM...

Page 302: ...AUTO AUTO DVE 5 LCD ARM PREV TRANS PREV TRANS BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 BKGD 2 BKGD 302 ATEM...

Page 303: ...N AIR ON MACRO 10 10 LCD Advanced Panel ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel Downstream Keyers DSK DSK TIE DSK TIE DSK DSK tie DSK LCD DSK 1 DSK DSK CUT DSK CUT DSK DSK DSK DSK AUTO DSK AUTO DSK DSK LCD 303 ATEM...

Page 304: ...M E M E ATEM M E M E M E LCD FTB FTB LCD FTB FTB LCD AFV AFV LCD LCD 4 HOME LCD LCD LCD 1 WIPE 2 LCD 3 3 1 WIPE 2 LCD 3 HOME PREV TRANS PREV TRANS LCD VISCA 304 ATEM...

Page 305: ...3 DVE VISCA PTZ VISCA PTZ 1 VISCA ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM REMOTE RS 422 serial out RS 422 ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM RS 422 RS 422 DB 9 DE 9 RJ12 RS 422 LCD PTZ 305 ATEM...

Page 306: ...2 RS 422 REMOTE RS 422 ATEM PTZ PTZ LCD VISCA PTZ CAMERA CONTROL VISCA 1 VISCA VISCA 2 LCD 1 1 LCD RS 422 ATEM Advanced Panel VISCA PTZ CAMERA CONTROL VISCA VISCA 306 ATEM...

Page 307: ...SDI PTZ Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera SDI PTZ SDI Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera PTZ Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Design www blackmagicdesign com jp support PTZ PTZ RS 422 DB 9 PTZ ATEM ATEM A...

Page 308: ...HOME SETTINGS LCD HOME ATEM ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel M E Advanced Panel LCD ATEM 1 CUT PROGRAM 308 ATEM...

Page 309: ...CUT CUT CUT 1 2 CUT CUT AUTO DVE 309 ATEM...

Page 310: ...1 2 3 LCD 4 AUTO RATE AUTO 1 DVE 1 2 DVE 1 2 2 310 ATEM...

Page 311: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 MIX LCD 3 LCD 4 MIX LCD 1 3 DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP LCD 3 LCD 4 311 ATEM...

Page 312: ...DIP LCD 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 WIPE LCD 3 4 LCD 5 6 312 ATEM...

Page 313: ...SHIFT SHIFT Advanced Panel Z Advanced Panel X Y X Y 313 ATEM...

Page 314: ...DVE ATEM DVE DVE 1 ATEM Advanced Panel DVE 1 2 DVE DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 3 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 4 AUTO DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE Advanced Panel Z Advanced Panel X Y X Y 314 ATEM...

Page 315: ...DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM 1 DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 2 LCD 315 ATEM...

Page 316: ...3 4 AUTO 25 316 ATEM...

Page 317: ...4320p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD SD 180 DVE 1 2 3 4 LED ATEM Software Control 5 317 ATEM...

Page 318: ...ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Advanced Panel 10 1 LCD 2 3 4 LCD 1 LCD 2 3 LCD 318 ATEM...

Page 319: ...1 LCD 2 2 3 319 ATEM...

Page 320: ...ATEM Software Control Advanced Panel ATEM 2 color chip Advanced Panel 50 ATEM 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 4 ATEM 2 ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 4 8K 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 ATEM ATEM Software Contro...

Page 321: ...ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 3 4 MP 1 MP 2 2 MP 1 KEY MP 2 KEY 2 3 4 2 ATEM Software Control 1 2 3 1 1 ATEM Software Control 2 Advanced Panel 1 MEDIA PLAYERS 2 LCD 3 4 2 1 321 ATEM...

Page 322: ...1 1 ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM 1 CUT 1 caps lock SHIFT 2 ATEM Advanced Panel 322 ATEM...

Page 323: ...CUT CUT CUT 1 2 CUT Cut 1 caps lock 2 3 ATEM Advanced Panel CUT 1 2 CUT 323 ATEM...

Page 324: ...AUTO DVE AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 AUTO 6 7 324 ATEM...

Page 325: ...1 caps lock 2 3 4 5 6 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 4 AUTO AUTO 325 ATEM...

Page 326: ...1 DVE 1 2 DVE 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP MIX MIX 3 LCD Advanced Panel 4 326 ATEM...

Page 327: ...MIX LCD 1 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 327 ATEM...

Page 328: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP LCD 3 LCD 4 5 DIP LCD 328 ATEM...

Page 329: ...1 1 2 3 4 5 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 WIPE LCD 329 ATEM...

Page 330: ...3 4 LCD 5 Advanced Panel Z Advanced Panel X Y X Y ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource HD Ultra HD 4 8K 1 ATEM 1 M E 2 M E Production Switcher 330 ATEM...

Page 331: ...1 STNG 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 00 331 ATEM...

Page 332: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 STING 2 LCD 3 LCD MEDIA PLAYER 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 5 332 ATEM...

Page 333: ...1 3 00 DVE ATEM 1 2 M E DVE DVE 1 ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 4 8K 1 DVE DVE DVE 1 2 DVE 3 DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 333 ATEM...

Page 334: ...4 DVE ATEM Advanced Panel DVE 1 2 DVE DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 3 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 4 AUTO 334 ATEM...

Page 335: ...DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM 1 DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE Advanced Panel DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 335 ATEM...

Page 336: ...1 DVE DVE DVE DVE 2 DVE DVE 3 4 5 6 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 2 LCD 3 336 ATEM...

Page 337: ...4 AUTO DVE 1 DVE DVE DVE DVE Advanced Panel DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 25 337 ATEM...

Page 338: ...4320p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD SD 180 DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 4 Advanced Panel 5 ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 PREV TRANS PREV TRANS 4 5 PREV TRANS 338 ATEM...

Page 339: ...M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 ATEM Software Control Advanced Panel ATEM 2 4 M E DVE 2 DVE DVE DVE ME 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 12G SDI Aux ATEM Production Studio 4K 6G SDI KEY MASK 1 2 Aux SD HD Ul...

Page 340: ...1 1 2 340 ATEM...

Page 341: ...Photoshop ATEM Photoshop ATEM Photoshop Targa Photoshop ATEM Advanced Panel 341 ATEM...

Page 342: ...1 1 1 M E 1 2 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 LCD KEYS 2 LCD M E 3 4 5 DVE 342 ATEM...

Page 343: ...1 1 1 2 3 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 DSK 1 TIE LCD KEYS 2 DSK 1 DSK 2 3 LCD 4 343 ATEM...

Page 344: ...2 1 HDMI Blackmagic Design DeckLink Intensity ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K Advanced Chroma Key 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 344 ATEM...

Page 345: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 1 LCD KEYS 2 3 LCD 4 y suppress ATEM Advanced Panel SHIFT RESET SHIFT 345 ATEM...

Page 346: ...VE 1 2 0 3 Hue 6 4 5 Y Suppress Advanced Chroma Key ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM Switcher7 3 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3...

Page 347: ...Aux ME 1 PVW LCD M E 1 4 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 1 LCD KEYS 2 3 LCD 4 5 ATEM Advanced Panel Z Advanced Panel LCD 347 ATEM...

Page 348: ...M E 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 M E 1 1 M E 1 KEY MASK 1 348 ATEM...

Page 349: ...349 ATEM...

Page 350: ...1 18 1 350 ATEM...

Page 351: ...1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 4 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 LCD KEY 1 2 LCD 3 4 5 351 ATEM...

Page 352: ...DVE X Y DVE DVE 3D 2D DVE 1 DVE DVE 1 DVE DVE 352 ATEM...

Page 353: ...DVE DVE 1 DVE 1 1 M E 1 DVE 2 DVE ME 2 3 DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 DVE 1 KEY 1 2 LCD DVE 3 4 DVE 353 ATEM...

Page 354: ...RESET DVE X DVE Y DVE Rotation DVE Rot Rst DVE DVE Rst DVE DVE DVE DVE 3D 4 2D 3D 3D 3D DVE SHIFT 3D 354 ATEM...

Page 355: ...DVE 3D DVE EFFECTS KEYS DSK KEYS ATEM Software Control DVE DVE ON ON ON 1 ON 2 ON 355 ATEM...

Page 356: ...1 BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 2 3 CUT AUTO KEY 1 LIVE KEY 2 1 KEY 1 KEY 1 KEY 1 2 KEY 1 ON KEY 1 KEY 1 3 KEY 1 Key 2 ON BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 356 ATEM...

Page 357: ...4 KEI 1 KEY 2 KEY 2 KEY 2 DSK TIE 1 DSK CUT 2 DSK AUTO 3 DSK TIE DSK TIE DSK TIE Tie DSK 357 ATEM...

Page 358: ...shop Photoshop 1 Photoshop Photoshop ATEM Adobe Photoshop CS5 Photoshop ATEM ATEM ATEM Photoshop IP IP 192 168 10 240 Photoshop Photoshop ATEM 8K 7680x4320 Ultra HD 3840x2160 1080 HD 1920x1080 720p HD...

Page 359: ...Pool 1 2 Pre Multiply Alpha ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel Aux Aux SDI Aux ATEM Production Studio 4K 1 Aux ATEM Constellation 8K Aux Aux Aux Aux ATEM Software Control Advanced Panel Aux AT...

Page 360: ...ATEM Production Studio 4K LCD Aux Aux Aux LCD Aux Mac Aux Windows Aux ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control ATEM Aux ATEM Aux Aux 1 HOME Aux Aux 2 Aux Aux 1 3 M E SHIFT 4 HOME 360 Aux...

Page 361: ...DI ATEM Software Control AUX 1 1 1 RGB 1 1 2 2 RGB 2 2 SDI 1 2 1 2 1 2 Aux Aux SuperSource ATEM 2 M E SuperSource PIP ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 2 8K 1 SuperSource 2 ATEM SuperSource Mix Effect...

Page 362: ...UI SuperSource SuperSource ATEM Software Control SuperSource SuperSource ATEM Software Control SuperSource 4 ATEM Software Control X Y 2 4 Home Menu SuperSource Preset Menu 4 3 1 SuperSource Box 1 2 2...

Page 363: ...Crop Top Bottom Left Right Crop Reset ATEM Software Control ATEM Broadcast Panel Art ATEM Software Control ATEM Source Select ATEM SuperSource Art Background 1 M E 2 M E ATEM Software Control Foregrou...

Page 364: ...st Panel Borders DVD Foreground ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource ATEM Software Control ATEM SuperSource Copy To ATEM Software Control SuperSource ATEM SuperSource 1 ATEM Software Control Broadcast...

Page 365: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control Mac Shift Command M Windows Shift Control M Switcher Media Audio Camera 100 20 ATEM Software Control 365...

Page 366: ...3 00 3 00 3 00 ATEM Software Control 1 3 2 3 ATEM ATEM 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 1 4 5 ATEM Software Control ADD PAUSE 366...

Page 367: ...6 7 col1 8 9 3 00 3 10 AUTO 1 11 2 5 00 2 5 3 3 2 2 5 2 12 Blk AUTO ATEM 13 Transitions 14 1 367...

Page 368: ...1 ATEM 3 1 2 3 ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 368...

Page 369: ...1 2 3 4 Blackmagic Studio Camera DVE 369...

Page 370: ...20 1 20 370...

Page 371: ...nel ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM Software Control Transitions 6 1 LCD 2 LCD 6 3 LCD LCD 4 Color Bars SHIFT 5 Col...

Page 372: ...6 WIPE 7 LCD 2 00 8 AUTO 1 9 MACRO 10 2 LCD 2 11 Black SHIFT MIX AUTO ATEM 12 MACRO ATEM Advanced Panel 6 Macro 6 ATEM Software Control MACRO MACRO Macro 6 LCD ATEM Advanced Panel 1 ATEM 2 1 2 2 372...

Page 373: ...4 CCU 4 Blackmagic Design CCU 1 4 CCU Blackmagic Design 5 CCU ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design URSA Broadcast URSA Mini Pro 4 6K URSA Mini Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio C...

Page 374: ...ATEM Camera Control Panel ATEM ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM ATEM CCU LCD 374 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 375: ...ATEM IP IP DHCP IP DHCP IP IP IP LCD CCU LCD LCD DHCP IP 1 IP DHCP IP IP 2 IP DHCP IP 3 IP 4 5 375 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 376: ...IP IP IP IP IP IP 1 IP 2 LCD IP 3 SDI CCU CCU LCD CCU 376 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 377: ...LCD Aux ATEM A B LCD 8 CCU 1 4 A CCU 5 8 B CCU A B CCU CCU A B 377 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 378: ...LCD CCU 2 4 CCU 2 CCU 1 A B CCU 1 1 1 1 DHCP IP ATEM AUX Aux LCD Aux Aux AUX ATEM 1 Aux AUX 1 Aux Aux ATEM Constellation 8K 378 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 379: ...AUX Aux LED LCD CCU CCU 3 CCU CCU 379 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 380: ...RGB RGB BLACK FLARE RGB RGB Y Aux 2 380 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 381: ...CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU LCD LCD LCD CCU 381 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 382: ...CCU CCU CCU 5 1 CCU STORE 2 CCU 382 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 383: ...1 CCU 1 1 2 LCD 3 4 CCU 1 CCU CCU 1 ND CC Blackmagic Design ISO 383 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 384: ...2 ON F2 8 ATEM Software Control F5 6 F2 8 F5 6 F5 6 ATEM Software Control CCU F2 8 ATEM Software Control F5 6 F2 8 F2 8 384 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 385: ...W B Shutter Shutter W B W B BARS Shutter 50 1 50 2 Blackmagic SmartScope 4K BLACK FLARE BLACK FLARE RGB 385 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 386: ...D EXT EXT CCU F 386 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 387: ...F PREVIEW CCU PREVIEW Aux Aux Aux ATEM Software Control SENS COARSE 1 2 F4 0 F8 0 1 2 F4 0 3 4 F8 0 387 ATEM Camera ControlPanel...

Page 388: ...IRIS MB ACTIVE IRIS MB ACTIVE IRIS MB ACTIVE AUTO IRIS AUTO IRIS CALL CALL CCU CALL PANEL ACTIVE PANEL ACTIVE CCU CCU ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design CCU 388...

Page 389: ...nd Tally Interface Blackmagic SmartView Duo SmartView HD 1 GPI and Tally Interface 8 1 M E ATEM 1 GPI and Tally Interface 20 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 M E Production Studio 4K GPI and Tally Int...

Page 390: ...SB 1 GPI and Tally Interface ATEM 2 GPI and Tally Interface USB 3 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 4 ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel Configure Address Using Static IP GPI and Tally Interface IP 192 168 10 2 ATEM 2 M E...

Page 391: ...dress ATEM IP ATEM IP 192 168 10 240 Switcher Address 6 2 GPI and Tally Interface ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher 9 16 Set tally outputs Swither Inputs 1 8 7 Apply USB LED ATEM GPI and Tally Interface...

Page 392: ...XLR TRS TRS 1 4 XLR TRS ATEM RCA RCA HiFi iPod HiFi RCA ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR SMPTE ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XL...

Page 393: ...SDI HDMI ATEM HDMI SDI SDI HDMI ATEM Software Control Audio SDI HDMI ATEM XLM 1 4 XLM TRS ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR 393...

Page 394: ...I ATEM Constellation 8K MADI MADI ATEM Constellation 8K MADI BNC 100 75 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI BNC 1 4 TRS MADI MADI 1 64 24 48kHz 64 EQ 64 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI 1 8K MADI 1 1 10 SDI 1 10 1 2...

Page 395: ...HD Ultara HD MADI 1 1 30 SDI 1 30 1 2 31 32 TRS MADI 2 8K MADI 2 1 10 SDI 1 10 3 4 11 12 13 TRS 14 PGM HD Ultara HD MADI 2 1 30 SDI 1 30 3 4 31 32 PGM 395...

Page 396: ...B 2 MIDI Mac Applications Utilities Audio MIDI Setup Window Show MIDI Window MIDI Windows Device Manager Sound Video and Game Controllers 3 ATEM Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Con...

Page 397: ...ON MUTE LED LED Mackie Control 4 ATEM Software Control MIDI ATEM Software Control Audio ATEM ATEM MUTE ATEM ON ON ATEM Software Control MUTE MUTE ATEM ATEM 397...

Page 398: ...Prod TX Prod RX Prod RX Prod TX Eng RX Eng RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ATEM Constellation 8K RJ45 RS 422 RS 422 DE 9 RJ12 PTZ RS 422 DE 9 RJ12 8 3 2 7 1 4 6 9 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RS 422 PTZ TX TX GND GND RX RX 1...

Page 399: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 400: ...meter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for paramete...

Page 401: ...128 through 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and opera...

Page 402: ...values from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate...

Page 403: ...1 4 3 2 2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4...

Page 404: ...de _ _ BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd...

Page 405: ...pause ve multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage med...

Page 406: ...002710 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 407: ...ough the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they a...

Page 408: ...s 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on...

Page 409: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF Relative...

Page 410: ...jp support Blackmagic Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design ATEM About ATEM Software Control Mac Applications ATEM Software Control About ATEM Software Control Windows Start ATEM Software Control Help A...

Page 411: ...201602001 MSIP REM BMD 201602001 R REM BMD 201805002 MSIP REM BMD PStudio4K R REM BMD 201803001 MSIP REM BMD 201410016 R REM BMD 201804001 KCC REM BMD ATEMCameraConv MSIP REM BMD 201602002 KCC REM BMD...

Page 412: ...40 Blackmagic Design 2000m www P65Warnings ca gov IT 412...

Page 413: ...ackmagic Design d Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design Copyright 2020 Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design DeckLink HDLink Workgro...

Page 414: ...Manuel d installation et d utilisation Juin 2020 M langeurs de production en direct ATEM Fran ais...

Page 415: ...ann es et que vous prendrez beaucoup de plaisir faire de la production en direct Ce manuel d utilisation et d installation contient toutes les informations dont vous aurez besoin pour installer votre...

Page 416: ...es raccourcis clavier 454 Gestionnaire de m dias 454 Contr le des cam ras 456 Param tres du m langeur 457 Utilisation du panneau de contr le logiciel 457 Onglet Lecteurs multim dia 463 Utilisation du...

Page 417: ...Advanced Panel 577 Utiliser l ATEM Camera Control Panel 579 Alimenter le panneau 579 Connecter le panneau au m langeur 580 Modifier les param tres r seau 581 Agencement du panneau de contr le cam ra...

Page 418: ...oulez sans co t suppl mentaire Avec ATEM vous pouvez cr er une solution de diffusion en direct personnalis e adapt e vos besoins Qu est ce qu un m langeur M E Si vous avez d j utilis des m langeurs pe...

Page 419: ...mer que vous avez la bonne source avant de s lectionner la transition souhait e Vous pouvez voir ce qui se passe toutes les tapes du processus il est de ce fait difficile de faire des erreurs Seul le...

Page 420: ...directe A B dans les options de pr f rences du logiciel ATEM Veuillez consulter la section Contr le des transitions de ce manuel pour obtenir de plus amples informations sur ce r glage Les m langeurs...

Page 421: ...du r seau d ordres Il vous permet de commuter directement depuis la face avant de l appareil afin de confirmer rapidement toutes vos sources et de tester la configuration de votre production avant de...

Page 422: ...iliaire Le grand cran LCD offre un contr le des sorties ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K REMARQUE Si vous poss dez un mod le ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K vous pouvez mettre jour votre m langeur avec l...

Page 423: ...t Brancher le panneau de contr le mat riel ATEM Si vous avez fait l acquisition d un panneau mat riel ATEM vous n aurez qu une h te le brancher votre ordinateur car il est bien plus amusant de commenc...

Page 424: ...tourage famili re avec la configuration des adresses IP Par d faut le m langeur est r gl sur une adresse IP fixe de 192 168 10 240 et les ATEM Advanced Panels sont r gl s sur une adresse IP fixe de 19...

Page 425: ...Le logiciel ATEM installe les composants suivants utilis s par les m langeurs ATEM ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup L utilitaire Blackmagic ATEM Setup permet de configurer les param tres r...

Page 426: ...lisez les exemples de graphiques pour explorer les fonctionnalit s internes de la biblioth que de m dias et des incrustations Installer le logiciel Blackmagic ATEM Software sous Windows Il est recomma...

Page 427: ...ce dossier Utilisez les exemples de graphiques pour explorer les fonctionnalit s internes de la biblioth que de m dias et des incrustations Connecter un ordinateur Vous pouvez brancher votre ordinate...

Page 428: ...ement d un param tre r seau r gl sur votre ordinateur Il est tr s simple et rapide de modifier les param tres r seau Pour modifier les param tres r seau 1 Ouvrez les param tres r seau de votre ordinat...

Page 429: ...a fen tre relative aux param tres de l ATEM Software Control Configurer le standard vid o de votre m langeur Vous pouvez r gler le standard vid o correspondant la r gion dans laquelle vous travaillez...

Page 430: ...res des entr es vid o du multi view R gler les pr f rences audio L onglet Audio vous permet de s lectionner les sorties utiliser pour le contr le de l audio Vous pouvez galement couper le son du r sea...

Page 431: ...petites tandis que l ATEM Constellation 8K offre des options additionnelles pour afficher 4 7 13 ou 16 fen tres De nombreuses sources externes et internes peuvent tre s lectionn es pour tre affich es...

Page 432: ...K Les vum tres peuvent tre activ s ou d sactiv s individuellement en cliquant sur l ic ne correspondante au sein de chaque fen tre source ou tous en m me temps en cliquant sur le bouton Activer Vous p...

Page 433: ...l HyperDeck au m langeur ATEM et son contr le via l ATEM Software Control ou un panneau de contr le mat riel ATEM consultez la section Contr ler des HyperDeck de ce manuel Tous les connecteurs du m l...

Page 434: ...vid o HDMI ce qui veut dire que le fabricant ne permet pas l utilisateur de visualiser le contenu sur un autre support qu une t l vision Vous ne pourrez donc pas visualiser les images provenant de ce...

Page 435: ...x de contr le puissent se connecter un emplacement stable Vous devez donc trouver une adresse IP fixe disponible dans la plage de votre r seau Les panneaux de contr le peuvent tre r gl s sur le protoc...

Page 436: ...es param tres r seau Comprendre les param tres r seau du panneau mat riel ATEM Configurez les param tres r seau du panneau de contr le mat riel partir du menu de configuration du r seau Network Setup...

Page 437: ...sous l cran LCD 4 Appuyez sur le bouton multifonction Sauvegarder pour confirmer le changement Le panneau se connectera alors au m langeur Sur l ATEM Advanced Panel appuyez sur le bouton multifonctio...

Page 438: ...er si vous voulez que le panneau utilise une adresse IP fixe ou soit automatiquement attribu une adresse IP du serveur DHCP Activez ou d sactivez le param tre DHCP en appuyant sur le bouton multifonct...

Page 439: ...r pour les confirmer Configurer le workflow avec l ATEM Constellation 8K Si vous utilisez l ATEM Constellation 8K votre m langeur int gre un panneau de contr le Ce dernier vous permet de v rifier vos...

Page 440: ...fl ches d augmentation et de r duction de volume pour ajuster le niveau de monitoring Cela vous permet de mixer les niveaux afin d entendre exactement ce dont vous avez besoin 4 Une fois la fonction...

Page 441: ...cente est install e sur votre ordinateur Mettez toujours tout votre mat riel jour en m me temps afin que tous les appareils aient la m me version du logiciel Programme d installation du logiciel ATEM...

Page 442: ...Ethernet vous pouvez effectuer la mise jour via la connexion Ethernet REMARQUE Lors de la mise jour du logiciel via USB v rifiez que l Advanced Panel est bien le seul appareil ATEM connect par c ble U...

Page 443: ...e HDMI Comme la sortie programme SDI cette sortie commute entre les formats Ultra HD HD et SD Elle d livre le signal vid o du programme principal du m langeur et peut tre connect e des t l visions des...

Page 444: ...visualisation du m langeur ainsi que la pr visualisation des transitions Cette sortie est id ale lorsque vous d sirez utiliser un moniteur de pr visualisation pleine r solution L audio de cette sortie...

Page 445: ...l entr e 1 s allume en rouge Cela signifie que l entr e 1 est l antenne Si une source vid o est connect e l entr e 1 elle appara tra sur la sortie programme Contrairement un panneau de contr le progr...

Page 446: ...les menus l cran peuvent galement tre s lectionn s sur l ATEM Software Control ou sur un panneau de contr le mat riel En plus des boutons repr sentant les entr es vous trouverez galement les sources M...

Page 447: ...ram tres 3 Appuyez sur le bouton Set pour ouvrir le menu Param tres 4 Faites d filer la liste jusqu au menu Mode et s lectionnez le l aide du bouton Set 5 Allez sur le mode Cut Bus et s lectionnez le...

Page 448: ...ez vous retrouver avec un m langeur qui effectue des op rations tr s inattendues Niveaux audio La molette situ e sur le panneau avant sert principalement au r glage du niveau audio mais peut galement...

Page 449: ...ncrustateur en aval ou sur le panneau de contr le Vous pouvez assigner une source de d coupe une entr e ou un lecteur multim dia Ce r glage peut tre effectu depuis les menus l cran ou un panneau de co...

Page 450: ...es menus l cran Les menus de l cran LCD permettent d effectuer presque toutes les op rations du m langeur Dans les exemples de cette section nous avons utilis les menus Nous vous recommandons d explor...

Page 451: ...e l aide de l ATEM Software Control ou du panneau avant Le bouton s lectionn est allum en rouge vous pouvez donc ajuster son niveau avec les boutons haut et bas La face arri re de l ATEM Constellation...

Page 452: ...ent les options Param tres du r seau Contr le des transitions et Langue Pr f rences g n rales L ATEM Software Control peut tre affich en anglais allemand espagnol fran ais italien japonais cor en port...

Page 453: ...boutons r gl sur le panneau de contr le logiciel n affectera pas celui du panneau de contr le mat riel Vous pouvez assigner une cam ra partir du menu d roulant Panneau de contr le du m langeur Le pan...

Page 454: ...de sortie programme Appuyez et rel chez Contr le ensuite 1 0 Commutation directe de la source des entr es 1 8 du m langeur au signal de sortie programme La commutation directe reste activ e est le voy...

Page 455: ...poss de 4 lecteurs multim dia qui se partagent la biblioth que de m dias Pour plus d informations sur la longueur des clips pour les diff rents mod les et les formats vid o consultez le Tableau de lon...

Page 456: ...uniquement de la biblioth que de m dias et ne prend pas en charge les clips Si vous pr f rez utiliser une console de mixage audio externe il suffit de d sactiver l audio sur toutes les entr es et d ac...

Page 457: ...oprement vers une source de l HyperDeck Pour plus d information sur la fa on d utiliser les enregistreurs disque HyperDeck avec le m langeur ATEM consultez la section Contr le de l HyperDeck de ce man...

Page 458: ...langeur SUPERSOURCE Cette fonctionnalit est disponible sur tous les m langeurs ATEM qui poss dent plus de 1 M E S lectionnez le bouton SHIFT pour obtenir la mire de barres couleurs BARS Mire de barres...

Page 459: ...et jour au fur et mesure de la transition pour indiquer le nombre d images restant Si un ATEM Advanced Panel est connect l indicateur du levier de transition situ sur le panneau se met jour afin de fo...

Page 460: ...que la DSK passe l antenne avec la transition suivante La DSK transitera pour la dur e sp cifi e sur la zone d affichage Dur e de la section Contr le des transitions Lorsque la DSK est li e le signal...

Page 461: ...les fonctions disponibles sur le m langeur Comme chaque mod le ATEM poss de des fonctions diff rentes les palettes ne sont pas toujours identiques Les palettes montrent galement l ordre de traitement...

Page 462: ...tres de chaque type de transition Par exemple pour la transition Dip la palette poss de un menu d roulant qui vous permet de s lectionner la source Dip Pour la transition Wipe la palette affiche toute...

Page 463: ...sation du mixeur audio L onglet Audio permet de mixer des sources audio connect es n importe quel m langeur ATEM via HDMI SDI et audio externe mais aussi partir des lecteurs multim dia int gr s sur le...

Page 464: ...io Utilisez le fader du niveau audio pour r gler le niveau de gain audio pour chaque cam ra et source audio Le nombre vert situ au dessous de chaque vum tre affiche le niveau audio maximal r gl par le...

Page 465: ...la source vid o qui lui est associ e n est pas l antenne Le voyant tally rouge reste allum car l audio est toujours l antenne La s lection de cette option d sactive automatiquement l option AFV AFV L...

Page 466: ...R du moniteur D s lectionnez ON pour d sactiver l audio via la sortie XLR du moniteur DIM S lectionnez DIM pour r duire temporairement le niveau audio du moniteur sans avoir ajuster le fader S lection...

Page 467: ...en charge la r duction de bruit R aliser le mixage audio l aide des commandes Fairlight avanc es L ATEM Constellation 8K int gre des commandes audio Fairlight avanc es qui permettent d am liorer la q...

Page 468: ...ir l galiseur param trique d une entr e ou de la sortie master cliquez sur l indicateur correspondant Cliquez sur l indicateur de l galiseur d une entr e pour ouvrir l galiseur param trique 6 bandes L...

Page 469: ...ces s lectionnez un filtre notch dans la liste d roulante puis cliquez sur chaque pr r glage de plage de fr quences Vous verrez l effet de filtre se d placer l emplacement de la courbe du graphique qu...

Page 470: ...ermet d augmenter ou de r duire le volume des basses fr quences du graphique Notch Passe haut Passe bas Ce filtre permet de supprimer ou de couper une fr quence d finie Ce filtre supprime les tr s bas...

Page 471: ...l expanseur uniquement lorsque le niveau du signal descend au dessous de 40dB Plage Ce param tre d finit la plage de d cibels affect e par la fonction Ratio Ce param tre d finit la force maximale de l...

Page 472: ...ou pour cr er des changements de niveaux audio fluides dans le signal CONSEIL Il est judicieux d appliquer le compresseur apr s avoir r gl les commandes de l galiseur Make up Ce param tre permet d aug...

Page 473: ...r une des entr es mono en deux canaux s par s pour disposer d une sortie st r o allez dans les param tres g n raux du m langeur et naviguez sur l onglet Audio Activez ensuite les cases repr sentant le...

Page 474: ...votre ordinateur sont affich s et vous pouvez s lectionner des dossiers partir de ces derniers Pour visualiser les sous dossiers il suffit de cliquer sur les fl ches situ es c t de chaque dossier La f...

Page 475: ...ocaliser les clips et les images que vous avez charg s Cela peut s av rer tr s utile car vous verrez une liste repr sentant les num ros ainsi que les noms de fichier des images fixes et des clips de l...

Page 476: ...et du r glage distance pr sent s sous forme d onglets Param tres g n raux Configuration du standard vid o du m langeur La section Vid o permet de s lectionner le standard vid o utilis par le m langeu...

Page 477: ...160p24 2160p24 2160p24 2160p25 2160p25 2160p25 2160p29 97 2160p29 97 2160p29 97 2160p50 2160p50 2160p59 94 2160p59 94 4320p23 98 4320p24 4320p25 4320p29 97 4320p50 4320p59 94 Pour configurer le standa...

Page 478: ...respectivement de la vid o HD 29 97 ou 25 images par seconde Configuration des sorties down converties Lorsque vous utilisez les mod les ATEM Production Studio 4K en Ultra HD la sortie programme HD S...

Page 479: ...e dans le param tre Audio de la fen tre de param trage Configuration du signal de sortie audio Canaux audio SDI 15 et 16 Il se peut que vous deviez relier en boucle une des sorties de l ATEM vers une...

Page 480: ...de m dia Tableau de longueur de clip M langeur ATEM Format vid o Longueur du clip ATEM Constellation 8K 720p 3200 images 1080i 1080p 1600 images 2160p 400 images 4320p 100 images ATEM 4 M E Broadcast...

Page 481: ...uant sur le bouton Activer ou D sactiver situ sous l intitul vum tres Il est galement possible d activer ou de d sactiver les vum tres individuellement en cliquant directement sur l ic ne vum tre au s...

Page 482: ...ue HDMI ou SDI Vous pouvez identifier les connexions commutables sur la face arri re du m langeur car toutes les entr es sont num rot es et les entr es commutables et leurs libell s poss dent le m me...

Page 483: ...le libell long et Cam1 dans le libell court Param tres HyperDeck Param tres HyperDeck Vous pouvez brancher jusqu 4 enregistreurs disque Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio et les contr ler l aide du logiciel...

Page 484: ...e sur l ATEM Software Control dans lequel vous pouvez s lectionner 24 sorties HD ou Ultra HD ou 6 sorties 8K Vous pouvez ensuite choisir la source que vous souhaitez associer pour le routage Il y a to...

Page 485: ...i vous effectuez votre sauvegarde et que la case Tout s lectionner est activ e l ATEM Software Control sauvegarde la totalit des param tres de votre m langeur Si vous souhaitez sauvegarder des param t...

Page 486: ...conserver certains param tres il suffit de les sauvegarder sur votre ordinateur ainsi que sur un disque dur externe par exemple sur une cl USB Cela vous permettra d emmener vos param tres avec vous et...

Page 487: ...et cette derni re d tectera les paquets de contr le dans la connexion SDI et vous permettra de contr ler les fonctionnalit s de la cam ra Si votre Blackmagic Studio Camera est quip e d un module SFP...

Page 488: ...en d un ATEM Studio Converter Afin d utiliser la connexion fibre optique votre Studio Camera doit tre quip e d un module SFP en option Panneau de contr le pour cam ra Lancez le logiciel ATEM Software...

Page 489: ...atique Roue ma tresse Utilisez la roue ma tresse situ e sous la roue chromatique pour effectuer des ajustements de contraste sur tous les canaux YRGB en m me temps ou uniquement de luminance pour les...

Page 490: ...ssus du curseur Limite et d placez le vers le haut pour faire un zoom avant ou vers le bas pour faire un zoom arri re Limite Le param tre Limite est situ droite du contr le de l iris niveau de noir et...

Page 491: ...oleil lors d un tournage en ext rieur et qu il vous faut augmenter la luminosit de votre image Il faut bien garder l esprit que le fait d ajouter du gain augmentera le bruit dans vos images Contr le d...

Page 492: ...nsi qu une interface de correction colorim trique primaire compl te Vous disposez pr sent de roues chromatiques et de param tres tels que la saturation Vous pouvez galement visualiser tous les param t...

Page 493: ...e ALT ou Command enfonc e et d placez la roue vers la gauche ou vers la droite Comme le correcteur colorim trique prend en charge un traitement YRGB il vous permet de faire preuve de cr ativit et de c...

Page 494: ...pas de vrai ou de faux Le meilleur param trage est donc celui qui vous pla t le plus D placez les curseurs vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour ajuster les param tres Contraste Saturation Teinte et L...

Page 495: ...ctant que la luminance du gamma Y Gain Permet de modifier le contraste de l image via un ajustement n affectant que la luminance des hautes lumi res Contrast Tournez la molette dans le sens des aiguil...

Page 496: ...missions en direct HyperDeck Extreme 8K HDR et HyperDeck Extreme Control Connecter les HyperDecks Pour connecter un Blackmagic HyperDeck des cam ras et d autres sources vid o il suffit de brancher ces...

Page 497: ...saisir l adresse IP de votre HyperDeck dans la case Adresse IP et de choisir la source laquelle vous souhaitez le brancher dans le menu d roulant Entr e Cliquez sur Connecter votre HyperDeck est pr t...

Page 498: ...z galement d s lectionner la fonction Lecture auto Contr ler des HyperDecks avec le logiciel ATEM Pour contr ler les HyperDecks connect s au m langeur cliquez sur l onglet Lecteurs multim dia sur le p...

Page 499: ...cture en boucle Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire en boucle le clip s lectionn Cliquez nouveau sur le m me bouton pour une lecture en boucle de tous les clips de la liste de m dias de l HyperDeck Pour v...

Page 500: ...ngeur comme d crit pr c demment dans la section Connecter des HyperDecks utilisez les boutons du System Control et de l cran LCD de l ATEM Advanced Panel pour configurer et contr ler l HyperDeck Pour...

Page 501: ...eck allez sur la troisi me page de configuration de l HyperDeck l aide des fl ches gauche ou droite ou appuyez sur le num ro 3 du pav num rique lorsque vous vous trouvez dans le menu de configuration...

Page 502: ...ccord sera retard d un nombre d images pr d fini afin d obtenir une transition impeccable Cela ressemble au r glage du preroll sur un magn toscope Vous pouvez modifier la dur e du d calage en changean...

Page 503: ...Stop Lecture en boucle Retour et Avance rapide pour passer d un clip l autre CONSEIL Pour lire tous les clips maintenez le bouton Shift appuy et pressez le bouton multifonction de lecture Sur la quatr...

Page 504: ...outon fl che droite naviguez jusqu la 4i me page pour acc der aux commandes de transport R glez l HyperDeck sur un lot de commandes de transport l aide de la molette multifonction Il est important de...

Page 505: ...anneau se reportent l autre Vous pouvez galement utiliser les deux panneaux en m me temps Si vous souhaitez profiter d une installation plus avanc e vous pouvez connecter plusieurs panneaux mat riels...

Page 506: ...es de la s lection des sources du programme Program et de la pr visualisation Preview En appuyant sur le bouton SHIFT vous pouvez modifier la zone d affichage des noms de sources et d voiler des sour...

Page 507: ...one d affichage des noms de sources Il permet d attribuer des sources aux sorties auxiliaires et aux incrustateurs Lorsque le bouton macro est activ cette rang e de boutons est galement utilis e pour...

Page 508: ...on de transition ce qui donne l occasion l op rateur de v rifier une transition dip mix wipe ou DVE en l ex cutant sur le signal de sortie pr visualisation l aide du levier de transition Lorsque vous...

Page 509: ...veuillez consulter le paragraphe Enregistrer des macros avec un ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel de la section Utiliser des macros Section Incrustateurs en aval DSK TIE Le bouton DSK TIE active le DSK ainsi...

Page 510: ...ts sous un titre de menu cela signifie que vous pouvez naviguer parmi autant de pages de r glages qu il y a de points Pour cela il vous suffit d appuyer sur les fl ches gauche et droite Par exemple po...

Page 511: ...t Zoom des cam ras Vous pouvez facilement contr ler plusieurs cam ras l une apr s l autre en appuyant sur le bouton Camera control puis en s lectionnant chaque cam ra l aide du pav num rique Ajustez e...

Page 512: ...ont bien d tect es Pour d tecter les appareils connect s 1 Appuyez sur le bouton multifonction VISCA 2 Appuyez sur le bouton multifonction D tecter La premi re cam ra connect e votre m langeur appara...

Page 513: ...les La sensibilit peut varier en fonction des cam ras connect es distance Si vous souhaitez connecter des commandes PTZ personnalis es l aide du connecteur DB 9 RS 422 veuillez consulter la section in...

Page 514: ...sque vous travaillez avec ces panneaux le contr le de votre m langeur est intuitif Ces derniers disposent d un cran LCD ainsi que de molettes et de boutons multifonctions qui vous permettent de config...

Page 515: ...rouve pr sent sur le bus Program et vice versa CONSEIL Il est pr f rable d utiliser la section de contr le des transitions pour effectuer les transitions car elle permet de v rifier le contenu vid o s...

Page 516: ...ransition d sir et en appuyant sur le bouton AUTO La dur e de transition qui a t utilis e pr c demment est gard e en m moire pour le type de transition en question jusqu ce qu elle soit nouveau modifi...

Page 517: ...Dip m lange progressivement une troisi me source la source Dip Par exemple on peut utiliser la transition Dip pour effectuer un flash blanc ou pour faire appara tre le logo du sponsor rapidement sur...

Page 518: ...ransition Wipe Effectuer une transition Wipe avec un ATEM Advanced Panel 1 Sur le bus Preview s lectionnez la source vid o que vous d sirez voir figurer sur le signal de sortie programme 2 Appuyez sur...

Page 519: ...de la transition Wipe en secondes et en images Symmetry Sym trie Ce param tre permet de contr ler les proportions du motif Par exemple la modification de ce param tre vous permettra de changer un cerc...

Page 520: ...ons multifonctions pour configurer les param tres du DVE Par exemple vous pouvez choisir le motif le mouvement et la direction du DVE et r gler la dur e de la transition 4 Effectuez la transition en t...

Page 521: ...tation volante Le DVE sera alors nouveau disponible pour une transition DVE La transition Logo Wipe est une transition populaire qui utilise le DVE et qui fait glisser un graphique travers l cran sur...

Page 522: ...ecteur multim dia diff rent ou une source diff rente 4 Appuyez sur le bouton Auto pour effectuer une transition automatique ou utilisez le levier de transition pour effectuer une transition manuelle P...

Page 523: ...Sur le bus Preview s lectionnez la source vid o que vous d sirez voir figurer sur le signal de sortie programme 2 S lectionnez le type de transition l aide des boutons de la section de contr le des tr...

Page 524: ...s 3 S lectionnez un emplacement vide l aide de la molette 4 Appuyez sur le bouton multifonction Save situ au dessus de l cran LCD pour sauvegarder le profil Votre profil est maintenant sauvegard sur l...

Page 525: ...profil utilisateur que vous souhaitez remplacer l aide de la molette Si le texte au dessus de l emplacement du profil est orange cela signifie que le profil est en cours d utilisation 3 Appuyez sur l...

Page 526: ...ns Wipe ou en tant que couleur interm diaire pour une transition Dip comme un fondu au blanc par exemple Pour r gler une source de couleur sur le panneau de contr le logiciel allez tout simplement sur...

Page 527: ...dia sur le panneau de contr le logiciel 1 Sur la fen tre M langeur s lectionnez la palette Lecteurs multim dia 2 Utilisez le menu d roulant M dia pour s lectionner un clip ou une image fixe dans la b...

Page 528: ...t l arri re plan qui change il n y a donc aucun changement au niveau des incrustations en amont et en aval Effectuer une transition Cut depuis le bus Programme sur le panneau de contr le logiciel Sur...

Page 529: ...avier 1 V rifiez que la touche Verr maj est d sactiv e 2 Appuyez sur la touche du clavier qui correspond au num ro de la source vid o que vous d sirez voir figurer sur le signal de sortie programme La...

Page 530: ...z le type de transition l aide des boutons de la section de contr le des transitions 3 Dans la palette Transitions s lectionnez l onglet repr sentant le m me type de transition que celui s lectionn da...

Page 531: ...lisation sont invers es pour indiquer que la source vid o qui se trouvait pr alablement sur le bus de pr visualisation se trouve pr sent sur le bus du programme et vice versa Effectuer une transition...

Page 532: ...de sortie programme lors d une transition Mix Param tres de la transition Mix Effectuer une transition Mix sur le panneau de contr le logiciel 1 Sur le bus Preview Pr visualisation s lectionnez la sou...

Page 533: ...nal de sortie programme lors d une transition Dip Param tres de la transition Dip Effectuer une transition Dip sur le panneau de contr le logiciel 1 Sur le bus Preview Pr visualisation s lectionnez la...

Page 534: ...lectionner la source Dip Vous pouvez galement utiliser le bus Select S lection des sources 5 Effectuez la transition en tant que transition automatique ou en tant que transition manuelle partir de la...

Page 535: ...ionnez Wipe 4 Utilisez les param tres de la palette Wipe pour configurer la transition 5 Effectuez la transition en tant que transition automatique ou en tant que transition manuelle partir de la sect...

Page 536: ...v la transition passe du param tre Normal au param tre Invers chaque fois que la transition est effectu e Le texte s allume en orange lorsqu il est s lectionn Border Bordure Largeur de la bordure Soft...

Page 537: ...le logiciel Source Lecteur multim dia utilis pour la lecture du clip lors d une transition anim e Clip Duration Dur e du clip Cette fonction fait r f rence la longueur de l animation et devrait normal...

Page 538: ...urnez la molette multifonctions Source du menu de l cran LCD et s lectionnez le lecteur multim dia de votre choix Utilisez les fl ches pour ajuster les param tres preroll trigger mix et duration si n...

Page 539: ...ain Le param tre gain modifie lectroniquement la valeur qui permet d adoucir les contours de l incrustation dans le clip lu par le lecteur multim dia Ajustez la valeur gain jusqu l obtention de l adou...

Page 540: ...igurer sur le signal de sortie programme 2 Appuyez sur le bouton DVE pour s lectionner le type de transition DVE Les param tres de la transition DVE s affichent sur l cran LCD REMARQUE Si le DVE est u...

Page 541: ...Inverse le signal Key d coupe lorsqu une incrustation n est pas pr multipli e Partage des ressources DVE L ATEM comprend un canal DVE qui peut tre utilis dans une incrustation en amont ou pour effect...

Page 542: ...nel 1 Appuyez sur le bouton DVE dans la section de contr le des transitions Le menu de la transition DVE s affiche alors sur l cran LCD Si le DVE est utilis dans une incrustation en amont le style de...

Page 543: ...tu e Le voyant lumineux du bouton Normal ou du bouton Reverse indique la direction de la transition suivante Fill Source Remplissage Ce signal est le graphique que vous ferez passer sur la transition...

Page 544: ...nsition Sur l Advanced Panel Les voyants du levier de transition affichent galement la position et la progression de la transition Sur le panneau de contr le logiciel le levier de transition virtuel a...

Page 545: ...roulants des palettes Incrustations en amont et Incrustations en aval du panneau de contr le logiciel Sur l Advanced Panel les signaux Fill Remplissage et Key D coupe sont s lectionnables partir du bu...

Page 546: ...eux sources vid o le signal fill remplissage et le signal key ou cut d coupe Le signal de remplissage contient une image vid o qui va tre superpos e l arri re plan alors que le signal de d coupe perme...

Page 547: ...nt que fichier image Targa ou le t l chargez directement partir de la biblioth que de m dias vous pouvez s lectionner l option Incrustation pr multipli e pour obtenir une incrustation de bonne qualit...

Page 548: ...ultifonctions situ s au dessus de l cran 3 Tournez la molette multifonction correspondante au Type d incrustation et choisissez l incrustation Luma 4 Utilisez les molettes Remplissage et D coupe pour...

Page 549: ...et D coupe pour sp cifier les sources de l incrustation Si vous souhaitez effectuer une incrustation en luminance s lectionnez la m me source pour le remplissage et la d coupe 3 Ajustez les param tres...

Page 550: ...otre m langeur ATEM l aide de la sortie HDMI de l ordinateur en question ou d une carte d acquisition et de lecture vid o telle que DeckLink ou Intensity de Blackmagic Design et de lire les clips vid...

Page 551: ...l Vous pouvez galement appuyer sur le bouton Keyers pour afficher ce menu 2 S lectionnez l incrustation Chroma l aide de la molette correspondante 3 S lectionnez la source de remplissage en tournant l...

Page 552: ...onction peut vous aider centrer l ajustement de la teinte Incrustation volante Active ou d sactive les effets DVE Ajuster les param tres l aide du vecteurscope Il est possible de configurer une incrus...

Page 553: ...rustateur 1 sur le signal de sortie pr visualisation Le menu des incrustations s affichera automatiquement sur l cran LCD du Contr le Syst me Syst me Control Vous pouvez galement appuyer sur le bouton...

Page 554: ...lies Nous vous recommandons de d placer le curseur et de vous arr ter d s que l avant plan devient solide Arri re plan Le curseur de l Arri re plan et la molette r glent l opacit de la zone incrust e...

Page 555: ...le curseur du d bordement pour supprimer les teintes ind sirables qui apparaissent sur les bords des l ments de l avant plan Par exemple les reflets verts sur les bords Suppression des reflets L outil...

Page 556: ...formes qui peuvent tre redimensionn es et positionn es afin de produire le signal de d coupe d sir Combiner un arri re plan avec un signal de remplissage et un motif Arri re plan Une image plein cran...

Page 557: ...te op ration s lectionne automatiquement le menu Keyers sur l cran du Contr le syst me System Control Appuyer sur le bouton KEY 1 lie l incrustation la transition suivante Elle passera ainsi l antenne...

Page 558: ...lante Active ou d sactive les effets DVE Ajuster la position X Y d un motif Vous pouvez repositionner le point central de certains motifs Pour positionner un motif naviguez jusqu la page de s lection...

Page 559: ...es de l incrustation DVE R gler une incrustation DVE sur l incrustateur en amont 1 l aide d un ATEM Advanced Panel 1 Appuyez sur le bouton KEY 1 dans la section des transitions suivantes pour activer...

Page 560: ...rne Biseau interne bordure 3D Param tres de la bordure DVE Les molettes et les boutons multifonctions de la section Contr le Syst me System Control permettent d ajuster les param tres de la bordure Co...

Page 561: ...t riel le masque pour chaque incrustation en amont et en aval est configurable partir du menu Mask dans la section System Control Ce dernier est disponible partir des menus EFFECTS KEYS ou DSK KEYS Su...

Page 562: ...ntenne Signal de sortie programme apr s la transition Signal de sortie programme avant la transition La section Next Transition du panneau de contr le avant la transition Exemple 2 Dans cet exemple l...

Page 563: ...signal de sortie programme 2 Utilisez le bouton DSK AUTO pour faire un fondu en entr e ou en sortie de l incrustation en aval sur le signal de sortie programme pour la dur e affich e sur la section DS...

Page 564: ...cement du m langeur pour le plug in La premi re fois que vous ex cutez le plug in d exportation Photoshop ce dernier vous demandera de s lectionner l emplacement de votre m langeur Cet emplacement fai...

Page 565: ...onction m lange la couleur du graphique avec son canal alpha lors de l exportation pour lui permettre d avoir des contours lisses qui se fondent la vid o Utiliser les sorties auxiliaires Les sorties a...

Page 566: ...r auxiliaire puissant Menus de commande des sorties auxiliaires sur Mac Menus de commande des sorties auxiliaires sur Windows Menus de l ATEM Software Control pour router les sorties pour l ATEM Const...

Page 567: ...e contient aucune incrustation en aval Il est utile lorsque vous d sirez enregistrer un master sans logos ni graphiques incrust s Clean Feed 2 Ce signal est identique au Clean Feed 1 Cependant il est...

Page 568: ...ensuite modifier les param tres des fen tres 2 4 en passant par les m mes tapes Si vous avez fait une erreur il suffit de cliquer sur le symbole en forme de roue dent e en haut droite de la section C...

Page 569: ...nneau de diffusion appuyez sur le bouton Art puis sur le bouton Background dans le menu SuperSource S lectionnez la source d arri re plan l aide du bus de s lection sur le panneau 1 M E ou l aide du b...

Page 570: ...a Vous pouvez ainsi facilement copier les param tres de la fen tre s lectionn e et les appliquer n importe quelle autre fen tre en un seul clic Les fen tres copi es appara tront directement derri re l...

Page 571: ...r ouvrir la fen tre Macros dans l ATEM Software Control cliquez sur l onglet Macros dans la barre de titre ou utilisez le raccourci Shift Cmd M pour Mac ou Shift Ctrl M pour Windows La fen tre Macros...

Page 572: ...pes de la macro Vous pouvez galement enregistrer des macros pour restaurer les param tres pour diff rents projets Vous disposez d une large gamme d options Il est important de se souvenir qu au cours...

Page 573: ...d appliquer une autre transition cliquez sur Ajouter une pause en haut de la bordure rouge La fen tre pour ajouter une pause s ouvre R glez la dur e de la pause sur 5 secondes et 0 image et cliquez s...

Page 574: ...es vers Black le tout en appuyant sur un seul bouton Une bordure orange doit galement entourer le panneau de contr le logiciel afin d indiquer que la macro est en cours d ex cution Si la macro ne fonc...

Page 575: ...cros simples et les r ins rer ensuite dans la macro complexe Pour compiler des macros simples dans une macro complexe 1 Commencez l enregistrement de la nouvelle macro puis en cours d enregistrement c...

Page 576: ...enregistrement et de l ex cution des macros Lorsqu une macro est s lectionn e elle affiche galement les descriptions enregistr es Boutons macro Apr s avoir enregistr une macro dans l emplacement pour...

Page 577: ...la macro Transitions d crite pr c demment dans la section relative l enregistrement d une macro l aide de l ATEM Software Control Cette fois vous allez cr er une macro dans l emplacement pour macro nu...

Page 578: ...ent Vous venez d enregistrer une macro l aide d un ATEM Advanced Panel La macro s affichera en tant que Macro 6 car elle est situ e l emplacement pour macro num ro 6 Vous pouvez nommer votre macro et...

Page 579: ...plus de quatre cam ras et que vous voulez d dier une voie chaque cam ra vous pouvez galement vous servir de panneaux suppl mentaires vous de choisir REMARQUE Les cam ras Blackmagic Design qui peuvent...

Page 580: ...situ en milieu de cha ne Connectez ensuite le port Ethernet restant du panneau de contr le cam ra votre ordinateur ou r seau Si vous utilisez le panneau de contr le cam ra uniquement avec le m langeu...

Page 581: ...ez sur le bouton multifonction Param tres Appuyez sur le bouton multifonction Param tres sur l cran d accueil pour acc der tous les param tres du panneau de contr le cam ra Le param tre DHCP est le pr...

Page 582: ...rifier les param tres r seau de chaque appareil R gler l adresse IP du m langeur sur le panneau de contr le cam ra 1 Appuyez sur la fl che pour aller sur le param tre Adresse IP du m langeur 2 R glez...

Page 583: ...eil le param tre relatif au lot de cam ras est affich sur le haut de l cran Ce param tre affiche le lot de cam ras que vous contr lez Imaginons que vous contr liez 8 cam ras et que vous souhaitiez dis...

Page 584: ...che Les param tres r seau notamment les param tres DHCP et Adresse IP se trouvent sur les premi res pages de la s quence Ces param tres sont d crits dans la section qui explique comment modifier les p...

Page 585: ...rrespondantes ce param tre dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre ou dans le sens inverse pour augmenter ou r duire la luminosit Voies de commande du panneau Les commandes de chaque voie de commande...

Page 586: ...sur le gain Y Elle permet d augmenter ou de r duire la luminance ou luminosit g n rale de l image Vous trouverez de plus amples informations sur les commandes de balance des couleurs dans la section...

Page 587: ...voie de commande et offre un aper u g n ral du contr le des cam ras La premi re tape pour contr ler les cam ras est d assigner une cam ra une voie de commande Assigner une cam ra une voie de commande...

Page 588: ...ouvez enregistrer tous les param tres de chaque cam ra puis les rappeler plus tard C est une technique tr s rapide Pour stocker un fichier de sc ne 1 Appuyez sur le bouton Store d une voie de commande...

Page 589: ...e la section Scene File de chaque voie de commande ind pendamment REMARQUE Cette fonctionnalit est tr s puissante et pratique Cependant veuillez l utiliser avec pr caution car elle affecte toutes les...

Page 590: ...vec le joystick l iris sera r gl sur f5 6 puis se resynchronisera graduellement avec le panneau de contr le lors du changement Ce proc d est tr s discret et il est probable que vous ne le remarquiez m...

Page 591: ...obturation Shutter Speed Les fl ches situ es c t du param tre Shutter vous permettent de changer la vitesse d obturation de la cam ra Appuyez sur la fl che montante pour augmenter la vitesse d obturat...

Page 592: ...alement appel niveau de gain Lorsque vous d placez le joystick la bande LED s allume sur son passage vous indiquant l exposition approximative de la cam ra Pour une valuation pr cise de l ouverture en...

Page 593: ...de d finir une limite maximale au contr le du gain Par exemple si vous souhaitez vous assurer que le gain ne d passe jamais un certain niveau d exposition Suivez les tapes suivantes 1 Poussez le joyst...

Page 594: ...de la cam ra s lectionn e sur la voie de commande C est un moyen tr s pratique pour attirer l attention des op rateurs cam ra ou pour les informer que vous tes pr t passer l antenne Lorsque le bouton...

Page 595: ...structions de c blage l arri re de la GPI and Tally Interface un c ble panoui peut tre connect du mat riel vid o qui prend en charge les signaux tally fermeture de contact comme le SmartView Duo et le...

Page 596: ...e directement votre ordinateur ou votre panneau ATEM Advanced Panel sans commutateur r seau Ethernet choisissez l option Configure address Using a static IP Configuration de l adresse avec un IP fixe...

Page 597: ...ur Switcher Inputs 1 8 moins que vous ne configuriez une seconde unit pour fournir des sorties tally pour les entr es 9 16 d un m langeur ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher 7 Cliquez sur Apply La LED blan...

Page 598: ...RCA sont tr s utiles quand vous utilisez de l audio provenant de mat riel grand public comme les syst mes HiFi ou les iPod Branchez de l audio HiFi externe votre m langeur via les entr es RCA Les mod...

Page 599: ...ue source vid o et vous n avez pas non plus besoin de console de mixage audio externe sauf si vous pr f rez en utiliser une L audio est mix dans l onglet Audio de l ATEM Software Control et ressort vi...

Page 600: ...I 1 64 peuvent recevoir des signaux audio num riques une profondeur de 24 bits et une fr quence d chantillonnage de 48 kHz Ils sont connect s 64 canaux suppl mentaires dans le mixeur audio que vous po...

Page 601: ...es SDI 1 10 Canal 11 Audio du lecteur multim dia Canal 12 Micro externe Canal 13 Entr e audio analogique TRS Canal 14 Audio PGM En mode HD et Ultra HD la sortie MADI 2 achemine ces sources Canaux 1 30...

Page 602: ...ace de contr le audio 1 Connectez une console de mixage MIDI compatible avec Mac ou PC La plupart des surfaces de contr le modernes utilisent l USB 2 V rifiez que votre console de mixage est reconnue...

Page 603: ...potentiom tres de la console de mixage audio indiquent une augmentation et une r duction correspondante dans le logiciel sur votre cran d ordinateur Si tel est le cas vous avez configur avec succ s vo...

Page 604: ...onstellation 8K Broches de connexion du port s rie pour le contr le par c ble Broches de connexion RS 422 pour le contr le par c ble Le RS 422 est une norme de diffusion qui utilise un connecteur DE 9...

Page 605: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 606: ...meter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for paramete...

Page 607: ...128 through 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and opera...

Page 608: ...values from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate...

Page 609: ...1 4 3 2 2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4...

Page 610: ...de _ _ BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd...

Page 611: ...pause ve multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage med...

Page 612: ...002710 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 613: ...ough the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they a...

Page 614: ...s 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on...

Page 615: ...ht 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF Rel...

Page 616: ...ntacter le centre d assistance technique Blackmagic Design le plus proche de chez vous V rification du logiciel actuel Pour v rifier quelle version du logiciel ATEM est install e sur votre ordinateur...

Page 617: ...munications radio L utilisation de cet quipement en zone r sidentielle est susceptible de provoquer des interf rences nuisibles auquel cas il sera demand l utilisateur de corriger ces interf rences se...

Page 618: ...tien doit tre effectu e par un centre de service Blackmagic Design Cet appareil doit tre utilis une altitude inf rieure 2000 m tres D claration de l tat de Californie Ce produit est susceptible de vou...

Page 619: ...quate ou d une connexion du mat riel incompatible c pour r parer tout dommage ou dysfonctionnement caus par l utilisation de pi ces ou de fournitures n appartenant pas la marque de Blackmagic Design d...

Page 620: ...Installations und Bedienungsanleitung Juni 2020 ATEM Live Produktionsmischer Deutsch...

Page 621: ...iehen und viel Freude an Ihren Liveproduktionen haben Diese Bedienungsanleitung enth lt alle f r die Installation Ihres ATEM Production Switchers n tigen Informationen ATEM Mischer werden mit einem So...

Page 622: ...660 Media Manager 660 Audiomixer 661 Kamerasteuerung 662 Mischereinstellungen 662 Arbeiten mit dem Software Bedienpanel 663 Men paletten 667 Registerkarte Media Player 669 Arbeiten mit dem Audiomixer...

Page 623: ...versorgung des Kamerasteuerpults 785 Anschlie en des Kamerasteuerpults an Ihren Mischer 786 Netzwerkeinstellungen ndern 787 Das Layout des Kamerasteuerpults 788 Steuern von Kameras 793 Arbeiten mit Ta...

Page 624: ...ber Ethernet Verbindungen lassen sich berdies mehrere Software Bedienpanel an einen Mischer anschlie en Das Software Bedienpanel ATEM Software Control ist ohne extra Kosten auf beliebig vielen Comput...

Page 625: ...VE und je nachdem was Sie im Bereich Transition Control bzw bergangssteuerung selektiert haben weitere berg nge So holen Sie viel Leistung aus Ihrem Mischer weil Sie die Quelle auf dem Vorschaubus aus...

Page 626: ...ftigt mag an ltere A B Mischer gew hnt sein Auch Ihr ATEM Mischer l sst sich in den ATEM Software Einstellungen aufwandslos auf direktes A B Schalten einstellen N heres zur nderung dieser Einstellung...

Page 627: ...a HD 2160p 59 94 bis hin zu 8K 4320p 59 94 mischen Das integrierte Bedienfeld mit LCD und Talkback l sst Sie Ihre Inhalte direkt von der Frontblende mischen sodass Sie vor der Livesendung rasch alle Q...

Page 628: ...ro en integrierten LCD kontrollieren ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K HINWEIS Durch Aktualisieren eines ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K mit der Produktsoftware ATEM 7 3 oder h her k nnen Sie ihm die glei...

Page 629: ...it Strom versorgt wird Anschlie en eines ATEM Hardware Bedienpults Wer sich ein ATEM Hardware Panel gekauft hat wird statt seines Computers lieber gleich das Bedienpult anschlie en wollen um direkt Ha...

Page 630: ...n Person helfen die wei wie man eine IP Adresse festlegt Standardm ig ist auf den Mischern die statische IP Adresse 192 168 10 240 vorgegeben und die ATEM Advanced Panels sind auf die statische IP Adr...

Page 631: ...erte Plug ins und Anwendungen Ihre ATEM Switcher Software installiert die folgenden von ATEM Mischern verwendeten Komponenten ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup Blackmagic ATEM Setup dient zu...

Page 632: ...Media Pool und die Keying Funktionalit t Installieren der Blackmagic ATEM Software auf Windows Ehe Sie die aktuellste Software installieren empfiehlt es sich ggf auf Ihrem Windows PC befindliche Vorg...

Page 633: ...grierten Media Pool und die Keying Funktionalit t Anschlie en Ihres Computers Schlie en Sie Ihren Computer direkt an den ATEM Mischer an damit Sie den Mischer steuern Grafiken und Clips in den Media P...

Page 634: ...ster ein Im seltenen Fall dass Ihr ATEM Mischer immer noch nicht erkannt wird gibt es keinen Grund zur Sorge Das Problem ist wahrscheinlich ber die Netzwerkeinstellungen Ihres Computers zu beheben Ihr...

Page 635: ...unten links auf der Benutzeroberfl che um das Einstellungsfenster Settings der Bediensoftware ATEM Software Control zu ffnen Einstellen der Videonorm des Mischers Sie k nnen die Videonorm der jeweilig...

Page 636: ...en ber die Audio Registerkarte k nnen Sie die f r die Tonkontrolle zu verwendenden Ausg nge vorgeben Eingehende Talkbacksignale an den SDI Eing ngen lassen sich stumm schalten um unerw nschte Feedback...

Page 637: ...Multi View in 2 gro e und 8 kleine Fenster unterteilt sind Der ATEM Constellation 8K bietet zus tzliche Optionen f r 4 7 13 oder 16 Eingabefenster In diesen Ansichtsfenstern k nnen Sie sich eine Viel...

Page 638: ...viduell an Audiopegelmeter k nnen f r jedes Quellfenster ein oder ausgeschaltet werden ber den Button Alle ein werden alle Pegelmeter zusammen f r alle Ansichten bzw ber das entsprechende Symbol f r e...

Page 639: ...se mit dem Software Bedienpanel ATEM Software Control oder mit einem physischen ATEM Hardware Bedienpult steuern finden Sie im Abschnitt HyperDeck Steuerung in dieser Bedienungsanleitung Alle Buchsen...

Page 640: ...Inhaltsschutzfunktion im HDMI Videokabel eine Verschl sselung der Videodaten vor In diesem Fall zeigen Ihnen diese Ger te keine Bilder an Zu den Ger ten mit HDCP Inhaltsschutz z hlen u a DVD Player u...

Page 641: ...eine verf gbare statische IP Adresse die in den Zahlenbereich Ihres Netzwerks f llt die Sie benutzen k nnen Die Bedienpulte bzw Computer mit der Bediensoftware lassen sich auf DHCP oder statische IP...

Page 642: ...lten Sie Ihren Mischer aus und wieder ein Schlie en Sie dann das Dialogfeld ndern der Netzwerkeinstellungen ber den Configure Tab in Blackmagic ATEM Setup So funktionieren die Netzwerkeinstellungen vo...

Page 643: ...alb des LCDs k nnen Sie nun die korrekte IP Adresse f r Ihren Mischer eingeben 4 Dr cken Sie die Multifunktionstaste NDERUNGEN SPEICHERN um die Einstellung zu best tigen Ihr Panel verbindet sich nun m...

Page 644: ...P Adresse oder eine automatisch durch einen DHCP Server zugeteilte IP Adresse verwenden soll Aktivieren oder deaktivieren Sie DHCP mithilfe der jeweiligen Multifunktionstaste DHCP EIN oder DHCP AUS HI...

Page 645: ...ie Frontblende alle Ihre Quellen pr fen und den Mischer steuern Dies ist praktisch um sicherzugehen dass mischerseitig alles korrekt eingerichtet ist Er ist das Herzst ck Ihrer Produktionskette Zur Ei...

Page 646: ...e genau das h ren was Sie h ren m ssen 4 Nachdem Sie die Talkback Funktion getestet haben ist ein guter Zeitpunkt um das Tally auf allen Kameras zu berpr fen Dr cken Sie dazu eine Eingabetaste um die...

Page 647: ...e neuere Version installiert ist Aktualisieren Sie alle Ihre Ger te zur gleichen Zeit damit auf allen die gleiche Softwareversion l uft ATEM Software Installer Schlie en Sie Ihren ATEM Mischer oder Ih...

Page 648: ...n sind k nnen Sie den Mischer auch ber die Ethernet Verbindung aktualisieren HINWEIS Achten Sie beim Aktualisieren von Software per USB darauf dass das Advanced Panel das einzige ATEM Ger t ist mit de...

Page 649: ...haltet dieser Ausgang zwischen Ultra HD HD und SD um ber diesen Ausgang wird das Hauptprogrammvideo des Mischers ausgegeben und er l sst sich an Fernseher Videoprojektoren und sogar an die Blackmagic...

Page 650: ...en Einsatz eines Vorschaumonitors mit voller Aufl sung Das Audio wird in SDI eingebettet als Programmaudio ausgegeben M E Ausgabe ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K und ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K Mis...

Page 651: ...tet die Taste f r Eingang 1 rot sobald Sie Ihren Mischer einschalten Dies besagt dass Eingabe 1 auf Sendung ist Wenn daran eine Videoquelle angeschlossen ist erscheint diese in der Programmausgabe Ent...

Page 652: ...oder sofern vorhanden ber ein Hardware Bedienpult ausgew hlt werden Neben der Reihe mit den Haupteingabetasten bietet die Frontblende weitere Eingabequellen mit den Bezeichnungen MP1 und MP2 Diese st...

Page 653: ...durch Dr cken der SET Taste das Einstellungsmen aus 4 Scrollen Sie durch die Liste zum Modus Men und dr cken Sie die SET Taste um es zu aktivieren 5 Navigieren Sie dort zur Option Cut Bus Modus und ak...

Page 654: ...n Audiopegel Der Drehregler an der Frontblende dient vorrangig zum Justieren der Audiopegel Bei aufgerufenem LCD Men dient er jedoch auch zur Men auswahl In seiner normalen Funktion werden mit dem Dre...

Page 655: ...gangs wird im LCD Men Downstream Key oder auf einem Bedienpult bzw panel festgelegt Keyer werden ber einen Eingang oder einen Media Player gespeist Diese Einstellungen k nnen ebenfalls im LCD Men oder...

Page 656: ...n diesem Abschnitt haben wir uns das Men zunutze gemacht Generell ist es empfehlenswert das Men nach Verwendungsoptionen zu durchst bern Wenn Sie bereits Erfahrung mit dem Software Bedienpanel in Verb...

Page 657: ...unikation mit Produktionsleuten und Technikern sowie f r den Programmmix an Wenn die entsprechende Taste rot leuchtet k nnen Sie die Lautst rke des ausgew hlten Kanals mithilfe der Auf und Abw rtspfei...

Page 658: ...ngen ATEM Software Control l sst sich neben Englisch und Deutsch auch auf Franz sisch Italienisch Japanisch Koreanisch Portugiesisch Russisch Spanisch T rkisch und vereinfachtes Chinesisch einstellen...

Page 659: ...tenbelegung von Hardware Bedienpulten aus Sie k nnen eine Kamera ber das Ausklappmen zuordnen Software Bedienpanel des Mischers Das Software Bedienpanel weist vier zentrale Steuerungsfenster auf Die A...

Page 660: ...Umschalten bleibt aktiv und die CUT Schaltfl che leuchtet rot auf Steuerung Shift 1 0 Schaltet die Mischerquelle der Eing nge 11 20 direkt auf Programmausgabe Steuerung dr cken und loslassen dann Shif...

Page 661: ...l die Key Stanz als auch die Key F llsignale Key Fill Wenn Sie einen Media Player als Key Stanzquelle ausw hlen z B Media Player 1 erfolgt die Auswahl des F ll wie auch des Stanzsignals automatisch Si...

Page 662: ...i ATEM Mischern von der Bediensoftware erm glicht und ist jederzeit verf gbar Einstellungen wie Blende Gain und Fokus sowie die Sch rfe und Zoom Steuerung lassen sich bei Einsatz kompatibler Objektive...

Page 663: ...insatz von HyperDeck Diskrekordern mit Ihrem ATEM Mischer siehe Abschnitt HyperDeck Steuerung mit einem ATEM Mischer in dieser Bedienungsanleitung Alternativ bestimmen Sie das Fernsteuerungsverhalten...

Page 664: ...lte Quelle in schwarzer Farbe SUPERSOURCE Diese Funktion ist nur bei Mischern mit mehr als einem M E Block aktiv Dru cken Sie die Shift Taste fu r Farbbalken FARBBALKEN Eine intern durch den Mischer e...

Page 665: ...UTO Schaltfl che leuchtet f r die Dauer des bergangs rot auf wobei sich das RATE Display im Verlauf des bergangs st ndig aktualisiert und die Anzahl der jeweils verbleibenden Frames anzeigt Wenn ein A...

Page 666: ...ung gebracht werden Der DSK f hrt den bergang innerhalb des auf dem RATE Display im bergangssteuerblock angezeigten Zeitraums aus Ist der DSK verkn pft bleibt dies ohne Wirkung auf die Signalverteilun...

Page 667: ...s jeweils angeschlossenen Mischers bersichtlich an Da die diversen ATEM Modelle unterschiedliche Funktionen bieten unterscheiden sich die jeweiligen Men paletten Aus der Anordnung der Men paletten ist...

Page 668: ...nzelnen bergangsarten konfigurieren Beispielsweise verf gt die Men palette ber eine Drop Down Box wo Sie die Dip Quelle ausw hlen k nnen und f r Wipe berg nge zeigt die Men palette alle verf gbaren Wi...

Page 669: ...ption per USB Arbeiten mit dem Audiomixer Der Audio Arbeitsraum dient dem Mischen von Audioquellen die via HDMI SDI und externes Audio an beliebige ATEM Mischer angeschlossen sind Dort wird auch das A...

Page 670: ...el f r jede Kamera und die Audioquelle einzustellen Die gr ne Zahl unter den einzelnen Audiopegelmetern gibt den mit dem Kanalfader eingestellten maximalen Audiopegel an Die Zahl ber dem Audiopegelmet...

Page 671: ...ngehende Audiosignale st ndig in die Programmausgabe gemischt werden selbst wenn die zugeh rige Videoquelle nicht auf Sendung ist Die rote Tally Leuchte bleibt erleuchtet da das Audio fortw hrend auf...

Page 672: ...LR Monitorausgang zu aktivieren Deaktivieren Sie EIN um s mtliches Audio ber den XLR Monitorausgang auszuschalten RED W hlen Sie RED Reduzieren um den Audiopegel f r das Monitoring zeitweilig zu senke...

Page 673: ...des ATEM Constellation 8K dienen zum Gestalten und Verfeinern der Tonqualit t an einzelnen Eing ngen und am Master Ausgang Zur Verf gung stehen bspw Eingabepegel Steuerelemente ein parametrischer 6 B...

Page 674: ...klicken Sie auf den entsprechenden Equalizer Indikator Klicken Sie auf den Equalizer Indikator eines Eingangs um das Fenster mit seinem parametrischen 6 Band Equalizer zu ffnen In der oberen H lfte de...

Page 675: ...definieren w hlen Sie aus der Bandfilter Liste die Option Notch Filter aus Klicken Sie dann auf das jeweilige Preset f r die einzelnen Frequenzbereiche Sie werden sehen dass die Filtereffekte entspre...

Page 676: ...utst rkepegel f r niedrigere Frequenzen entlang des Graphen verst rken oder d mpfen Notch Hochpass Tiefpass Dieser Filter dient dazu eine definierte Frequenz zu entfernen bzw zu eliminieren Mit einem...

Page 677: ...definiert die von der Funktion betroffene Spanne an Dezibelwerten Ratio Definiert die maximale Wirkung der einmal ausgel sten Funktion Attack Gibt die Stetigkeit der Einschwingzeit bei ihrer Ausl sun...

Page 678: ...so Schwankungen der im Signal vertretenen Audiopegel TIPP Es empfiehlt sich den Kompressor erst nach erfolgter Vorgabe der EQ Steuerwerte anzuwenden Make Up Der auch als Ausgangspegel bezeichnete Par...

Page 679: ...man den Pegel der Eingabeverst rkung f r jeden Eingang anhebt oder senkt bis die Signalspitzen auf der Pegelanzeige des Kanalzugs etwas unter 0 dB liegen 2 Um eine der Mono Eingaben in zwei separate...

Page 680: ...igieren im Browse Fenster des Media Arbeitsraums Das Browse Fenster ist ein vereinfachter Dateibrowser mit dem Sie auf Ihrem Computer navigieren und nach Grafikdateien suchen k nnen Es werden alle an...

Page 681: ...wird unter seinem jeweiligen Platz angezeigt So behalten Sie den berblick ber geladene Stills und Clips Sehr praktisch In der Media Player Men palette des Mischer Arbeitsraums und auch im Photoshop Pl...

Page 682: ...der Videonorm des Mischers Die Einstellung Video dient zur Auswahl der Videonorm mit der der ATEM Mischer arbeitet Der Mischer muss auf die gleiche Videonorm wie die an ihn angeschlossenen Videoquelle...

Page 683: ...94 W hlen Sie die gew nschte Norm unter Videonorm einstellen im Video Men aus und aktivieren Sie dann die Schaltfl che Best tigen Bei jeder nderung der Videonorm werden s mtliche im Media Pool befind...

Page 684: ...ausgegeben Der ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K hat einen abw rtskonvertierten Programmausgang der standardm ig 1080p 29 97 benutzt wenn Video in Ultra HD bei 2160p 59 94 gemischt wird Oder aber er w hl...

Page 685: ...Erzielen von Effekten kann ein Ausgang Ihres ATEM ber einen Eingang durchgeschleift werden Manchmal verursacht dies eine Feedback Schleife auf den SDI Audiokan len 15 und 16 Schalten Sie in diesem Fa...

Page 686: ...herkapazit t die des anderen Einstellung der L nge von Clips im Media Pool Tabelle der Clipl ngen ATEM Mischer Videoformat Clipl nge ATEM Constellation 8K 720p 3200 Frames 1080i 1080p 1600 Frames 2160...

Page 687: ...pegelmeter k nnen f r alle Quell und Programmansichten Ihres Mischers ein oder ausgeschaltet werden Aktivieren Sie dazu in den Multi View Einstellungen die Schaltfl che Alle ein Klicken Sie auf das Au...

Page 688: ...Eing nge an der R ckseite des Mischers macht schaltbare Anschl sse ersichtlich Aufeinander schaltbare Eing nge weisen als Kennung dieselbe Eingangsnummer auf Einstellungen f r Labels Beispiel Beim AT...

Page 689: ...AM1 als Kurzversion des Labels eingeben HyperDeck Einstellungen HyperDeck Einstellungen Sie k nnen bis zu vier Diskrekorder des Typs Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio anschlie en und ber ATEM Software Contr...

Page 690: ...mit Mehrzweck Ausg ngen ausgestattet Daf r gibt es in ATEM Software Control ein Ausg nge Men Dort k nnen Sie entweder 24 Ausg nge f r HD bzw Ultra HD Signale oder 6 Ausg nge f r 8K Signale vorgeben u...

Page 691: ...e Control Ihre gesamten Mischereinstellungen Wenn Sie spezifische Einstellungen zum Speichern ausw hlen wollen k nnen Sie Einstellungen individuell deaktivieren Alternativ lassen sich alle Einstellung...

Page 692: ...ktion vergisst gespeicherte Dateien zu sichern Wenn Sie bestimmte Einstellungen beibehalten wollen speichern Sie sie auf Ihrem Computer und auf einem externen Laufwerk wie z B einem USB Laufwerk Auf d...

Page 693: ...erkennt erm glicht Ihnen dies die Bedienung der kameraeigenen Steuerungsfunktionen Die Steuerung von Kameras funktioniert via regul re SDI Ausg nge oder wenn ein optionales SFP Modul in Ihrer Blackma...

Page 694: ...er Blackmagic Studio Cameras via Glasfaser mithilfe eines ATEM Studio Converters Es muss ein optionales SFP Modul in Ihrer Studio Camera installiert sein erst dann ist eine Verbindung ber Glasfaser m...

Page 695: ...n Einstellung erfolgt per Klick auf eine der drei ber dem Farbrad befindlichen Auswahlschaltfl chen Masterrad Passen Sie mithilfe des nachstehenden Farbrades die Kontraste aller YRGB Kan le auf einmal...

Page 696: ...m anderen ein Weitwinkelobjektiv angebracht ist Klicken Sie auf ZOOM ber dem GROB Schieberegler und ziehen Sie ihn zum Einzoomen nach oben bzw zum Auszoomen nach unten GROB Einstellung Mit dem rechts...

Page 697: ...rehs wenn Sie Ihr Bild im schw cher werdenden Licht eines Sonnenuntergangs aufhellen m chten Zu beachten ist hierbei jedoch dass mehr Gain auch st rkeres Bildrauschen bewirkt Verschlusszeit Steuerung...

Page 698: ...r Zur Verf gung stehen Ihnen hier Farbr der und Einstellungen wie S ttigung und die Einstellungen f r Schatten Mittelt ne und Lichter sind alle gleichzeitig sichtbar Wechseln Sie einfach mithilfe der...

Page 699: ...it t ausleben und einzigartige Optiken allein durch Anpassung des Y Kanals erzielen Am besten lassen sich Anpassungen am Y Kanal vornehmen wenn die Lum Mix Einstellung f r YRGB Verarbeitung nach recht...

Page 700: ...lt einzig und allein was Ihnen am besten gef llt Kontrast S ttigung Farbton und Luminanz lassen sich durch Ziehen des Schiebereglers justieren Einstellungen synchronisieren Ist die Kamera an einen ATE...

Page 701: ...Y Koordinate f r den Schwarzwert Y GAMMA Modifiziert den Bildkontrast allein durch Anpassen der Y Koordinate f r die Mittelt ne Y GAIN Modifiziert den Bildkontrast allein durch Anpassen der Y Koordin...

Page 702: ...schlie en von HyperDecks Die Vorgangsweise zum Anschlie en von Blackmagic HyperDecks an Ihren Mischer ist so hnlich wie bei Kameras und anderen Videoquellen die man ber die SDI oder HDMI Eing nge des...

Page 703: ...zeigt Geben Sie hierf r einfach die IP Adresse f r jeden HyperDeck in das Feld IP Addresse ein Geben Sie dann im Eingang Aufklappmen den Eingang vor an den er angeschlossen ist Klicken Sie auf Verbind...

Page 704: ...mit ATEM Software Control Steuern Sie an Ihren Mischer gekoppelte HyperDeck Diskrekorder indem Sie auf dem Software Bedienpanel auf der Media Player Registerkarte auf die HyperDecks Men palette klick...

Page 705: ...lt den derzeitig gew hlten Clip in Dauerschleife ab Ein erneuter Klick spielt alle Clips in Ihrer HyperDeck Medienliste in Dauerschleife ab Anhand der Shuttle Jog Schieberegler unter den Steuerungs Sc...

Page 706: ...inden Ihrer HyperDeck Rekorder mit Ihrem Mischer wie im vorherigen Abschnitt Anschlie en von HyperDecks erkl rt k nnen Sie einzelne HyperDeck Rekorder jetzt ber die Systemsteuerung und die LCD Multifu...

Page 707: ...dresse f r den HyperDeck vorzugeben navigieren Sie mit der Rechts oder Linkspfeiltaste zur dritten HyperDeck Einstellungsseite Alternativ dr cken Sie vom HyperDeck Einstellungsmen aus die Taste 3 auf...

Page 708: ...rd der tats chliche Schnitt um eine vorgegebene Anzahl von Frames verz gert Dies gew hrleistet saubere berg nge Ganz so wie man bei einem Videoband Rekorder einen Vorlauf vorgibt Justieren Sie die L n...

Page 709: ...Wiedergabe in Schleife und zum Vor und Zur ckspringen zwischen Clips TIPP Um alle Clips abzuspielen dr cken Sie bei festgehaltener SHIFT Taste die PLAY Multifunktionstaste Dr cken Sie auf der vierten...

Page 710: ...mit der Rechtspfeiltaste zur vierten Men seite mit den Transportsteuerelementen Anhand des Multifunktionsdrehreglers k nnen Sie Ihren HyperDeck auf eine bestimmte Gruppe von Transportelementen einric...

Page 711: ...zeitigen Gebrauch Wo erweiterte L sungen gefragt sind k nnen Sie auch mehrere physische Bedienpulte anschlie en Dieses Kapitel f hrt alle die ein Bedienpult f r ihre Liveproduktion ben tigen in den Ge...

Page 712: ...ellnamen Display um Es zeigt dann zus tzlich sogenannte shifted sources bzw geshiftete Quellen an was die Auswahl von bis zu 20 verschiedenen Quellen erm glicht Gleichzeitiges Dr cken beider SHIFT Tas...

Page 713: ...en aufgezeichnet sind Bei aktivierter MACRO Taste leuchten alle Tasten blau auf Die Zielanzeige und der Auswahlbus zeigen Ihnen die Signalverteilung der Quellen auf Keys und Auxiliary Ausg nge an Die...

Page 714: ...bt einen bergang zu pr fen indem er ihn mit dem Blendenhebel probeweise als Vorschauausgabe ausf hrt Sobald Sie diese Taste per Druck aktiviert haben k nnen Sie Ihren bergang beliebig oft in der Vorsc...

Page 715: ...nced Panel n her erkl rt Downstream Keyer DSK DSK TIE Die Taste DSK TIE aktiviert den DSK auf dem Vorschauausgang zusammen mit den n chsten bergangseffekten und verkn pft ihn mit der prim ren bergangs...

Page 716: ...P nktchen zu sehen ist gibt es mehr als eine Seite mit Einstellungen Sie k nnen durch diese Seiten navigieren indem Sie die Rechts und Linkspfeiltasten dr cken Gehen Sie wie folgt vor um bspw die Rand...

Page 717: ...ras bequem auf einmal steuern Dr cken Sie die Taste CAMERA CONTROL und w hlen Sie dann ber die nummerierten Tasten des Ziffernblocks einzelne Kameras aus Justieren Sie Schwenk und Neigebewegungen anha...

Page 718: ...die VISCA Multifunktionstaste um die Steuerung per VISCA Protokoll auszuw hlen 2 Dr cken Sie die Multifunktionstaste ERKENNEN Die erste an Ihren Mischer angeschlossene Kamera wird auf dem LCD als Cam...

Page 719: ...a der Joystick Bewegung was Ihnen sanfte Kamerabewegungen erm glicht Au erdem variiert der Empfindlichkeitsgrad ggf auch zwischen Remoteheads N heres zur Verdrahtung einer PTZ Einheit nach Ihren Anfor...

Page 720: ...ichen M E Layout und auch die Funktionen der Tastenblocks System Control sind bei allen Pulten gleich Wo mit mehreren Advanced Panels gearbeitet wird erlaubt das eine intuitive Mischerbedienung da all...

Page 721: ...den Programm und Vorschaubussen ausgew hlten Quellen wechseln ihre Pl tze und zeigen an dass die vorher auf Vorschau liegende Videoquelle jetzt auf Programm liegt und umgekehrt TIPP Wir empfehlen berg...

Page 722: ...ten Quellen ausgetauscht Dies verdeutlicht dass die vorher auf Vorschau liegende Videoquelle jetzt auf Programm liegt und umgekehrt Jede bergangsart hat eine eigene separat einstellbare bergangsrate m...

Page 723: ...e anzupassen Sie k nnen die Rate auch ber den Ziffernblock eingeben 4 F hren Sie den bergang als automatischen oder manuellen bergang vom bergangssteuerblock aus Dr cken Sie die MIX Taste und stellen...

Page 724: ...sten bei dem die gegenw rtige Quelle durch eine andere Quelle ersetzt wird die dabei ein geometrisches Muster bildet Dies k nnte bspw ein Kreis oder eine Raute sein der bzw die sich vergr ert Programm...

Page 725: ...metrie l sst sich das Seitenverh ltnis des Musters steuern Beispiel Durch Justieren der Symmetrie k nnen Sie aus einem Kreis eine Ellipse machen Auf den Advanced Panels l sst sich die Symmetrie mithil...

Page 726: ...n DVE aus anhand der Multifunktionsregler und tasten Hier k nnen Sie Parameter wie das DVE Muster sowie die Bewegungsart und richtung vorgeben und die bergangsrate f r den DVE anpassen 4 F hren Sie de...

Page 727: ...yer keine DVE Keys sind und dass der Flying Key Modus deaktiviert ist Um einen DVE vom Upstream Keyer zu befreien ndern Sie die Key Art auf eine beliebige andere Art au er DVE oder deaktivieren Sie de...

Page 728: ...Media Player oder eine andere Eingabequelle verwenden m chten k nnen Sie den vormultiplizierten Key deaktivieren und die Keyquelle ndern 4 F hren Sie den bergang als automatischen bergang per AUTO Tas...

Page 729: ...n So f hren Sie einen bergang manuell aus 1 W hlen Sie auf dem Vorschaubus Preview die Videoquelle aus die Sie auf den Programmausgang legen wollen 2 W hlen Sie die bergangsart anhand der Tasten im be...

Page 730: ...ung 3 W hlen Sie dann mit dem Multifunktionsregler einen freien Profilplatz 4 Um das Profil zu speichern dr cken Sie die Speichern Multifunktionstaste ber dem LCD Jetzt ist Ihr Profil auf dem Pult ges...

Page 731: ...dem Multifunktionsregler zum Benutzerprofil das Sie l schen m chten Wird das Benutzerprofil aktuell verwendet erscheint der Text dar ber orangefarben 3 Dr cken Sie die L schen Multifunktionstaste Der...

Page 732: ...rbigen Umrandungen versehen oder die bei Dip berg ngen zu durchlaufenden Farben erstellen wie z B bei einem bergang durch blitzschnell eingeblendetes Wei Gehen Sie zur Anpassung einer Farbquelle auf d...

Page 733: ...s Software Bedienpanel 1 W hlen Sie im Mischer Arbeitsraum die Men palette Media Player aus 2 Selektieren Sie in der Dropdown Liste Medium einen Clip oder ein Standbild aus dem Media Pool 3 Nach erfol...

Page 734: ...mbus ndert sich ausschlie lich das Hintergrundsignal w hrend alle Upstream und Downstream Keys ihren aktuellen Status beibehalten Ausf hren eines Hartschnitts vom Programmbus des Software Bedienpanels...

Page 735: ...en eines Hartschnitts auf dem Software Bedienpanel mit einer Tastatur 1 Vergewissern Sie sich dass die Gro buchstabensperre deaktiviert ist 2 Dr cken Sie auf der Tastatur die Zifferntaste der Videoque...

Page 736: ...ilfe der Schaltfl chen im Steuerblock bergangsart aus 3 Aktivieren Sie ber die Einstellungen Registerkarte in der berg nge Men palette dieselbe bergangsart wie im bergangssteuerblock 4 Geben Sie die R...

Page 737: ...uf den Programm und Vorschaubussen ausgew hlten Quellen ausgetauscht Dies verdeutlicht dass die vorher auf Vorschau liegende Videoquelle jetzt auf Programm liegt und umgekehrt Ausf hren eines automati...

Page 738: ...rgang von einer Quelle zu einer anderen Er erfolgt durch schrittweises Verschmelzen von zwei Quellen die sich im Verlauf des Effekts praktisch berlappen Die Dauer des bergangs bzw die Dauer der berlap...

Page 739: ...allm hlich in eine andere bergeht Bei einem Dip wird jedoch schrittweise eine dritte Videoquelle die Dip Quelle eingemischt Beispielsweise bietet sich ein Dip bergang an wenn f r einen bergang blitzs...

Page 740: ...gseinstellungen an 3 Justieren Sie die Dip Rate mithilfe des Drehreglers unter dem LCD Sie k nnen die Rate auch ber den Ziffernblock eingeben 4 W hlen Sie die Dip Quelle mit dem entsprechenden Drehreg...

Page 741: ...n Sie die Men palette berg nge und w hlen Sie die Registerkarte Wipe aus 4 Geben Sie hier die Einstellungen f r den Wipe bergang vor 5 F hren Sie den bergang als automatischen oder manuellen bergang v...

Page 742: ...t der bergang nach jedem ausgef hrten bergang vom Richtungsmodus Normal zu Umkehren und andersherum Die Taste leuchtet bei Aktivierung Rand Breite der Umrandung Weichheit Die R nder der Wipe Muster la...

Page 743: ...animierten bergang eingesetzt wird Clip Dauer Die Clip Dauer bezieht sich auf die L nge der Animation Normalerweise sollten Dauer und L nge der Animation gleich sein ber die Einstellung der Dauer l ss...

Page 744: ...mit QUELLE gekennzeichneten Multifunktionsregler neben dem LCD um den gew nschten Media Player auszuw hlen Benutzen Sie die Pfeiltasten um bei Bedarf die Werte f r Vorlauf Ausl ser Mix und Dauer zu n...

Page 745: ...Weichzeichnungswerts der Key Kanten im vom Media Player abgespielten Clip Passen Sie Gain an bis die gew nschte Weichzeichnung erreicht ist ohne dass die Leuchtdichte Helligkeit des Hintergrundvideos...

Page 746: ...erscheinen im LCD Men HINWEIS Wird der DVE bereits als Upstream Key eingesetzt ist ein DVE bergang erst dann ausw hlbar wenn der Key off air genommen und f r den n chsten bergang deaktiviert ist Weit...

Page 747: ...as vorher ausgeschnitten wurde wird nun eingef gt und umgekehrt DVE Ressourcen f r DVE berg nge teilen ATEM Mischer verf gen ber einen DVE Kanal der zur Ausf hrung von DVE berg ngen oder als Upstream...

Page 748: ...EM Advanced Panel 1 Dr cken Sie im bergangssteuerblock die DVE Taste Die DVE Einstellungen erscheinen im LCD Men Wird der DVE bereits als Upstream Key eingesetzt ist die DVE bergangsart erst dann ausw...

Page 749: ...sten bergangs ist an den Lichtern Normal und Umkehren erkennbar F llquelle Das F llsignal ist die Grafik die sich im Verlauf des bergangs ber den Bildschirm bewegt Key Quelle Das Stanzsignal ist ein G...

Page 750: ...en Tasten auf den Programm und Vorschaubussen beide rot Dies zeigt einen aktuell ablaufenden bergang an Auf einem Advanced Panel zeigt der Blendenhebel Indikator au erdem Position und Fortschritt des...

Page 751: ...uch bewegte Bilder einsetzbar Auf dem Software Bedienpanel erfolgt die Auswahl der F ll und Key Signale ber die Men paletten der Upstream und Downstream Keys Auf den Advanced Panels werden F ll und Ke...

Page 752: ...Videoquellen einem F llsignal und einem Key bzw Stanzsignal Das F llsignal enth lt ein Videobild das ber den Hintergrund gelegt wird Das Key Signal hingegen enth lt eine Graustufenmaske die jene Bere...

Page 753: ...ischer zum berblenden der Grafik ber das Live Video verwenden kann Wenn Sie die Datei als Targa Bilddatei gespeichert oder direkt in den Media Pool geladen haben k nnen Sie f r den Keyer das Attribut...

Page 754: ...e zu w hlen TIPP Alternativ k nnen Sie die F ll und Key Quellen auch mit den entsprechenden Quellauswahltasten vorgeben 5 Scrollen Sie nach Ausw hlen der Key Art sowie F ll und Key Quellen mit den Rec...

Page 755: ...es Luma Keys dieselbe Quelle f r F llung und Stanze 3 Justieren Sie die Key Parameter zum Verfeinern des Keys Einstellungen der Downstream Keyer Einrichten eines Luma Linear Keys f r Downstream Keyer...

Page 756: ...ps auf Ihrem ATEM Mischer abspielen Indem Sie einen gr nen Hintergrund auf Ihre Animationen rendern k nnen Sie mit diesem Gr n stanzen um schnelle saubere Animationen in beliebiger L nge zu erstellen...

Page 757: ...e Key Parameter zuzugreifen die Sie ggf justieren m chten Dazu z hlen Parameter wie Farbton Gain Y Unterdr ckung Lift und Maskenoptionen TIPP Beim Vornehmen von Anpassungen auf einem ATEM Advanced Pan...

Page 758: ...die Option Chroma Key Bereich begrenzen 2 Setzen Sie den Wert f r Lift auf 0 3 Justieren Sie den Farbton bis die Hex Wertpunkte der Farbe um Schwarz zentriert sind Durch Anpassung des Farbtonreglers w...

Page 759: ...glers die F llquelle Normalerweise ist diese Quelle das Bild von einer auf einen Moderator vor einem Greenscreen gerichteten Kamera oder eine in den Media Player geladene Grafik Alternativ k nnen Sie...

Page 760: ...w Drehregler passt die Opazit t des ausgestanzten Bildbereichs an F llen Sie anhand des Sliders kleine Vordergrundartefakte aus die im zu entfernenden Bildbereich briggeblieben sind Wir empfehlen den...

Page 761: ...grundelemente zu entfernen Zum Beispiel einen durch Reflektionen vom Greenscreen verursachten Gr nstich Streulichtunterdr ckung Streulichtunterdr ckung entfernt einen gleichm ig ber alle Vordergrundel...

Page 762: ...s Hintergrunds mit F llsignal und Muster Key Hintergrund Der Hintergrund ist ein bildschirmf llendes Bild F llung Die F llung ist ein anderes bildschirmf llendes Bild das auf das Hintergrundbild geleg...

Page 763: ...lquelle 4 Drehen Sie die entsprechenden Multifunktionsregler um das gew nschte Muster f r den Key sowie seine Gr e vorzugeben 5 Dr cken Sie die Links und Rechtspfeiltasten der Systemsteuerung um durch...

Page 764: ...e oder vertikale Richtung Um das Muster erneut zu zentrieren bet tigen Sie die Musterauswahltaste im Pattern bzw Muster Men Dies setzt die Position und Symmetrie des Musters zur ck DVE Key DVE Digital...

Page 765: ...ktivieren 2 W hlen Sie im LCD Men Keyer mit dem entsprechenden Multifunktionsregler den DVE Key 3 W hlen Sie dann ebenfalls mit dem jeweiligen Regler oder mit einer Quelltaste im Quellauswahlbus eine...

Page 766: ...andung Schatten Aktiviert bzw deaktiviert Schattenwurf Weich Farbe Schaltet die Reglersteuerung zwischen den Einstellungen f r Farbe einschlie lich des Lichteinfallwinkels und f r Weichzeichnung einsc...

Page 767: ...d Muster ist die Einstellung Fliegender Key verf gbar Bei verf gbarem DVE Kanal k nnen mit der Fliegender Key Einstellung digitale Videoeffekte auf den Key angewendet werden Ausf hren von Upstream Key...

Page 768: ...g Steuerblock mit den Tasten Next Transition vor dem bergang Beispiel 2 In diesem Beispiel zeigt die erleuchtete ON Taste bzw ON AIR Schaltfl che an dass KEY 1 gegenw rtig auf Sendung ist F r den n ch...

Page 769: ...n oder auszuschalten 2 Benutzen Sie die Taste DSK AUTO um einen Downstream Keyer schrittweise mit der im DSK Rate Fenster angezeigten Rate auf den Programmausgang berzuleiten bzw von diesem zu entfern...

Page 770: ...omatisch in Echtzeit auf ihre Hintergrundebene reduziert Dies erfolgt ohne Zutun des Anwenders und Ihr Dokument bleibt durch den Export in Photoshop unver ndert Das Plug in f r den ATEM Export setzt d...

Page 771: ...ird Alpha vormultiplizieren sollte fast immer aktiviert sein Hierzu m ssen Sie auf dem Bedienpanel ATEM Software Control bzw dem optionalen Advanced Panel ebenfalls die Einstellung Vormultiplizierter...

Page 772: ...Auxiliary Ausg nge auf Windows ATEM Software Control Men s f r die Signalverteilung des ATEM Constellation 8K Signalverteilung an die Aux Ausg nge ber ein ATEM Hardware Bedienpult Auf ATEM Hardware Be...

Page 773: ...gezeigte Clean Feed 1 Ein mit der Programmausgabe identischer Clean Feed ohne jegliche Inhalte vom Downstream Keyer N tzlich zur Aufzeichnung von Masterausgaben ohne Logos oder Grafik Buttons von den...

Page 774: ...ch demselben Schema um die Parameter der Fenster 2 bis 4 zu ndern Unterl uft Ihnen ein Fehler klicken Sie auf das Zahnrad rechts auf der Registerkarte Fenstersteuerung und stellen Sie dort die Paramet...

Page 775: ...en die mit ART gekennzeichnete Taste und dann die BKGD Taste Selektieren Sie die Quelle f r den Hintergrund auf dem 1 M E Panel ber den Auswahlbus Select oder auf dem 2 M E Panel ber den Zielbus Desti...

Page 776: ...rten Fensters schnell und m helos kopieren und auf ein anderes oder mehrere andere Fenster anwenden So entsteht ein exaktes Abbild mit einem einzigen Klick Die kopierten Fenster erscheinen direkt hint...

Page 777: ...are Control ffnen Sie das Makros Fenster in ATEM Software Control indem Sie im Titelmen auf Makros klicken oder auf einem Mac Option Befehl M bzw auf einem Windows PC Umschalt Befehl M dr cken Makros...

Page 778: ...grammierung zu bedenken ist ndern Sie alle Einstellungen die gebraucht werden um Ihre gew nschten speziellen Effekte zu erstellen Aufzeichnen von Makros mit ATEM Software Control Im nachstehenden Beis...

Page 779: ...auf die AUTO Schaltfl che Ihr Mischer f hrt dann einen Mix bergang von Farbbalken nach Farbe 1 aus 11 Um den Mischer so einzustellen dass er vor Ausf hrung des n chsten bergangs 2 Sekunden wartet klic...

Page 780: ...ist sollte Ihr ATEM Mischer jetzt innerhalb von 3 Sekunden einen Mix von Farbbalken nach Farbe 1 absolvieren 2 Sekunden lang pausieren und dann einen weiteren Mix bergang von 3 Sekunden Dauer nach Sch...

Page 781: ...diglich die gew nschten kleinen Makros modifizieren und diese anschlie end erneut zu einem gro en Makro zusammenf gen Zusammenf gen von kleineren Makros zu einem gro en Makro 1 Leiten Sie die Aufzeich...

Page 782: ...Makros helfen Ein aktivierter Makro zeigt auch ggf eingegebene Notizen an Makroschaltfl chen Nach Aufzeichnung eines Makros an einen ausgew hlten Makroplatz erscheint dieser in Form einer Makro Schalt...

Page 783: ...nachstehenden Anweisungen um den gleichen Makro eines bergangs herzustellen wie bereits mithilfe der Bediensoftware ATEM Software Control vorgef hrt Dieses Mal erstellen Sie einen Makro am Makroplatz...

Page 784: ...erung zu stoppen dr cken Sie die STOP Multifunktionstaste Sie haben soeben mithilfe eines ATEM Advanced Panels einen Makro aufgezeichnet Dieser Makro erscheint als Makrotaste mit dem K rzel 6 weil er...

Page 785: ...ie zus tzliche Pulte ein wenn Sie mehr als vier Kameras haben und jeder Kamera ihre eigene CCU zuweisen m chten um sie gleichzeitig zu steuern Das ist vollkommen Ihnen selbst berlassen HINWEIS Folgend...

Page 786: ...das mittlere Ger t in der Kette Verbinden Sie den unbenutzten Ethernet Port des Kamerasteuerpults nun mit Ihrem Computer oder Netzwerk Wird das Kamerasteuerpult lediglich mit einem Mischer und einem C...

Page 787: ...e Multifunktionstaste SETTINGS Dr cken Sie die Multifunktionstaste SETTINGS um auf alle Einstellungen des Kamerasteuerpults zuzugreifen In der Reihenfolge der Men seiten erscheint die DHCP Einstellung...

Page 788: ...ellungen zwischen einzelnen Ger ten So geben Sie Ihrem Kamerasteuerpult die Mischer IP Adresse vor 1 Dr cken Sie die Pfeil Multifunktionstaste um zur Einstellung Switcher IP Address zu gelangen 2 Gebe...

Page 789: ...Sie am oberen Rand des Displays die Einstellung f r die Kamerareihe Diese Einstellung zeigt an welche Kamerareihe Sie aktuell steuern Nehmen wir bspw an dass Sie acht Kameras steuern und jeder eine b...

Page 790: ...rch Dr cken der Pfeil Multifunktionstaste durch die Einstellungsseiten Als Erstes werden in der Seitenabfolge die Netzwerkeinstellungen einschlie lich der Einstellungen f r das DHCP und die IP Adresse...

Page 791: ...aufzuhellen oder zu verdunkeln drehen Sie die jeweiligen Regler f r die einzelnen Einstellungen im oder gegen den Uhrzeigersinn Die CCU Steuerelemente Die Steuerelemente der Bedienfelder einzelner CCU...

Page 792: ...gkeitseindruck des Bilds verst rkt oder vermindert N heres zur Farbbalance finden Sie im nachstehenden Abschnitt Steuern von Kameras Blendensteuerung Bei einer Produktion werden die im unteren Bereich...

Page 793: ...rt einen allgemeinen berblick ber die Nutzung des Kamerasteuerpults Der erste Schritt der Kamerasteuerung besteht darin einer Kamera eine CCU zuzuweisen Zuweisen einer Kamera an eine CCU Auf der LCD S...

Page 794: ...eter f r andere Kameras speichern und sp ter abrufen Das geht sehr schnell So speichern Sie ein Szenen Preset 1 Dr cken Sie die STORE Taste auf einer CCU Die Taste leuchtet rot auf um zu signalisieren...

Page 795: ...lne CCU gespeichert wurden HINWEIS Diese Funktion ist u erst leistungsstark und n tzlich sollte jedoch mit Vorsicht verwendet werden da sie alle Kameras betrifft darunter auch jene die auf Programmaus...

Page 796: ...rd w hrend Sie andere nderungen vornehmen allm hlich wieder mit der Steuereinheit synchronisiert Dieser Vorgang funktioniert praktisch unsichtbar und Sie werden ihn wahrscheinlich nicht einmal bemerke...

Page 797: ...eit der Kamera ndern Dr cken der Aufw rtspfeiltaste verk rzt die Verschlusszeit Dr cken der Abw rtspfeiltaste verl ngert sie F r den allgemeinen Produktionseinsatz stellt man die Verschlusszeit normal...

Page 798: ...den ungef hren Wertebereich der Kamerabelichtung an Eine pr zise Angabe der Belichtung in f Stop Werten erhalten Sie in der IRIS Anzeige Am unteren Rand des Joystickgriffs befindet sich ein Rad mit de...

Page 799: ...Drehregler CLOSE OPEN COARSE gegen den Uhrzeigersinn drehen bis der gew nschte Gain Wert erreicht ist Nun k nnen Sie den Joystick beliebig nach oben und unten schieben ohne dass der Gain Wert je Ihre...

Page 800: ...ten Schatten verteilt ist CALL Wenn Sie die CALL Taste gedr ckt halten blinkt die Tally Leuchte an der auf der CCU ausgew hlten Kamera Auf diese Weise kann man bequem mit dem Kameraoperator Kontakt au...

Page 801: ...elpeitsche unterst tzt wie z B den Blackmagic SmartView Duo und SmartView HD richten Sie sich bitte nach dem Verbindungsdiagramm auf der R ckseite des GPI and Tally Interface Ein einziges GPI and Tall...

Page 802: ...EM Mischer eine direkte Verbindung zu Ihrem Rechner oder ATEM Advanced Panel ohne Ethernet Switch aufbaut w hlen Sie Configure Address Using Static IP Adresse mit statischer IP konfigurieren aus Stand...

Page 803: ...1 8 aus es sei denn Sie m chten ein zweites Ger t so konfigurieren dass es Tallyausgaben an die Mischereing nge 9 16 eines ATEM 2 M E Production Switchers ausgibt 7 Klicken Sie auf Apply Anwenden Hat...

Page 804: ...e en RCA Audiobuchsen sind praktisch f r Ton von Consumer Ger ten wie HiFi Anlagen oder iPods Koppeln Sie externe HiFi Audioquellen ber die RCA Eing nge Ihres Mischers Einzig der ATEM 4 M E Broadcast...

Page 805: ...es Tonmischpult ben tigt aber wenn Sie lieber eins einsetzen m chten ist dies m glich Der Ton wird ber den Audio Arbeitsraum in ATEM Software Control gemischt und als eingebettetes Digitalaudio ber di...

Page 806: ...64 empfangen Digitalaudio bei einer Tiefe von 24 Bit mit einer Abtastrate von 48 kHz Sie sind mit weiteren 64 Kan len im Audiomixer verbunden die man mit den gleichen EQ Werten und gleicher Dynamik wi...

Page 807: ...SDI Eing nge 1 30 Kanal 31 Externes Mikrofon Kanal 32 PGM Audio Arbeiten mit Tonmischpulten von Fremdherstellern Arbeiten mit einem Tonmischpult In der hektischen Welt der Live Produktionen gehen Jus...

Page 808: ...zu kommunizieren muss Ihr Mischpult Mackie Control unterst tzen Das Pult muss au erdem f r den Einsatz von Mackie Control oder Mackie Control Emulation konfiguriert sein Bitte sehen Sie die Einzelheit...

Page 809: ...o wird kein Ton verwendet oder er stumm ist stumm geschaltet Die Stumm Schaltfl che der Bedienoberfl che Ihres Audiomixers ist bei st ndig aktiviertem oder im Mix vorhandenen Audio st ndig erleuchtet...

Page 810: ...e des seriellen Ports f r Steuerungskabel RS 422 Pin Anschl sse f r Steuerungskabel RS 422 ist ein bertragungsstandard f r Ports zum Gebrauch mit g ngigen DB9 oder RJ12 Verbindern Wer sich eine PTZ St...

Page 811: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 812: ...mber specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters that...

Page 813: ...ough 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and operation typ...

Page 814: ...rom minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate fps as...

Page 815: ...2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4 0 int8 0...

Page 816: ...CD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd decimal...

Page 817: ...multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage medium 0 CF...

Page 818: ...12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x000x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 subtract...

Page 819: ...tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they are monit...

Page 820: ...1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 6 7...

Page 821: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF Relative...

Page 822: ...n Sie die aktuell installierte Version ffnen Sie das Fenster About ATEM Software Control um nachzusehen welche Version der ATEM Software auf Ihrem Computer l uft ffnen Sie ATEM Software Control auf Ma...

Page 823: ...und Gebrauchsvorschriften k nnen sie zu St rungen beim Rundfunkempfang f hren Der Betrieb solcher Ger te in Wohngebieten f hrt mit gro er Wahrscheinlichkeit zu Funkst rungen In diesem Fall kann vom B...

Page 824: ...s Produkts Wenden Sie sich f r die Wartung an ein Blackmagic Design Service Center in Ihrer N he Nur in H hen bis 2000 m ber dem Meeresspiegel einsetzen California Proposition 65 Plastikteile dieses P...

Page 825: ...Blackmagic Design Ersatzteilen oder Verbrauchsmaterialien entstanden sind d Service f r ein Produkt das ver ndert oder in andere Produkte integriert wurde sofern eine solche nderung oder Integration...

Page 826: ...Manual de instalaci n y funcionamiento Junio 2020 Espa ol Mezcladores ATEM...

Page 827: ...s durante mucho tiempo Este manual de instrucciones contiene toda la informaci n necesaria para instalar el dispositivo Cabe destacar que el mezclador incluye un programa de control que puede ejecutar...

Page 828: ...acceso r pido 866 Organizaci n de archivos 866 Mezcla de audio 867 Control de c maras 868 Ajustes del mezclador 868 Uso del panel de control virtual 869 Paneles de opciones 873 Mezcla de audio 875 Aj...

Page 829: ...d Panel 989 Uso del dispositivo ATEM Camera Control Panel 991 Alimentaci n del panel 991 Conexi n del panel al mezclador 992 Configuraci n de los ajustes de red 993 Distribuci n de los controles en el...

Page 830: ...rte el programa ATEM Software Control puede instalarse en tantos equipos inform ticos como sea necesario sin cargo adicional Con la l nea de mezcladores ATEM es posible crear un sistema personalizado...

Page 831: ...una de las ventajas que ofrece el mezclador ya que permite seleccionar la fuente en el bus de anticipos para comprobar si es la correcta antes de escoger un tipo de transici n De esta manera es dif c...

Page 832: ...ya ha utilizado mezcladores seguramente estar acostumbrado a los modelos A B anteriores y podr configurar f cilmente las preferencias del mezclador ATEM para que funcione de esta manera Consulte el a...

Page 833: ...94 y hasta 8K 4320p59 94 El panel de control integrado con pantalla LCD y el sistema de comunicaci n permiten alternar se ales directamente desde el panel frontal por lo que es posible confirmar toda...

Page 834: ...r BNC El teclado en el panel frontal brinda la posibilidad de seleccionar entre 6 salidas auxiliares en forma instant nea y monitorizar dichas se ales en la pantalla del dispositivo ATEM 4 M E Broadca...

Page 835: ...ctar el equipo inform tico Es mucho m s interesante conectar el panel en primer lugar La conexi n del panel es simple ya que ha sido previamente configurado con los ajustes de red necesarios para cone...

Page 836: ...a obtener m s informaci n al respecto Luego de realizar los ajustes correspondientes la conexi n directa entre el panel y el mezclador deber a funcionar correctamente Conexiones traseras en el modelo...

Page 837: ...desde el instalador haciendo clic en el bot n correspondiente junto al cono de ajustes En equipos Mac todos los archivos necesarios para el funcionamiento del mezclador se instalan en una carpeta den...

Page 838: ...le si desea permitir que el programa se instale en el equipo Haga clic en S para continuar 4 A continuaci n aparecer otro aviso indicando que se ha encontrado un nuevo dispositivo y el asistente de in...

Page 839: ...ware para el mezclador siga los pasos descritos a continuaci n 1 Conecte un cable Ethernet desde el puerto SWITCHER CONTROL en el mezclador al equipo inform tico SUGERENCIA Si ya dispone de un panel d...

Page 840: ...lo cual solo le tomar unos minutos Para modificar los ajustes de red 1 Acceda a los ajustes de red mediante el panel de control en Windows o la opci n Preferencias del sistema en Mac Seleccione la co...

Page 841: ...as opciones de configuraci n Selecci n del formato de imagen Es posible seleccionar el formato m s adecuado seg n la regi n por ejemplo 2160p29 97 1080i59 94 720p59 94 o NTSC en pa ses que siguen esta...

Page 842: ...udio Pro 4K cuentan asimismo con ajustes para la modalidad N 1 en las salidas SDI 5 a 8 por lo que es posible silenciar la entrada correspondiente desde la se al de retorno del programa Por su parte e...

Page 843: ...sposici n de las ventanas seg n sus preferencias Opciones de visualizaci n simult nea Al utilizar la versi n 6 9 o superior del programa ATEM Software Control con uno de los modelos ATEM UHD es posibl...

Page 844: ...imagen pueden mostrarse u ocultarse haciendo clic en el cono correspondiente Conexi n de grabadores HyperDeck El programa ATEM Software Control versi n 6 8 o posterior permite conectar hasta cuatro un...

Page 845: ...dades HyperDeck se conectan al mezclador mediante las salidas SDI o HDMI y pueden controlarse a trav s de una red Ethernet Consulte el apartado correspondiente para obtener m s informaci n al respecto...

Page 846: ...que las im genes se vean en cualquier otro equipo que no sea un televisor En dicho caso no ser posible ver la se al A modo de ejemplo los decodificadores y reproductores DVD incluyen este tipo de prot...

Page 847: ...a de forma que los paneles de control cuenten con una ubicaci n estable a la cual conectarse Esto significa que es preciso establecer una direcci n IP fija dentro del rango de la red utilizada Para lo...

Page 848: ...ie el mezclador Ap guelo vuelva a encenderlo y luego cierre el cuadro Modifique los ajustes de red mediante la pesta a Configure del programa Blackmagic ATEM Setup Ajustes de red para paneles ATEM Los...

Page 849: ...meros en cada campo mediante los mandos giratorios correspondientes situados debajo de la pantalla 4 Presione el bot n GUARDAR para confirmar los cambios A continuaci n el panel se conectar al mezclad...

Page 850: ...si el panel tendr una direcci n IP fija o si el servidor DHCP se la asignar en forma autom tica Seleccione DHCP S o DHCP NO seg n la opci n deseada NOTA Si el mezclador se conecta directamente sin ut...

Page 851: ...si todo funciona correctamente desde el mezclador siendo este el n cleo del sistema de producci n Este apartado proporciona un ejemplo b sico de c mo usar el panel frontal al configurar el mezclador p...

Page 852: ...funcionamiento del sistema de comunicaci n es buena idea verificar que la luz piloto est operativa en todas las c maras Para ello presione uno de lo botones correspondientes a una entrada a fin de se...

Page 853: ...tar si desea actualizarlo en caso de ser necesario Se recomienda actualizar todos los equipos simult neamente para evitar que las versiones del software sean diferentes Programa de instalaci n Para el...

Page 854: ...tico mediante una red Ethernet es posible actualizarlo a trav s de dicha conexi n NOTA Si la actualizaci n se lleva a cabo por medio del puerto USB aseg rese de que el panel sea el nico dispositivo d...

Page 855: ...efiniciones Permite transmitir la se al principal del programa desde el mezclador y puede conectarse a televisores proyectores o incluso a los dispositivos H 264 Encoder y HyperDeck de Blackmagic Desi...

Page 856: ...s ideal cuando se desea utilizar un monitor de m xima resoluci n para ver las im genes anticipadamente El audio en esta salida proviene del canal integrado en la se al SDI Salida M E Las versiones ATE...

Page 857: ...render el dispositivo por primera vez notar que el bot n 1 se enciende de color rojo Esto significa que la fuente recibida a trav s de la entrada 1 est al aire y la imagen correspondiente deber a vers...

Page 858: ...del dispositivo tambi n pueden seleccionarse desde el programa inform tico o en un panel de control conectado al equipo Adem s de los botones para las entradas principales el panel frontal dispone de...

Page 859: ...presione el bot n SET para seleccionarla 5 Seleccione la opci n Corte directo presionando el bot n SET nuevamente 6 Presione MENU para regresar a las opciones previas o a la pantalla principal De est...

Page 860: ...iza principalmente para el volumen del audio aunque tambi n permite seleccionar diferentes opciones en los men s en pantalla En general es posible ver los ajustes realizados con dicho control en la pa...

Page 861: ...un panel de control Es posible realizar una composici n desde una se al de entrada o un reproductor Esto puede configurarse mediante los men s en pantalla o un panel de control Si est utilizando el me...

Page 862: ...con el prop sito de evitar cambios no deseados Uso de los men s en pantalla Los men s en pantalla facilitan el uso del mezclador Aunque los hemos utilizado en los ejemplos descritos anteriormente reco...

Page 863: ...os de la producci n los ingenieros y la mezcla de audio principal mediante el panel o el programa ATEM Software Control El bot n seleccionado se encender de rojo indicando que es posible ajustar el ni...

Page 864: ...ciones y cambiar el idioma de la interfaz Preferencias generales Es posible seleccionar una de las siguientes opciones para el idioma de la interfaz ingl s espa ol alem n franc s italiano japon s core...

Page 865: ...nados a determinadas fuentes en el primero no afectar la forma en que fueron asignados en este ltimo Asigne una c mara mediante el men desplegable Panel de control virtual El programa est compuesto po...

Page 866: ...Control suelte la tecla y luego oprima 1 8 Permite alternar r pidamente entre las entradas 1 10 y la salida principal La funci n permanece activada y el bot n CUT se enciende de color rojo Control Shi...

Page 867: ...l canal alfa como la imagen principal se activan autom ticamente sin que sea necesario seleccionarlos por separado Sin embargo el canal alfa puede direccionarse en forma independiente con el objetivo...

Page 868: ...ar con facilidad los diferentes par metros tales como la apertura del diafragma las luces la nitidez y la distancia focal en objetivos compatibles Por otra parte la versi n 1 8 1 o posteriores del sof...

Page 869: ...del mezclador para girar o inclinar la c mara y modificar la distancia focal as como controlar otros equipos que funcionan mediante el protocolo GVG100 por ejemplo sistemas de edici n lineal Consulte...

Page 870: ...en todos los mezcladores ATEM con m s de un banco M E Bars Barras de color generadas internamente por el mezclador Este es un bot n especial en los mezcladores que cuentan con un solo banco de mezcla...

Page 871: ...ansici n Si se ha conectado un panel de control la palanca de transici n se desplazar para proporcionar una indicaci n visual del progreso de la transici n Tipo de transici n Estos botones permiten el...

Page 872: ...a transici n el direccionamiento de la se al limpia no se ver afectado ON AIR Este bot n permite mostrar u ocultar elementos superpuestos en la se al emitida e indica si estos se encuentran al aire Se...

Page 873: ...ece diferentes prestaciones seg n el modelo de mezlador utilizado No todas las versiones cuentan con las mismas caracter sticas por lo cual es posible que los paneles difieran El orden de procesamient...

Page 874: ...mposiciones Transiciones Este panel permite ajustar distintos par metros para cada tipo de transici n Por ejemplo en el caso de un fundido se incluye un men desplegable que permite seleccionar la fuen...

Page 875: ...o est disponible en los modelos con puerto USB Mezcla de audio La pesta a Audio permite mezclar el sonido proveniente de las distintas fuentes conectadas al dispositivo En la parte superior se muestra...

Page 876: ...el atenuador principal Una vez presionado el bot n FTB dicho indicador se enciende y se apaga en forma intermitente Intensidad del volumen Mueva el control a fin de ajustar la ganancia para cada c mar...

Page 877: ...a se al de audio presente Selecci n de fuentes de audio Las opciones ON y AFV debajo de cada v metro permiten seleccionar las fuentes de audio transmitidas mediante la salida principal del mezclador O...

Page 878: ...estos controles permiten ajustar la intensidad del volumen de dicha fuente sin afectar la salida principal Para activarlos seleccione la opci n Control para la salida del audio en la ventana de ajuste...

Page 879: ...e la comunicaci n Ajuste estos par metros para lograr un equilibrio adecuado entre ambos Efecto local Este control permite integrar la voz captada por el micr fono de los auriculares en la se al super...

Page 880: ...a de las entradas y la salida principal cuentan con un ecualizador param trico de seis bandas que permite controlar frecuencias espec ficas Esto permite reducir zumbidos o el ruido de un micr fono ref...

Page 881: ...lizan en los ajustes situados en la parte inferior as como en los indicadores de frecuencia baja media baja media alta y alta Controles de frecuencia De manera alternativa es posible emplear los mando...

Page 882: ...s en la gr fica mientras que un realce de agudos facilita el control de las frecuencias altas A modo de ejemplo seleccione un filtro de realce de graves en la banda 3 y ajuste la ganancia Dichos cambi...

Page 883: ...r o la puerta de ruido el compresor y el limitador comparten par metros que permiten ajustar la forma en que cada uno de ellos afecta al audio por ejemplo su nivel al inicio su duraci n o su intensida...

Page 884: ...e relajaci n Compresor El compresor permite reducir los picos de una se al de audio acotando su rango din mico con el prop sito de aumentar el volumen general sin que ocurra una distorsi n Esto result...

Page 885: ...ica que facilita el uso de las herramientas Fairlight para perfeccionar y mejorar la mezcla de audio 1 En general el primer paso para optimizar la mezcla de audio es normalizar todas las entradas de m...

Page 886: ...r a cualquiera de los ajustes para hacer m s modificaciones es recomendable seguir el mismo orden descrito anteriormente a fin de obtener los mejores resultados Por ejemplo primero es fundamental dete...

Page 887: ...GIF JPEG o TIFF En lo que respecta al audio es compatible con archivos WAV MP3 o AIFF Panel multimedia Este panel muestra vistas en miniatura de las secuencias e im genes fijas asignadas a cada espaci...

Page 888: ...a de ajustes para cambiar la configuraci n del mezclador y los grabadores HyperDeck seleccionar el modo de visualizaci n simult nea activar la funci n de control remoto o personalizar los distintos r...

Page 889: ...ina el contenido del panel multimedia Selecci n del formato para el modo de visualizaci n simult nea Utilice el men desplegable Est ndar para Multi View a fin de seleccionar el formato que desee utili...

Page 890: ...erminada adopta el formato 1080p29 97 al alternar fuentes UHD con una resoluci n de 2160p59 94 o el formato 1080p25 si la resoluci n es 2160p50 Al utilizar los modelos ATEM 1 M E y 2 M E en alta defin...

Page 891: ...dentro de los ajustes generales del mezclador En el modelo ATEM Constellation 8K la comunicaci n se realiza mediante los canales SDI 13 14 15 y 16 Si se utilizan otros productos de Blackmagic Design...

Page 892: ...Constellation 8K 720p 3200 fotogramas 1080i 1080p 1600 fotogramas 2160p 400 fotogramas 4320p 100 fotogramas ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 720p 3200 fotogramas 1080i 1080p 1440 fotogramas 2160p 360 f...

Page 893: ...tuado en la parte inferior izquierda de cada ventana La opci n Activados permite ver los v metros de todas las fuentes De manera alternativa es posible activarlos en forma individual mediante el cono...

Page 894: ...conmutables situadas en la parte trasera del mezclador est n numeradas de manera que coinciden con el n mero de las entradas compatibles correspondientes Ajustes para r tulos Por ejemplo en el modelo...

Page 895: ...extenso y CAM1 al nombre corto Ajustes para grabadores HyperDeck Ajustes para grabadores HyperDeck Es posible conectar hasta cuatro grabadores HyperDeck Studio y controlarlos mediante el programa ATEM...

Page 896: ...programa ATEM Software Control proporciona un men espec fico para estas Esto permite seleccionar entre 24 salidas en definici n HD o UHD o 6 en resoluci n 8K y despu s escoger la fuente que se desea...

Page 897: ...onar todos se encuentra marcada por defecto En este caso el programa guardar la configuraci n general del mezclador Para guardar ajustes espec ficos desmarque aquellos que no desea en forma individual...

Page 898: ...inalizar Para conservar determinados ajustes gu rdelos en un equipo inform tico o soporte externo tal como una unidad USB Esto permite acceder a los mismos con facilidad y disponer de un respaldo en c...

Page 899: ...ones integradas en la se al permitiendo de este modo controlar los diferentes par metros Al instalar un m dulo SFP en el modelo Studio Camera es posible conectar la unidad mediante cables SDI o de fib...

Page 900: ...uso de la luz piloto Al mismo tiempo podr ver la se al principal transmitida por el mezclador en la pantalla de la c mara presionando el bot n PGM Conecte varios modelos Studio Camera mediante fibra...

Page 901: ...general situado debajo del c rculo crom tico permite ajustar el contraste en todos los canales YRGB al mismo tiempo o la luminancia de las luces los tonos intermedios y las sombras en forma independie...

Page 902: ...a arriba para acercar la imagen o hacia abajo para alejarla Control primario Se encuentra a la izquierda del control del diafragma pedestal y permite limitar la apertura m xima del diafragma Es de sum...

Page 903: ...la velocidad de obturaci n Se encuentra situado entre el c rculo crom tico y el control del diafragma pedestal Mueva el puntero del rat n sobre el indicador y haga clic en las flechas para aumentar o...

Page 904: ...uces los tonos intermedios y las sombras en la imagen Para cambiar de c mara utilice los botones en la parte superior de la ventana Si desea acceder a las herramientas para correcciones primarias de D...

Page 905: ...e es posible lograr efectos interesantes modificando solo el canal Y Este ajuste funciona mejor si el control Mezclador de luminancia se mueve hacia la derecha De lo contrario el programa procesar los...

Page 906: ...los correctos o incorrectos El ajuste m s apropiado depende de sus preferencias y de lo que luzca bien seg n su criterio Arrastre los controles hacia la izquierda o la derecha para ajustar el contrast...

Page 907: ...onos intermedios Y GAIN Permite modificar el contraste en la imagen mediante un ajuste de la luminancia en las luces CONTRAST Gire este control hacia la derecha o la izquierda para aumentar o disminui...

Page 908: ...Conexi n de grabadores HyperDeck La conexi n de estas unidades mediante las entradas SDI o HDMI es muy similar a la de las c maras y otras fuentes El nico requisito adicional es la disponibilidad de u...

Page 909: ...a cuatro unidades Basta con introducir la direcci n IP del equipo HyperDeck y escoger la entrada a la que se encuentra conectado mediante el men desplegable Input Al hacer clic en Conectar podr contro...

Page 910: ...erminado o dar inicio a la reproducci n en forma manual Manejo de grabadores HyperDeck desde el programa ATEM Software Control Para controlar los grabadores conectados al mezclador haga clic en la pes...

Page 911: ...nua Al hacer clic en el mismo nuevamente se reproducen toda la lista en forma continua Utilice el control situado debajo de los botones para avanzar o retroceder las im genes De esta forma es posible...

Page 912: ...n mediante el panel de control En primer lugar presione el bot n SETTINGS Notar que aparecen cuatro opciones en la parte superior de la pantalla MEZCLADOR PANEL HYPERDECKS y ASIGNAR BOTONES Cada una d...

Page 913: ...red Ethernet Presione las flechas o el bot n 3 en el teclado num rico del panel para acceder al tercer ajuste disponible en el men HYPERDECKS En la pantalla ver la direcci n IP de la unidad selecciona...

Page 914: ...ograma Dado que el dispositivo debe avanzar algunos cuadros antes de comenzar la reproducci n esta sufrir un peque o retraso a fin de garantizar una transici n exitosa Este modo de funcionamiento es s...

Page 915: ...i n adicionales SUGERENCIA Para reproducir todos los clips presione SHIFT y oprima al mismo tiempo el bot n de reproducci n Presione el bot n junto al s mbolo de grabaci n para grabar la se al princip...

Page 916: ...cuarto grupo de ajustes Mediante el mando giratorio es posible asignar el grabador a un grupo de controles de reproducci n Cabe mencionar que la opci n TRANSPORT 1 corresponde a los botones en la par...

Page 917: ...es posible conectar paneles externos adicionales para crear sistemas personalizados El siguiente apartado proporciona informaci n sobre el uso de los diferentes modelos de paneles ATEM ATEM 1 M E Adva...

Page 918: ...uentes internas son fijos y no es preciso cambiarlos Las pantallas muestran el nombre de cada fuente en los distintos buses del dispositivo Al presionar el bot n SHIFT es posible seleccionar fuentes a...

Page 919: ...El indicador del nombre de la fuente y el bus de selecci n permiten identificar las distintas se ales asignadas a composiciones y salidas auxiliares El bot n correspondiente a la fuente seleccionada...

Page 920: ...iso Esto brinda la posibilidad de comprobarla previamente a su transmisi n y realizar las correcciones que sean necesarias Cabe destacar que las transiciones animadas tambi n pueden verse con anticipa...

Page 921: ...de forma que pueda emitirse al aire simult neamente con dicha transici n Al asociar los elementos superpuestos a la transici n principal esta se llevar a cabo a la velocidad indicada en los ajustes co...

Page 922: ...vantes se muestran en la pantalla Utilice estos botones y los mandos giratorios para acceder a los mismos y realizar cambios Los puntos debajo del nombre de un men indican que hay otras opciones adici...

Page 923: ...al de la c mara como la distancia focal Incluso es posible controlar varias unidades simult neamente presionando el bot n PTZ y seleccionando a continuaci n la c mara mediante el teclado num rico Real...

Page 924: ...leccionar tanto el protocolo de control como la unidad cuyos ajustes se desea modificar En primer lugar es necesario comprobar que todas las c maras conectadas hayan sido detectadas Para detectar los...

Page 925: ...tante el grado de sensibilidad puede variar seg n el modelo de cabezal utilizado Consulte el apartado Conexiones del puerto serial para cables de control a fin de obtener m s informaci n al respecto A...

Page 926: ...n modificar ajustes de forma din mica para controlar el mezclador De este modo brinda la posibilidad de implementar una din mica de trabajo r pida y efectiva Este apartado del manual explica c mo real...

Page 927: ...de la salida principal SUGERENCIA Se recomienda usar los botones del m dulo de control de transiciones para efectuar una transici n ya que de esta forma es posible comprobar las im genes antes de emit...

Page 928: ...igiendo el tipo de transici n y presionando el bot n AUTO Este valor se almacena en la memoria del dispositivo hasta que el usuario lo modifique nuevamente Un mezclador ofrece varias maneras para pasa...

Page 929: ...nte unos instantes hasta fundirse gradualmente con el plano siguiente Este tipo de transici n puede utilizarse para lograr un efecto por ejemplo mediante un fundido en blanco o mostrar r pidamente el...

Page 930: ...en expansi n 97 Secuencia de im genes en la se al transmitida al realizar una cortinilla Para realizar una cortinilla desde un panel ATEM 1 Seleccione la fuente que desea emitir al aire en el bus de a...

Page 931: ...aci n de la transici n en segundos y fotogramas Simetr a Permite controlar la relaci n de aspecto de la forma geom trica Por ejemplo ajustando este valor es posible transformar un c rculo en una elips...

Page 932: ...s visuales digitales para obtener m s informaci n al respecto 3 Utilice los botones y mandos giratorios para configurar los diferentes par metros Estos permiten ajustar la forma direcci n y duraci n d...

Page 933: ...disponibles para emplearlos en una transici n Las transiciones con logotipos son muy utilizadas e incluyen efectos visuales digitales El elemento gr fico se mueve a trav s de la pantalla sobre una tra...

Page 934: ...presionando el bot n AUTO Opciones para cortinillas con gr ficos Tiempo Duraci n de la transici n en segundos y fotogramas Para ajustarla gire el mando correspondiente o ingrese un valor y presione e...

Page 935: ...ctos visuales digitales pueden realizarse de forma manual Para realizar una transici n manual 1 Seleccione la fuente que desea emitir al aire en el bus de anticipos 2 Seleccione el tipo de transici n...

Page 936: ...stes 2 Presione la flecha derecha a fin de acceder a los ajustes para los perfiles de usuario 3 Seleccione un espacio vac o mediante el mando giratorio 4 Presione SAVE para guardar el perfil El perfil...

Page 937: ...flecha derecha en el panel de control para acceder al segundo grupo de ajustes 2 Seleccione el perfil que desea eliminar mediante el mando giratorio Si est en uso el texto encima del nombre aparecer...

Page 938: ...color y luego sobre el cuadrado coloreado para abrir el selector de colores y realizar la elecci n En el panel de control seleccione la opci n Color en el m dulo de control del sistema y ajuste el ma...

Page 939: ...anejo de los reproductores multimedia desde el programa inform tico 1 En la pesta a Mezclador seleccione el panel Reproductores 2 Seleccione un clip o una imagen del panel multimedia en el men despleg...

Page 940: ...l bot n CUT en el m dulo de control de transiciones Bus de programa Cuando se realiza un corte directo desde el bus de programa la imagen cambia pero se mantienen los elementos superpuestos Para reali...

Page 941: ...irecto desde el programa inform tico mediante el teclado num rico 1 Compruebe que la tecla de bloqueo de may sculas no est activada 2 En el teclado presione el n mero correspondiente a la fuente que d...

Page 942: ...o 1 Seleccione la fuente que desea emitir al aire en el bus de anticipos 2 Seleccione el tipo de transici n mediante el bot n respectivo en el m dulo Tipo de transici n 3 Seleccione el mismo tipo de t...

Page 943: ...o a transmitirse a trav s de la salida principal Para realizar una transici n autom tica desde un panel ATEM 1 Seleccione la fuente que desea emitir al aire en el bus de anticipos 2 Seleccione el tipo...

Page 944: ...os para disolvencias Para realizar una disolvencia desde el programa inform tico 1 Seleccione la fuente que desea emitir al aire en el bus de anticipos 2 Seleccione el tipo de transici n mediante el b...

Page 945: ...idamente el logotipo de un patrocinador Cabe se alar que es posible ajustar tanto la duraci n de la transici n como el tiempo que la fuente intermedia permanece en pantalla Secuencia de im genes en la...

Page 946: ...lado num rico 4 Utilice el mando correspondiente para seleccionar la fuente intermedia De manera alternativa presione uno de los botones en el bus de selecci n 5 Realice la transici n de forma manual...

Page 947: ...odifique los par metros para personalizar la transici n 5 Realice la transici n de forma manual o autom tica Ajuste de par metros para cortinillas Para realizar una cortinilla desde un panel ATEM 1 Se...

Page 948: ...pci n el texto se destaca de color naranja Borde Permite ajustar el ancho del borde Atenuaci n Permite ajustar la definici n de los bordes Es posible emplear cualquier fuente del mezclador Por ejemplo...

Page 949: ...nimadas en el programa inform tico Fuente Reproductor multimedia utilizado para reproducir el clip que se utilizar en la transici n Duraci n del clip Se refiere a la duraci n de la animaci n Generalme...

Page 950: ...mando situado junto a la opci n Fuente para seleccionar el reproductor multimedia Utilice las flechas para ajustar los diferentes par metros de la transici n seg n sea necesario 3 A continuaci n presi...

Page 951: ...i n Cambia la imagen superpuesta por la imagen de fondo Es importante recordar que las diferentes duraciones en estos par metros son interdependientes Por ejemplo la suma de los valores en trigger y m...

Page 952: ...previa no ser posible elegir un tipo de transici n con efectos si dicha composici n est al aire o ha sido vinculada a la pr xima transici n Consulte el apartado C mo compartir recursos al trabajar co...

Page 953: ...EM disponen de un canal para efectos visuales digitales que permite realizar transiciones con dichos efectos o utilizarlos en una composici n de im genes No es posible seleccionar una transici n con e...

Page 954: ...sde un panel ATEM 1 Seleccione el tipo de transici n mediante el bot n respectivo La pantalla del dispositivo mostrar los ajustes disponibles Cuando los efectos visuales est n siendo utilizados en otr...

Page 955: ...sobre la transici n Canal alfa Este es una imagen en escala de grises que define el rea del gr fico que deber eliminarse para que la imagen en primer plano se aplique correctamente sobre la transici n...

Page 956: ...4 Los botones de las fuentes seleccionadas en los buses de programa y anticipos se encender n de color rojo para indicar que la misma est en curso En el panel de control el indicador junto a la palanc...

Page 957: ...m tico el canal alfa y la se al principal se seleccionan en las listas desplegables situadas en los paneles Composici n previa y Composici n posterior En el panel de control dichas se ales se determin...

Page 958: ...Composici n lineal Una composici n lineal contiene dos elementos el canal alfa y la se al principal La se al principal incluye la imagen que se superpone al fondo mientras que el canal alfa contiene...

Page 959: ...ho gr fico sobre las im genes en directo Luego al guardarlo como un archivo Targa o exportarlo directamente al Panel multimedia seleccione la opci n Composici n precompuesta para lograr un resultado d...

Page 960: ...nte en la parte superior de la pantalla 3 Gire el mando junto al indicador COMPOSICI N y seleccione la opci n Luminancia 4 Gire los mandos junto a las opciones PRIMER PLANO y CANAL ALFA para seleccion...

Page 961: ...la imagen principal y el canal alfa 3 Ajuste los dem s par metros de la composici n seg n sea necesario Opciones para composiciones posteriores Para realizar una composici n posterior lineal o por lu...

Page 962: ...e sustituir con facilidad para crear animaciones de cualquier duraci n El color verde generado por el equipo inform tico es uniforme y por lo tanto muy f cil de reemplazar Combinaci n del fondo con la...

Page 963: ...spectivos botones en el bus de selecci n 4 Presione la flecha derecha o izquierda para acceder a otros par metros adicionales de la composici n SUGERENCIA Al realizar ajustes en los modelos ATEM Advan...

Page 964: ...e los puntos en el vectorscopio se sit en alrededor del negro Al modificar el matiz se compensar el punto negro y el conjunto de puntos correspondiente a las 6 barras de color rotar en la pantalla 4 A...

Page 965: ...de un fondo verde o un gr fico del reproductor multimedia De manera alternativa presione los respectivos botones en el bus de selecci n 4 Presione la flecha derecha a fin de acceder a la pantalla de...

Page 966: ...til celo para eliminar artefactos menores en el rea de la imagen que desea eliminar Sugerimos mover el control hasta que el rea superpuesta se torne opaca Borde Este control y el mando giratorio respe...

Page 967: ...imer plano por ejemplo causados por el reflejo de la luz en un fondo verde Reflejo Permite eliminar una cierta tonalidad general en todos los elementos en primer plano Combinaci n del fondo y la image...

Page 968: ...bilidad de crear 18 formas diferentes que pueden ajustarse y colocarse en distintos lugares para obtener el efecto deseado Combinaci n del fondo con la imagen en primer plano y el canal alfa Fondo Ima...

Page 969: ...dispositivo mostrar el men de ajustes correspondiente Al oprimir este bot n la composici n se emitir al aire al llevar a cabo la siguiente transici n 2 Seleccione el tipo de composici n geom trica gir...

Page 970: ...de la forma geom trica acceda al men de selecci n que contiene los diferentes patrones Utilice la palanca o los mandos giratorios para moverla en sentido vertical y horizontal Para centrarla nuevament...

Page 971: ...un sinf n de opciones creativas 3 Ajuste los dem s par metros de la composici n seg n sea necesario Consulte la tabla m s adelante para ver una descripci n detallada Opciones para composiciones con ef...

Page 972: ...e Ninguno Sin biselado Borde bidimensional cuyo ancho atenuaci n y color pueden ajustarse Interno y externo Biselado interior y exterior Borde tridimensional Externo Biselado exterior Borde tridimensi...

Page 973: ...l ancho de dicho rect ngulo es posible cubrir diversas partes de la imagen Asimismo es posible emplearla como una herramienta creativa para ocultar diversos elementos En el panel de control las m scar...

Page 974: ...uperpuestos se encuentra al aire En el m dulo Next Transition se ha oprimido el bot n KEY 1 por lo cual el logotipo asociado a este ser visible ON en la se al principal al realizar la siguiente transi...

Page 975: ...cultar gradualmente el elemento superpuesto en la imagen emitida seg n la duraci n indicada en la pantalla DSK rate 3 Utilice el bot n DSK TIE para asociar la composici n posterior al m dulo de contro...

Page 976: ...cci n IP del mezclador Al ejecutar el complemento para Photoshop por primera vez es necesario configurar la direcci n IP del mezclador De esta forma el complemento podr comunicarse con el dispositivo...

Page 977: ...enuados y se fundan con la imagen de fondo Salidas auxiliares Las salidas auxiliares son salidas SDI adicionales mediante las cuales es posible transmitir se ales provenientes de varias entradas y fue...

Page 978: ...control de salidas auxiliares en equipos Windows Men s del programa ATEM Software Control para asignar salidas en el modelo ATEM Constellation 8K Asignaci n de fuentes a la salida auxiliar mediante un...

Page 979: ...s que se ve en el monitor conectado a la salida MULTI VIEW Se al limpia 1 Se al id ntica a la emitida al aire pero sin elementos superpuestos Es ideal para masterizar programas sin logotipos o textos...

Page 980: ...en la parte inferior Los par metros de las dem s ventanas se pueden modificar siguiendo los mismos pasos Si comete un error haga clic sobre el s mbolo en la parte superior derecha de la pesta a Contr...

Page 981: ...odelo ATEM 1 M E o el bus de destino en el dispositivo ATEM 2 M E La se al seleccionada se mostrar detr s de las ventanas activas Para mostrar la imagen en primer plano marque la opci n Primer plano e...

Page 982: ...rograma inform tico haga clic en el bot n Copiar a fin de acceder a las distintas opciones Los ajustes de la ventana seleccionada se pueden aplicar f cilmente a cualquiera de las dem s ventanas con so...

Page 983: ...l haga clic en el men respectivo situado en la barra superior de la interfaz o presione las teclas Shift Command en Mac o Control M en Windows Se abrir una ventana que puede moverse hacia cualquier pa...

Page 984: ...e Control En el ejemplo proporcionado a continuaci n crearemos una macro para que el mezclador lleve a cabo una disolvencia de 3 segundos entre las barras de color y un color determinado luego haga un...

Page 985: ...ealice una pausa de 2 segundos antes de llevar a cabo la transici n siguiente haga clic en el bot n AGREGAR PAUSA situado en la parte superior de la pantalla Aparecer una ventana que permite a adir un...

Page 986: ...tamente el mezclador realizar una disolvencia de 3 segundos entre las barras de color y el color 1 luego se detendr durante 2 segundos y a continuaci n llevar a cabo un fundido a negro con una duraci...

Page 987: ...luego volver a compilarlas Para compilar varias macros 1 Comience a grabar una nueva macro y a continuaci n haga clic en el bot n Ejecutar 2 Marque la opci n Seleccionar y ejecutar para ejecutar las...

Page 988: ...n correspondiente Espacios Despu s de grabar una macro en uno de los espacios disponibles aparecer un bot n con su nombre Si no se introduce un nombre para la macro el programa le asignar el n mero d...

Page 989: ...se indican a continuaci n para crear la macro Transitions descrita anteriormente al utilizar el programa ATEM Software Control En este caso se crear una macro en la posici n 6 1 Presione el bot n cont...

Page 990: ...ntifica mediante el bot n Macro 6 ya que dicho n mero corresponde a la posici n asignada Cabe destacar que el programa ATEM Software Control permite nombrar cada macro y agregar notas haciendo clic en...

Page 991: ...de contar con m s de cuatro c maras y querer asignar cada una exclusivamente a un m dulo tambi n se brinda la posibilidad de utilizar paneles adicionales B sicamente es decisi n del usuario NOTA El di...

Page 992: ...control de c maras con un mezclador y un equipo inform tico en una red compartida conecte el panel al mezclador y luego el otro puerto Ethernet a su PC Despu s de conectar el panel al equipo ATEM se...

Page 993: ...an una serie de puntos peque os A medida que se presiona la flecha para alternar entre las distintas opciones los puntos se destacan para mostrar la pantalla seleccionada Estos conos permiten acceder...

Page 994: ...n IP 2 Seleccione los n meros para cada campo mediante los mandos giratorios situados debajo de la pantalla 3 Presione la opci n GUARDAR para confirmar los cambios realizados Una vez que el panel ide...

Page 995: ...as Bancos de c maras A y B En la parte superior de la pantalla de inicio se visualiza el banco de c maras seleccionado Por ejemplo en caso de estar controlando ocho c maras y querer contar con un m du...

Page 996: ...ntos par metros del panel mediante la flecha Por ejemplo en el primer grupo aparecen los ajustes del protocolo DHCP y la direcci n IP los cuales se describen en el apartado que muestra c mo modificar...

Page 997: ...la derecha o la izquierda para aumentar o disminuir el brillo de las luces respectivamente Controles de los m dulos CCU Los controles correspondientes a cada m dulo est n organizados en tres grupos di...

Page 998: ...ra permite incrementar o disminuir la luminancia general de la imagen Consulte el apartado Control de c maras para obtener m s informaci n al respecto Controles para el objetivo El grupo de controles...

Page 999: ...ormaci n general sobre c mo controlar las c maras El primer paso para poder controlar las c maras es asignar cada una de ellas a un m dulo C mo asignar una c mara a un m dulo CCU En la parte inferior...

Page 1000: ...aplicarlos cuando sea necesario a otra de las unidades Es un proceso muy r pido Para almacenar ajustes predeterminados 1 Presione el bot n STORE de un m dulo CCU Este se encender de color rojo indica...

Page 1001: ...m dulo CCU de manera independiente NOTA Aunque esta funci n es bastante til se aconseja emplearla con precauci n ya que afecta a todas las c maras incluida la que est transmitiendo la se al principal...

Page 1002: ...lver a sincronizarse con el controlador de la unidad CCU a medida que se hacen cambios El proceso es casi imperceptible para el usuario Control absoluto El modo de control absoluto hace que los ajuste...

Page 1003: ...cidad de obturaci n Las flechas situadas junto al indicador SHUTTER permiten modificar la velocidad de obturaci n Presione la flecha hacia arriba o abajo para aumentarla o disminuirla respectivamente...

Page 1004: ...indicador correspondiente se iluminar proporcionando un valor aproximado de la exposici n de la c mara A fin de saber con exactitud el n mero f compruebe el indicador del diafragma Por otro lado la p...

Page 1005: ...continuaci n 1 Mueva la palanca hacia arriba para incrementar el nivel de ganancia hasta el punto m ximo 2 Luego disminuya el ajuste primario girando el mando correspondiente hacia la izquierda hasta...

Page 1006: ...caci n Manteniendo presionado el bot n CALL la luz piloto de la c mara conectada al m dulo CCU parpadear Esta es una manera muy til de llamar la atenci n de los camar grafos o de indicarles que la se...

Page 1007: ...ismo se pueden conectar equipos compatibles con sistemas de se alizaci n por cierre de contacto tales como los monitores Blackmagic SmartView Duo o SmartView HD Es posible conectar hasta ocho unidades...

Page 1008: ...Si el mezclador ATEM se conecta directamente al equipo inform tico o al panel de control sin un conmutador de red seleccione la opci n Configure Address Using Static IP Sugerimos utilizar la direcci n...

Page 1009: ...est configurando una segunda unidad para las entradas 9 16 del mezclador 7 Haga clic en el bot n Apply La luz LED de color blanco situada a la derecha del puerto USB deber a dejar de parpadear permane...

Page 1010: ...consumo masivo tales como iPods y dispositivos de alta fidelidad Conecte equipos de audio de alta fidelidad al mezclador mediante las entradas RCA Los modelos ATEM 4 M E Production Studio 4K y ATEM 2...

Page 1011: ...onexiones de audio para cada fuente o una mesa de mezclas externa a menos que el usuario as lo prefiera El audio se mezcla en la pesta a Audio del programa inform tico y se integra a la se al SDI o HD...

Page 1012: ...rada MADI Los canales MADI 1 a 64 reciben se ales de audio digitales con una profundidad de 24 y una frecuencia de muestreo de 48 kHz Estos se encuentran conectados a otros 64 canales en el mezclador...

Page 1013: ...ida permite transmitir las siguientes se ales Canales 1 10 Canales 3 y 4 de las entradas SDI 1 10 Canal 11 Audio del reproductor multimedia Canal 12 Micr fono externo Canal 13 Entrada TRS para audio a...

Page 1014: ...mo tiempo Conexi n de consolas de audio 1 Conecte la consola de audio compatible con formatos MIDI al equipo inform tico Actualmente la mayor a de las consolas se conectan mediante un cable USB 2 Comp...

Page 1015: ...n la consola y compruebe que los controles del programa reflejen el aumento o disminuci n correspondiente Si es as la consola de audio se ha configurado correctamente Intente mover los reguladores de...

Page 1016: ...lation 8K Conexiones del puerto serial para cables de control Conexiones del puerto RS 422 para cables de control El protocolo RS 422 emplea conectores DE 9 o RJ12 tradicionales Es posible utilizar es...

Page 1017: ...s y encabezados de comandos se encuentran optimizados para sistemas de 32 bits Codificaci n de la se al en el intervalo de supresi n Los grupos de mensajes se codifican en un paquete SMPTE 291M con DI...

Page 1018: ...e valor indica una de las 256 categor as de configuraciones disponibles en el dispositivo Par metro uint8 Este valor indica una de las 256 categor as de configuraciones disponibles en el dispositivo L...

Page 1019: ...ensar un valor nulo Al aplicar un par metro de compensaci n diferente de cero a un valor booleano se invierte dicho valor Se reservan los tipos de operaciones 2 a 127 Los tipos de operaciones 128 al 2...

Page 1020: ...video 2 video extendido 1 8 Nivel de nitidez int8 enum 0 3 0 desactivado 1 bajo 2 medio 3 alto 1 9 Formato de grabaci n int16 0 frecuencia de imagen del archivo frecuencia como n mero entero p ej 24...

Page 1021: ...pacidad de gu as c mara 3 x fixed16 1 opacidad de gu as 0 1 1 0 0 transparente 1 0 opaco 3 3 Gu as reemplaza valores superiores a 1 y 2 en Camera 4 0 int8 0 estilo de gu as 0 desactivado 1 2 4 1 2 2 3...

Page 1022: ...norte 1 sur DD grados dddddddddddd grados decimales 1 longitud _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd en el que el signo s 0 oeste 1 este DD grados dddddddddddd grados decimales Etalonaje 8 0 Ajuste de sombras fix...

Page 1023: ...varias velocidades hacia atr s 0 pausa ve varias velocidades hacia adelante 2 indicadores 1 0 continua 1 1 reproducir todos 1 5 disco1 activo 1 6 disk2 activo 1 7 grabaci n por intervalos 3 ranura 1 s...

Page 1024: ...0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 agrega 15 al brillo de la funci n Cebra 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 selecciona el modo 1080p 23 98 en todas las c maras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 2...

Page 1025: ...rotocolo Los grupos de bits se ordenan comenzando por el bit menos importante LSB Codificaci n de la se al en el intervalo de supresi n Solo es posible enviar un paquete de control por cada cuadro o f...

Page 1026: ...l dispositivo esclavo 3 0 desactivado 1 activado bit 2 3 reservados 0b00 bit 4 estado del indicador para la se al principal seg n el dispositivo esclavo 4 0 desactivado 1 activado bit 4 estado del ind...

Page 1027: ...WW 01 01 FF Arriba derecha 8 x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF Abajo izquierda 8 x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF Abajo derecha 8 x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Detener 8 x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF Posici n absoluta 8x 01...

Page 1028: ...n del software instalado Para comprobar la versi n del programa utilitario instalado en su equipo seleccione la opci n Acerca de ATEM Software Control En Mac ejecute el programa desde la carpeta de a...

Page 1029: ...diales El funcionamiento de este equipo en una zona residencial podr a ocasionar interferencias nocivas en cuyo caso el usuario deber solucionar dicho inconveniente por cuenta propia El funcionamiento...

Page 1030: ...ario Comun quese con nuestro centro de atenci n m s cercano para obtener informaci n al respecto Evite utilizar el equipo a una altura mayor de 2000 metros Declaraci n del Estado de California Las par...

Page 1031: ...ncionamiento provocado por el uso de piezas o repuestos no suministrados por Blackmagic Design o d brindar servicio t cnico a un producto que haya sido modificado o integrado con otros productos cuand...

Page 1032: ...2020 6 ATEM...

Page 1033: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM www blackmagicdesign com cn ATEM USB ATEM ATEM Grant Petty Blackmagic Design...

Page 1034: ...0 1071 1072 1072 1073 1074 1074 1075 1079 1081 1081 ATEM Constellation 8K 1084 Fairlight 1085 6 1086 1088 Fairlight 1091 1092 ATEM 1093 1094 1105 DaVinci Resolve 1110 DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel 1112...

Page 1035: ...7 1197 1198 1199 1200 1205 Tally 1213 GPI and Tally Interface Tally 1213 1216 1216 SDI HDMI 1217 MADI ATEM Constellation 8K 1218 1220 1222 1222 1222 Developer Information 1223 Blackmagic SDI Camera Co...

Page 1036: ...ATEM ATEM Production Studio M E ATEM A B ATEM Production Switcher ATEM Production Switcher ATEM ATEM M E M E M E ATEM ATEM ATEM M E 1036...

Page 1037: ...M E M E ATEM M E PROGRAM PREVIEW CUT AUTO Transition Control MIX DIP WIPE DVE M E ATEM M E ATEM M E Next Transition 1037...

Page 1038: ...ATEM CUT MIX FTB M E Select M E M E A B A B ATEM ATEM A B A B A B A B A B M E PREVIEW PROGRAM M E 1038...

Page 1039: ...9 94 Ultra HD 2160p59 94 8K 4320p59 94 LCD ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Production Studio 4K SD HD Ultra HD 8 SDI HDMI LCD ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K SD HD Ultra HD 10 SDI...

Page 1040: ...M E Production Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K HD Ultra HD 20 SDI 4 Ultra HD 12G SDI BNC 2160p59 94 Ultra HD 6 LCD ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 7 3 ATEM...

Page 1041: ...ATEM HDMI SDI Multi View 8 ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM 1 ATEM Advanced IEC ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel 12v XLR UPS 12 2 3 Switcher Control 1041...

Page 1042: ...168 10 60 IP ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel Mac Blackmagic ATEM ATEM 1 www blackmagicdesign com cn support 2 Blackmagic ATEM Switchers Blackmagic ATEM S...

Page 1043: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP ATEM ATEM Software Control 1043...

Page 1044: ...io Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Broadcast Blackmagic Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP Windows Blackmagic ATEM Software Windows PC ATEM 1 www blackmagicdesign com cn support 2 Blackmagic ATEM Switchers B...

Page 1045: ...e Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Mini Blackmagic Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP ATEM ATEM Switcher 1 Switcher Control ATEM 2 ATEM 3...

Page 1046: ...are Control ATEM ATEM IP Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM IP Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP ATEM 1 Windows Mac 2 IP 192 168 10 50 IP 51 ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM IP IP ATEM IP...

Page 1047: ...Mac IP Windows IP ATEM Software Control NTSC 2160p29 97 1080i59 94 720p59 94 525i59 94 NTSC PAL 1080i50 720p50 625i50 PAL 1047...

Page 1048: ...NTSC 525i59 94 16 9 PAL 625i50 16 9 HDMI HD Ultra HD SDI ATEM Television Studio HD ATEM Television Studio Pro HD ATEM Television Studio Pro 4K 5 8 SDI ATEM Constellation 8K 10 8K 40 HD Ultra HD ATEM...

Page 1049: ...ATEM ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K Input 1 1 HDMI SDI ATEM Advanced 20 Multi View ATEM 10 2 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 13 16 Multi View ATEM 6 9 Ultra HD ATEM 1049...

Page 1050: ...ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 10 13 16 16 HyperDeck ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 4 16 64 ATEM Constellation 8K HyperDeck ATEM 6 8 HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 1050...

Page 1051: ...witcher 1920 x 1080 M E 2 Control Panel HDMI SDI ATEM ATEM 6 8 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM Software Control Panel SDI HDMI HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM ATEM ATEM HyperDeck ATEM ATEM ATEM HDMI HD Ul...

Page 1052: ...320p 4320 x 7680 Ultra HD 2160p 3840 x 2160 1080i 1920 x 1080 HD 720p 1280 x 720 NTSC 720 x 486 PAL 720 x 576 HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDCP HDMI HDCP DVD HDCP Mini Converter Analog to SDI ATEM 1 M E Produc...

Page 1053: ...EM IP ATEM ATEM VPN ATEM Software Control IP IP IP ATEM IP IP DHCP IP DHCP IP IP IP IP IP ATEM IP USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Advanced DHCP IP IP IP IP IP ATEM Software Control ATEM IP IP ATEM Soft...

Page 1054: ...USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup 1 USB Setup Utility 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 IP IP 4 IP 5 ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM System Control IP IP 1054...

Page 1055: ...IP ATEM Advanced IP 1 LCD Connecting IP IP LCD 2 LCD IP 3 LCD IP 4 ATEM Advanced LCD LCD IP IP IP IP IP USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup 1055...

Page 1056: ...IP IP ATEM Advanced LCD 1 HOME LCD 2 3 IP DHCP IP DHCP DHCP DHCP IP DHCP ATEM Advanced IP 192 168 10 60 DHCP IP DHCP IP DHCP 4 IP IP IP 1056...

Page 1057: ...5 6 ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 1 HyperDeck Cut Auto 2 720p 1080i 8K 1057...

Page 1058: ...3 ATEM Constellation 8K Prod Talk 4 Tally Blackmagic Design Tally Cut Auto Tally Tally 5 Tally Call SDI Blackmagic Design Tally 1058...

Page 1059: ...ATEM Blackmagic Design ATEM ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM USB ATEM Advanced Blackmagic ATEM Switcher Mac PC ATEM Advanced ATEM Setup Utility 1059...

Page 1060: ...1 USB USB ATEM Software Utility ATEM ATEM 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 4 ATEM 1 ATEM USB USB Advanced USB ATEM ATEM 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Update Now 4 Advanced ATEM Advanced USB ATEM IP USB 1060...

Page 1061: ...D ATEM SDI HDMI SDI XLR ATEM Production Switcher HDMI SDI Ultra HD HD SD Blackmagic Design H 264 HyperDeck HDMI SDI XLR Multi View SDI HDMI ATEM Multi View HD ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K HD Ultra H...

Page 1062: ...ATEM Constellation 8K SDI SDI M E ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 1 SDI M E 1 M E 2 HD Ultra HD SDI 1 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 4 M E M E 3 M E 4 M E 1 M E 2...

Page 1063: ...ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 40 HD Ultra HD 40 8K 10 10 8K 1 1 1 ATEM Constellation 8K 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 CUT AUTO CUT 4 4 AUTO AUTO LCD DVE 1063 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1064: ...1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET DVE 6 SET MENU LCD AUTO LCD ATEM mp1 mp2 1 2 ATEM Constellation 8K 8K 1 HD Ultra HD 4 LCD 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 MENU 1064 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1065: ...BARS CUT AUTO LCD CUT BUS CUT AUTO Cut Bus LCD Cut Bus 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 SET 5 Cut Bus SET 6 MENU Cut Bus CUT AUTO CUT AUTO Cut Bus CUT AUTO LCD 1065 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1066: ...LCD AUTO LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD SDI LCD 4 1 4 2 LCD 4 3 LCD 1 SET SET 2 LCD ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control 1066 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1067: ...1 DSK 1 MIX 1 1 DSK 1 MIX LCD LCD DSK 1 MIX 1 ATEM FTB FTB LCD FTB 1067 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1068: ...LOCK LOCK LOCK LOCK LCD Prod Talk Eng Talk LOCK LOCK ATEM Constellation 8K LCD LCD ATEM LCD LCD SDI ATEM Constellation 8K 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 7 SET 8 MENU MENU LCD 4 1068 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1069: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Prod Talk Eng Talk 5 XLR Prod Talk Eng Talk ATEM Software Control ATEM Constellation 8K CALL CALL Tally ATEM Constellation 8K 1069 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1070: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1 ATEM Software Control 2 ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1070 ATEM...

Page 1071: ...Blackmagic SDI ATEM Shift 1071 ATEM...

Page 1072: ...hift 1 0 11 20 Control Shift 1 0 11 20 CUT Control CUT Space Return Enter ATEM ATEM ATEM Alpha ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K HD 64 4 Ultra HD 64 4 8K 24 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 64 2 ATEM Product...

Page 1073: ...TEM Constellation 8K 100 8K HD 4K Ultra HD 4 Alpha 1 ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM Software Control SDI HDMI ATEM XLR RCA XLR ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM Production Broadcast Studio...

Page 1074: ...i Resolve ATEM ATEM Camera Control Blackmagic Design Multi View ATEM Advanced Multi View M E 1 Control Panel M E 2 Control Panel Settings Multi View ATEM Production Broadcast Studio 8 ATEM Constellati...

Page 1075: ...Blackmagic HyperDeck IP HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck RS 422 PTZ GVG100 ATEM 1 2 M E1 M E 2 ATEM 1075 ATEM...

Page 1076: ...Cam Cm Blk SUPERSOURCE M E ATEM Shift Bars ME Col1 Shift Col2 MP1 MP2 2 ATEM SHIFT PGM 2 2 M E 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 3 M E 4 1076 ATEM...

Page 1077: ...CUT AUTO RATE AUTO RATE AUTO RATE ATEM Advanced AUTO AUTO ATEM Advanced TRANSITION STYLE MIX DIP WIPE DVE STINGER ATEM Production Studio 4K DVE STINGER PREV TRANS MIX DIP WIPE DVE PREV TRANS 1077 ATEM...

Page 1078: ...Next Transition BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 BKGD ON AIR ON AIR TIE TIE DSK DSK DSK DSK TIE Clean Feed 1 1 ON AIR ON AIR DSK DSK DSK AUTO AUTO Downstream Key RATE DSK AUTO FTB FTB FTB AFV 1078 ATEM...

Page 1079: ...FTB ATEM 1079 ATEM...

Page 1080: ...1 2 ATEM SuperSource M E ATEM SuperSource PIP SuperSource ATEM M E DVE DVE 1 M E ATEM M E 1 ATEM 2 M E 4 M E M E 1 M E ATEM M E 1 ATEM 2 M E 4 M E M E ATEM 1 2 ATEM AFV 1080 ATEM...

Page 1081: ...ast Studio 4K 4 Hyperdeck ATEM 6 8 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDeck USB ATEM Production Switcher ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM 1 M E 2 M E 4 M E EXT SDI HDMI ATEM Productio...

Page 1082: ...AFV Tally Tally Tally EXT Tally Cam4 Cam7 AFV Tally AFV Tally FTB Tally 1082 ATEM...

Page 1083: ...2 M E 4 M E ATEM Cam1 AFV Cam2 AFV Tally Cam4 Cam7 ON Tally Cam3 Cam5 Cam6 Cam8 AFV Tally AFV AFV Tally Tally ON SOLO ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast Studio XLR 1083 ATEM...

Page 1084: ...I AFV AFV FTB XLR XLR XLR ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 5 XLR ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast Studio Monitor XLR ATEM Constellation 8K 1...

Page 1085: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Fairlight ATEM Constellation 8K Fairlight 6 Fairlight Tally 6 1085 ATEM...

Page 1086: ...6 6 6 1 6 1 6 6 6 1086 ATEM...

Page 1087: ...L ML MH H L 30 395Hz 30Hz 395Hz 100Hz 1 48kHz 450Hz 7 91kHz 1 4kHz 21 7kHz 2 3 4 5 1087 ATEM...

Page 1088: ...3 4 5 6 1088 ATEM...

Page 1089: ...Common Dynamics Settings 20dB 20dB 40dB 40dB 15 20dB 1089 ATEM...

Page 1090: ...60dB 1 0 1 1 1 1 10 1 0 5ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 50dB 45dB 0dB 0dB 18dB 60dB 0 5ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 50dB 35dB 0dB 1 0 1 2 0 1 10 1 0 7ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms...

Page 1091: ...50dB 12dB 0dB 0 7ms 0 7ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 35dB XLR 45dB Fairlight Fairlight Fairlight 1 0dB 2 3 EQ 4 EQ 5 EQ EQ 6 1091 ATEM...

Page 1092: ...Fairlight EQ Shift Stinger ATEM PNG TGA BMP GIF JPEG TIFF WAV MP3 AIFF 1092 ATEM...

Page 1093: ...ATEM Photoshop 2 ATEM SHIFT ATEM ATEM Advanced Photoshop 1093 ATEM...

Page 1094: ...HyperDeck ATEM 1094 ATEM...

Page 1095: ...94 1080i59 94 1080i59 94 1080p23 98 1080p23 98 1080p23 98 1080p24 1080p24 1080p24 1080p25 1080p25 1080p25 1080p29 97 1080p29 97 1080p29 97 1080p50 1080p50 1080p50 1080p59 94 1080p59 94 1080p59 94 216...

Page 1096: ...HD ATEM 2160p59 94 Multi View Ultra HD 2160p29 97 Multi View HD 1080i59 94 1080p29 97 1080p59 94 Multi View Multi View HD 59 94 50 Ultra HD Multi View 29 97 25fps HD ATEM Production Studio 4K Ultra HD...

Page 1097: ...R ATEM Constellation 8K XLR MADI BNC SDI HDMI SDI 15 16 ATEM SDI 15 16 SDI 15 16 ATEM Constellation 8K SDI 13 14 15 16 ATEM Talkback Converter 4K ATEM Camera Converter Blackmagic Design SDI 15 16 SDI...

Page 1098: ...onstellation 8K 720p 3200 1080i 1080p 1600 2160p 400 4320p 100 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 720p 3200 1080i 1080p 1440 2160p 360 ATEM 1 M E and 2 M E Production Studio 4K SD 900 720p 360 1080i 180 A...

Page 1099: ...ti View 8 1 8 Multi View 1 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 8K HD Ultra HD 8K 4 7 10 13 16 8 16 ATEM 6 9 Multi View Multi View Tally Multi View Multi View HD 16 9 4 3 SD Multi View Multi View Multi View 1099 A...

Page 1100: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Video Inputs ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K 1 HDMI SDI 1 1 HDMI SDI 1100 ATEM...

Page 1101: ...Names 4 20 ATEM Advanced Set Multi View Advanced Camera 1 CAM1 HyperDeck HyperDeck 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM Software Control HyperDeck IP HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck Blackmagic HyperDeck A...

Page 1102: ...ed VISCA GVG GVG GVG100 RS 422 VISCA GVG ATEM SDI ATEM 1 6 ATEM Constellation 8K Mac ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control Outputs 24 HD Ultra HD 6 8K ATEM A B ATEM M E A B A B ATEM Software Con...

Page 1103: ...ATEM Software Control USB 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 ATEM ATEM Software Control 4 ATEM Software Control XML ATEM Mac Command S Windows Ctrl S XML ATEM Software Control 1103 ATEM...

Page 1104: ...1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 ATEM 4 ATEM USB ATEM Software Control ATEM USB 1104 ATEM...

Page 1105: ...RSA mini URSA Broadcast Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve ATEM ATEM SDI ATEM SDI SDI Blackmagic Studio Camera SFP SDI SDI ATEM SDI SDI 1 Blackmagic SDI ATEM SDI 2 ATEM SDI Multi View SDI Multi View SDI 3 ID...

Page 1106: ...2 ATEM Converter SDI ATEM SDI 3 ATEM SDI Multi View ATEM Converter SDI In Multi View SDI 4 Blackmagic LCD ID Studio Camera 1 ATEM Cam 1 1 Tally ATEM Software Control Tally Blackmagic Tally PGM ATEM S...

Page 1107: ...Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Mini YRGB Lift Gamma Gain Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve YRGB Lift Gamma Gain YRGB Lift Gamma Gain Lift Gamma Gain 1107...

Page 1108: ...Shift Mac command Windows Control Zoom 1108...

Page 1109: ...dB Gain 1109...

Page 1110: ...DaVinci Resolve CCU Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve Lift Gamma Gain 1110...

Page 1111: ...RGB Shift YRGB Lift Gamma Gain YRGB Y ALT Command YRGB Y YRGB RGB DaVinci Resolve YRGB Lift Gain 50 50 180 1111...

Page 1112: ...Lum Mix ATEM Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel ATEM DaVinci Resolve 12 5 5 ATEM Switchers 7 1 ATEM ATEM DaVinci DaVinci Re...

Page 1113: ...Vinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve ATEM Software Control Lift Gamma Gain DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel Y Lift Y Y Gamma Gamma Y Y Gain Y Contrast Highlights Saturation Hue HUE Lum Mix RGB YRGB 11...

Page 1114: ...yperDeck ATEM Advanced ATEM HyperDeck Extreme 8K HDR HyperDeck Extreme Control HyperDeck Blackmagic HyperDeck SDI HDMI ATEM HyperDeck 1 HyperDeck ATEM 2 HyperDeck REM REM HyperDeck HyperDeck Studio Mi...

Page 1115: ...tion 8K SDI ATEM ATEM Broadcast HyperDeck IP ATEM Software Control HyperDeck ATEM Advanced HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDeck IP HyperDeck IP HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck H...

Page 1116: ...yperDeck ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDecks HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck Tally HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDe...

Page 1117: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck SSD 1117 HyperDeck...

Page 1118: ...ck ATEM Advanced HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced LCD HyperDeck SETTINGS ATEM Advanced LCD HYPERDECK LCD HYPERDECK HYPERDECK HyperDeck ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Pa...

Page 1119: ...T HyperDeck HyperDeck 1 SDI 4 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck 1 2 3 4 IP HyperDeck IP ATEM Advanced HyperDeck HyperDeck IP HYPERDECK 3 HYPERDECK HYPERDECK IP IP IP HyperDeck IP HyperDeck IP HYPERDECK HyperDeck...

Page 1120: ...DECK HyperDeck HYPERDECK LCD HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced HyperDeck ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck HYPERDECK HyperDeck HyperDeck HYPERDECK JOG SHUTTLE HyperDeck 1120 Hype...

Page 1121: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck LCD HyperDeck SHIFT HyperDeck JOG SHUTTLE 1121 HyperDeck...

Page 1122: ...M E 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck Transport 1 ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel Transport 3 LCD HyperDeck 1122 Hy...

Page 1123: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM ME ATEM Advanced ATEM ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ME ATEM 4 M E LCD ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ME ATEM 1123 ATEM...

Page 1124: ...anced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K Program Preview Source Names ATEM Source Select Program Preview SHIFT 20 SHIFT Program Preview Clean Feed 1 1 Clean Feed 2 2 Program SH...

Page 1125: ...Preview SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT Program Preview Clean Feed 1 1 Clean Feed 2 2 CUT AUTO LCD LCD LCD AUTO LED 1125 ATEM...

Page 1126: ...AUTO AUTO MIX WIPE DIP DVE STING Stinger LCD ARM PREV TRANS STINGER BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 BKGD BKGD ON AIR ON 1126 ATEM...

Page 1127: ...MACRO LCD Advanced ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel DSK TIE DSK DSK LCD DSK Clean Feed 1 1 DSK DSK CUT DSK DSK DSK DSK DSK AUTO DSK RATE LCD DSK 1127 ATEM...

Page 1128: ...M E ATEM M E M E M E M E LCD M E FTB LCD FTB FTB FTB LCD AFV AFV LCD HOME LCD LCD LCD 1 WIPE 2 LCD 3 1 WIPE 2 LCD 3 HOME PREV TRANS PREV TRANS 1128 ATEM...

Page 1129: ...LCD VISCA DVE VISCA PTZ VISCA PTZ VISCA Inverted ATEM Advanced ATEM Remote RS 422 Serial Out RS 422 ATEM Advanced ATEM ATEM RS 422 RS 422 DB 9 DE 9 RJ11 LCD RS 422 PTZ 1129 ATEM...

Page 1130: ...RS 422 ATEM Remote RS 422 PTZ PTZ LCD VISCA PTZ VISCA 1 VISCA VISCA 2 1 LCD LCD RS 422 ATEM Advanced VISCA PTZ VISCA VISCA 1130 ATEM...

Page 1131: ...SDI PTZ Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera SDI PTZ SDI Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera PTZ Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Design www blackmagicdesign com cn support PTZ PTZ RS 422 DB 9 PTZ ATEM ATEM A...

Page 1132: ...HOME SETTING LCD HOME ATEM ATEM ATEM Advanced M E Advanced LCD ATEM CUT 1132 ATEM...

Page 1133: ...CUT CUT 1 2 CUT CUT AUTO DVE STINGER 1133 ATEM...

Page 1134: ...1 2 3 LCD 4 AUTO RATE AUTO MIX DIP WIPE DVE Stinger DVE AUTO 1134 ATEM...

Page 1135: ...ATEM Advanced 1 2 MIX LCD 3 LCD 4 AUTO MIX LCD ATEM Advanced 1 2 DIP LCD 3 LCD 4 AUTO 1135 ATEM...

Page 1136: ...DIP LCD Rate Dip Source 97 ATEM Advanced 1 2 WIPE LCD 3 4 LCD 5 Select 6 AUTO 1136 ATEM...

Page 1137: ...SHIFT SHIFT Rate Symmetry Advanced Z Position Advanced X Y X Y Reverse Direction 1137 ATEM...

Page 1138: ...idth Softness DVE ATEM DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced DVE 1 2 DVE DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 3 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 4 AUTO DVE DVE Rate DVE DVE DVE Rate DVE Symmetry Advanced Z Position Advanced X Y X Y Normal...

Page 1139: ...DVE Enable key DVE DVE PreMult DVE Clip Gain Inverse Inverse DVE ATEM DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE unavailable DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced 1 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 2 LCD 1139 ATEM...

Page 1140: ...3 Alpha 4 AUTO Rate Set Rate Normal Reverse FlipFlop Fill Source Key Source 25 1140 ATEM...

Page 1141: ...4320p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD 180 DVE 1 2 3 4 LED ATEM 5 1141 ATEM...

Page 1142: ...ATEM Advanced ATEM Advanced 10 1 LCD PROFILES 2 3 4 LCD SAVE 1 LCD PROFILE 2 3 LCD RESTORE 1142 ATEM...

Page 1143: ...1 LCD PROFILES 2 3 CLEAR Empty SAVE 1143 ATEM...

Page 1144: ...vanced ATEM DIP Advanced 50 ATEM ATEM 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 4 ATEM Constellation 8K 4 HD Ultra HD 8K Media Player 1 2 3 4 Media Player 1 Key Media Player 2 Key 2 ATEM SHIFT ATEM Software Co...

Page 1145: ...ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 3 4 mp1 3 mp2 4 mp 1 key mp 2 key 3 4 Alpha 1 2 3 ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced 1 2 LCD 3 4 1145 ATEM...

Page 1146: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced CUT Program 1 CAPS LOCK SHIFT 2 ATEM Advanced 1146 ATEM...

Page 1147: ...CUT CUT CUT 1 2 CUT CUT 1 CAPS LOCK 2 3 ATEM Advanced CUT 1 2 CUT 1147 ATEM...

Page 1148: ...AUTO DVE STINGER AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 AUTO 6 RATE 7 1148 ATEM...

Page 1149: ...1 CAPS LOCK 2 3 4 5 6 RETURN ENTER RATE ATEM Advanced 1 2 3 4 AUTO DIP MIX WIPE RATE AUTO DVE Stinger DVE AUTO 1149 ATEM...

Page 1150: ...1 2 3 4 5 AUTO ATEM Advanced 1 2 DIP MIX MIX Transition 3 LCD Advanced Transition Control Transition Rate 4 AUTO 1150 ATEM...

Page 1151: ...Rate MIX LCD 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUTO 1151 ATEM...

Page 1152: ...ATEM Advanced 1 2 DIP LCD 3 LCD 4 5 AUTO DIP LCD Rate Dip Source 1152 ATEM...

Page 1153: ...1 2 3 4 5 AUTO ATEM Advanced 1 2 WIPE LCD 3 4 LCD 5 AUTO 1153 ATEM...

Page 1154: ...Rate Symmetry Advanced Z Position Advanced X Y X Y Reverse FlipFlop Border Softness ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource HD Ultra HD 4 Stinger 8K 1 ATEM 1 M E 2 M E Stinger Stinger Stinger 1154 ATEM...

Page 1155: ...Stinger Stinger 1 STING 2 3 Stinger 4 5 6 AUTO Stinger Stinger Stinger SOURCE Clip Duration Trigger Point Mix Rate 1 Pre Roll 3 00 Pre Multiplied Key Clip 1155 ATEM...

Page 1156: ...rt Invert Key Key Stinger ATEM Advanced STINGER 1 STING 2 LCD Preroll Trigger Mix Duration 3 Stinger LCD MEDIA PLAYERS 4 HyperDeck Stinger HyperDeck 5 AUTO Stinger SOURCE Clip Duration Trigger Point 1...

Page 1157: ...iplied Key Clip Gain Invert Key trigger mix duration Trigger Mix Rate Duration duration preroll DVE ATEM 1 M E ATEM 2 M E DVE DVE DVE ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 4 DVE 8K 1 DVE DVE 1 2 DVE 3 DVE...

Page 1158: ...DVE ATEM Advanced DVE 1 2 DVE DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 3 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 4 AUTO 1158 ATEM...

Page 1159: ...DVE DVE Rate DVE DVE DVE Rate DVE Normal DVE Reverse DVE DVE FlipFlop DVE Enable key DVE DVE PreMult DVE Gain Inverse DVE ATEM DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE Advanced DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 1159 ATEM...

Page 1160: ...1 DVE DVE DVE DVE 2 DVE DVE 3 4 5 6 AUTO ATEM Advanced 1 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 2 LCD 3 1160 ATEM...

Page 1161: ...Alpha 4 AUTO Rate Set Rate Normal Reverse FlipFlop Fill Source Key Source DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE Advanced DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 25 1161 ATEM...

Page 1162: ...4320p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD 180 DVE ATEM Advanced 1 2 3 4 Advanced 5 ATEM ATEM Advanced 1 2 3 PREV TRANS PREV TRANS 4 5 PREV TRANS 1162 ATEM...

Page 1163: ...M DVE ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K Advanced M E DVE DSK DVE DVE ME 2 DVE ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 12G SDI ATEM Production Studio 4K 6G SDI KEY MASK MP1 MP2 1 2 SD HD Ultra HD Alpha 1163 A...

Page 1164: ...1164 ATEM...

Page 1165: ...Photoshop Alpha ATEM Photoshop Photoshop Alpha ATEM Targa Photoshop ATEM Advanced LUMA KEY 1165 ATEM...

Page 1166: ...1 1 1 M E 1 M E 2 ATEM Advanced 1 1 Key 1 LCD KEYS 2 LCD M E 3 4 5 Mask Pre Mult Clip Gain Invert Key Flying Key DVE 1166 ATEM...

Page 1167: ...1 1 1 2 3 ATEM Advanced 1 1 DSK 1 TIE LCD KEYS 2 DSK1 DSK2 3 LCD 4 1167 ATEM...

Page 1168: ...Color Keying CSO Blackmagic Design DeckLink Intensity HDMI ATEM ATEM Key Cut ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 1168 ATEM...

Page 1169: ...ATEM Advanced 1 1 Key 1 LCD KEYS 2 3 LCD 4 LIFT ATEM Advanced SHIFT RESET SHIFT Hue Gain Y Suppress 1169 ATEM...

Page 1170: ...Lift Lift Narrow Flying Key DVE 1 2 Lift 0 3 6 6 4 5 ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 7 3 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 M E 1...

Page 1171: ...LCD M E 1 ME 1 PVW 4 ATEM Advanced 1 1 Key 1 LCD KEYS 2 3 LCD 4 5 ATEM Advanced Z Advanced LCD 1171 ATEM...

Page 1172: ...M E 1 ATEM Advanced M E 1 ME1 1 MultiView 1172 ATEM...

Page 1173: ...Chroma Correction 1173 ATEM...

Page 1174: ...18 Key Key Cut Cut 1174 ATEM...

Page 1175: ...1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 4 ATEM Advanced Upstream Keyer 1 1 KEY 1 LCD KEY 1 2 KEYERS LCD 3 4 5 1175 ATEM...

Page 1176: ...Size Symmetry Softness Invert Pattern Flying Key DVE X Y DVE DVE 1 2D DVE 3D DVE DVE Key Cut DVE DVE 1176 ATEM...

Page 1177: ...DVE DVE 1 DVE 1 1 M E 1 DVE 2 ME 2 DVE 3 DVE DVE ATEM Advanced 1 DVE 1 KEY 1 2 LCD DVE 3 4 DVE 1177 ATEM...

Page 1178: ...ze Y Y DVE Rotation Rot Rst DVE DVE Rst DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 3D No Bevel 2D Bevel In Out 3D Bevel Out 3D Bevel In 3D DVE Soft Color SHIFT Border Shadow Soft Color Out Width Out Soft Bevel Soft 3D O...

Page 1179: ...Light Angle DVE DVE In Width In Soft Bevel Pos 3D Light Altitude DVE DVE EFFECTS KEYS DSK KEYS DVE DVE ON ON ON 1 ON 2 ON 1 BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 2 3 CUT AUTO 1179 ATEM...

Page 1180: ...KEY 1 KEY 2 1 Key 1 Key 1 ON Next Transition 2 Key 1 ON Key 1 Key 1 Next Transition 3 Key 1 Key 2 ON BKGD Key 1 Key 2 Next Transition 1180 ATEM...

Page 1181: ...4 Key 1 Key 2 Key 2 BKGD Key 2 Next Transition DSK TIE 1 DSK CUT 2 DSK AUTO DSK Rate 3 DSK TIE DSK DSK TIE DSK TIE Tie DSK Clip Gain Rate Inverse Pre Mult 1181 ATEM...

Page 1182: ...be Photoshop CS5 Photoshop ATEM ATEM ATEM Photoshop IP IP 192 168 10 240 IP Photoshop Media Player Photoshop ATEM 8K 7680 x 4320 Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 1080 HD 1920 x 1080 720p HD 1280 x 720 PAL SD 720...

Page 1183: ...ia Pool 1 2 Pre Multiply Alpha Alpha ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Alpha SDI ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM Constellation 8K Advanced ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 24 8K 6 ATEM Production St...

Page 1184: ...ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM 1 System Control HOME AUX 2 1 3 M E SHIFT 4 HOME 1184...

Page 1185: ...Key 2 Alpha Program SDI Preview Preview Multi View Clean Feed 1 Clean Feed 2 1 2 Clean Feed SuperSource ATEM 2 M E SuperSource PIP ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD SuperSource 8K SuperSource ATEM 2...

Page 1186: ...M Home Menu SuperSource Preset Menu SuperSource Box 1 BOX3 BOX1 Box 1 Box 3 2 M E Destination 1 M E Select SuperSource Enable Source Select Destination Position Size Crop Crop Menu Crop Top Bottom Lef...

Page 1187: ...ATEM Ar t Background ATEM Source Select Art Fill Source SuperSource Art Background 1 M E Selet 2 M E Destination Foreground Pre Multiplied Key Pre Multiplied Art Fill Source Art Key Source 1187...

Page 1188: ...ATEM Borders DVE Foreground ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource ATEM SuperSource Copy To SuperSource SuperSource ATEM ATEM SuperSource 1 2 1188...

Page 1189: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control Shift Command M Mac Shift Control M Windows 100 20 ATEM Software Control 1189...

Page 1190: ...3 00 3 00 3 00 ATEM Software Control ATEM 3 1 2 3 ATEM 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 1 4 5 ATEM Software Control 1190...

Page 1191: ...6 7 1 8 9 3 00 3 10 AUTO 1 11 2 5 0 2 5 3 3 2 5 12 BLACK AUTO ATEM 13 Transitions 14 1191...

Page 1192: ...ATEM 1 3 2 3 ATEM ATEM Software Control 1192...

Page 1193: ...1 2 3 4 Blackmagic Studio Camera DVE 1193...

Page 1194: ...20 Macros 20 1194...

Page 1195: ...ware Control ATEM Advanced ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM Software Control Transitions 6 1 MACRO LCD 2 LCD 6 3 LCD LCD 4 Shift Color Bars 5 Shift Color 1 10...

Page 1196: ...8 AUTO 1 9 10 2 LCD 2 11 SHIFT Black MIX AUTO ATEM 12 ATEM Advanced 6 Macro 6 ATEM Software Control Macro 6 LCD ATEM Advanced ATEM 1 2 2 2 1196...

Page 1197: ...nel 4 CCU Blackmagic Design CCU 4 CCU Blackmagic Design CCU ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design URSA Broadcast URSA Mini Pro 4 6K URSA Mini Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio Cam...

Page 1198: ...ATEM Camera Control Panel ATEM ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM ATEM CCU LCD 1198 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1199: ...ATEM IP IP DHCP IP DHCP IP IP IP SETTINGS LCD CCU LCD SETTINGS LCD SETTINGS DHCP IP 1 IP ON DHCP IP IP 2 IP DHCP OFF Panel IP Address IP 3 IP 4 5 SAVE CHANGES 1199 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1200: ...IP IP IP IP IP IP 1 Switcher IP Address IP 2 LCD 3 SAVE CHANGES SDI CCU CCU LCD CCU 1200 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1201: ...LCD HOME ATEM A B LCD BANK 8 CCU 1 4 CCU A 5 8 CCU B BANK A B CCU CCU A B 1201 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1202: ...LCD BANK OFF CCU CCU BANK CCU 1 CCU 1 SETTING DHCP IP ATEM Auxiliary Select LCD ATEM 1 None ATEM Constellation 8K 1202 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1203: ...Master Black ON OFF Brightness LED LCD CCU CCU SCENE FILE CCU SHUTTER MASTER GAIN W B BARS REL ABS CCU 1203 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1204: ...WHITE RGB BLACK RGB BLACK FLARE RGB RGB Y GAIN 1204 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1205: ...CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU LCD LCD LCD CCU 1205 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1206: ...CCU CCU SCENE FILE 5 1 CCU STORE 2 CCU 1206 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1207: ...RECALL ALL CCU 1 SCENE FILE 1 2 LCD RECALL ALL 3 4 CCU 1 CCU 1 CCU ND CC Blackmagic Design ISO MASTER GAIN MASTER GAIN 1207 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1208: ...ON REL ABS f2 8 ATEM Software Control f5 6 f2 8 f5 6 f5 6 ATEM Software Control CCU f2 8 ATEM Software Control f5 6 f2 8 f2 8 1208 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1209: ...W B SHUTTER W B SHUTTER BARS SHUTTER 50 1 50 SHUTTER Blackmagic SmartScope 4K BLACK FLARE BLACK FLARE RGB 1209 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1210: ...D EXT EXT CCU f 1210 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1211: ...f CCU PREVIEW Auxiliary Output ATEM Software Control SENS COARSE 1 2 f4 0 f8 0 1 2 f4 0 3 4 f8 0 1211...

Page 1212: ...IRIS MB ACTIVE IRIS MB ACTIVE Settings Master Black AUTO IRIS CALL CCU Tally PANEL ACTIVE CCU CCU ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design CCU 1212...

Page 1213: ...tView HD GPI and Tally Interface 8 Tally 1 M E ATEM GPI and Tally Interface 20 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 M E Production Studio 4K 3 GPI and Tally Interface GPI 5V 14mA Tally 30V 1A Tally ATEM 2...

Page 1214: ...ally 16 Tally Blackmagic ATEM Setup GPI and Tally Interface ATEM GPI and Tally Interface USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup 1 GPI and Tally Interface ATEM 2 GPI and Tally Interface USB 3 Blackmagic ATEM Setup...

Page 1215: ...192 168 10 240 IP 6 Set Outputs Switcher Inputs 1 8 1 8 ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher GPI and Tally Interface Tally 9 16 7 Save USB LED ATEM GPI and Tally Interface 8 Blackmagic ATEM Setup USB GPI an...

Page 1216: ...ATEM XLR TRS TRS 1 4 XLR TRS ATEM RCA RCA HiFi iPod RCA HiFi ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR XLR SMPTE ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR 1216...

Page 1217: ...SDI HDMI ATEM HDMI SDI SDI HDMI ATEM Software Control Audio SDI HDMI ATEM XLR 1 4 XLR TRS ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR 1217...

Page 1218: ...I MADI MADI ATEM Constellation 8K MADI BNC 75 100 MADI BNC ATEM Constellation 8K 1 4 TRS MADI MADI 1 64 48kHz 24bit 64 EQ 64 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI 1 8K MADI 1 1 10 SDI 1 10 1 2 11 12 13 TRS 14 PG...

Page 1219: ...MADI 2 8K MADI 2 1 10 SDI 1 10 3 4 11 12 13 TRS 14 PGM HD Ultra HD MADI 2 1 30 SDI 1 30 3 4 31 32 PGM 1219...

Page 1220: ...Mac MIDI MIDI MIDI Windows 3 ATEM Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Behringer BCF 2000 Mackie Control Mapping for Cakewalk Sonar 3 MCSo AFV ON...

Page 1221: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM 1221...

Page 1222: ...rod TX Prod RX Prod RX Prod TX Eng RX Eng RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ATEM Constellation 8K RJ45 RS 422 RS 422 DE 9 RJ12 PTZ RS 422 DE 9 RJ12 8 3 2 7 1 4 6 9 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RS 422 PTZ TX TX GND GND RX RX 1...

Page 1223: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 1224: ...meter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for paramete...

Page 1225: ...128 through 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and opera...

Page 1226: ...values from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate...

Page 1227: ...4 3 2 2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4 0...

Page 1228: ...e _ _ BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd d...

Page 1229: ...ause ve multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage medi...

Page 1230: ...02710 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 s...

Page 1231: ...ugh the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they ar...

Page 1232: ...s 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on...

Page 1233: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF RelativeP...

Page 1234: ...n www blackmagicdesign com cn support Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design ATEM About ATEM Software Control Mac ATEM Software Control About ATEM Software Control Windows ATEM Software Control Help Abou...

Page 1235: ...D 201602001 MSIP REM BMD 201602001 R REM BMD 201805002 MSIP REM BMD PStudio4K R REM BMD 201803001 MSIP REM BMD 201410016 R REM BMD 201804001 KCC REM BMD ATEMCameraConv MSIP REM BMD 201602002 KCC REM B...

Page 1236: ...40 C Blackmagic Design 2000 www P65Warnings ca gov IT 1236...

Page 1237: ...3 Blackmagic Design 4 BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN Copyright 2020 Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design DeckLink HDLink Wo...

Page 1238: ...2020 6 ATEM...

Page 1239: ...ATEM TV TV ATEM ATEM ATEM Production Switcher ATEM ATEM www blackmagicdesign com kr ATEM USB ATEM ATEM Blackmagic Design CEO...

Page 1240: ...l 1276 1276 1277 1278 1278 1279 1280 1280 1281 1285 1287 1287 ATEM Constellation 8K 1290 Fairlight 1291 6 1292 1294 Fairlight 1297 Media 1298 ATEM 1299 1300 1311 DaVinci Resolve 1316 DaVinci Resolve M...

Page 1241: ...401 ATEM Camera Control Panel 1403 1405 1406 1411 1419 GPI 1419 1422 1422 SDI HDMI 1423 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI 1424 1425 1428 Developer Information 1429 Blackmagic SDI Camera Control Protocol 1429...

Page 1242: ...ATEM ATEM Production Studio ATEM M E Mix Effects ATEM A B A B ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM M E M E mix effect M E ATEM ATEM ATEM M E 1242...

Page 1243: ...M E M E ATEM M E CUT AUTO DVE M E ATEM M E Background Video ATEM M E 1243...

Page 1244: ...FTB M E M E M E A B A B ATEM Software Control A B A B A B A B A B M E M E M E 1244...

Page 1245: ...1080p59 94 UHD 2160p59 94 8K 4320p59 94 LCD ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Production Studio 4K SD HD UHD SDI HDMI 8 LCD ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K SD HD UHD SDI HDMI 10 In...

Page 1246: ...M 2 M E Production Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K HD UHD 20 SDI 4 UHD BNC 2160p59 94 UHD 12G SDI 6 LCD ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 7 3 ATEM 4 M E Broad...

Page 1247: ...ATEM HDMI TV SDI 8 2 ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM 1 ATEM Advanced Panel IEC ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel 12V XLR UPS 2 3 Switcher Control 1247...

Page 1248: ...ed Panel IP 192 168 10 60 IP IP ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel Mac OS Blackmagic ATEM Software ATEM 1 www blackmagicdesign com kr support 2 Blackmagic AT...

Page 1249: ...3 Continue Agree Install 4 ATEM ATEM ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP ATEM ATEM Software Control 1249...

Page 1250: ...Micro Studio Camera URSA Broadcast Blackmagic Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP Blackmagic ATEM Switcher Windows Blackmagic ATEM Software Windows PC ATEM 1 www blackmagicdesign com kr 2 Blackmagic ATEM Swi...

Page 1251: ...magic ATEM Setup ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Mini Blackmagic Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP Blackmagic ATEM Switcher ATEM Switcher Software 1 Switcher Control...

Page 1252: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM IP Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM IP IP ATEM 1 Windows Mac OS 2 IP 192 168 10 50 IP 51 ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM IP IP ATEM IP 192 168 10...

Page 1253: ...Mac OS IP Windows IP ATEM Software Control 2160p29 97 1080i59 94 720p59 94 525i59 94 NTSC PAL 1080i50 720p50 625i50 PAL 1253...

Page 1254: ...9 SD NTSC 525i59 94 16 9 PAL 625i50 16 9 HDMI HD UHD XLR 5 8 ATEM Television Studio HD ATEM Television Studio Pro HD ATEM Television Studio Pro 4K SDI 5 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 8K 10 HD UHD 40 ATEM 1...

Page 1255: ...ATEM ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K 1 HDMI SDI 20 Advanced Panel 4 ATEM ATEM 10 2 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 13 16 ATEM 6 9 UHD ATEM 1255...

Page 1256: ...ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 10 13 16 16 Hyper Deck ATEM Constellation 8K HD UHD 4 16 64 ATEM Constellation 8K HyperDeck ATEM 6 8 ATEM 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 1256...

Page 1257: ...ion Switcher 1920 x 1080 M E 2 Control Panel HDMI SDI ATEM ATEM 6 8 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM HyperDeck SDI HDMI HyperDeck ATEM ATEM ATEM HyperDeck ATEM ATEM ATEM HDMI HD UHD HD UHD ATEM SDI...

Page 1258: ...4320 x 7680 UHD 2160p 3840 x 2160 1080i 1920 x 1080 HD 720p 1280 x 720 NTSC 720 x 486 PAL 720 x 576 HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDCP HDMI HDCP DVD HDCP Mini Converter Analog to SDI ATEM 1 M E Production Swit...

Page 1259: ...TEM Software Control Panel IP IP IP ATEM IP IP DHCP TCP IP IP DHCP IP IP IP IP IP IP USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM IP ATEM Advanced Panel DHCP IP IP IP IP IP ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Contr...

Page 1260: ...USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup 1 USB 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 IP Confiture IP 4 IP 5 ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup Configure ATEM IP IP IP IP 1260...

Page 1261: ...IP ATEM Advanced Panel IP 1 LCD IP IP LCD 2 LCD Switcher IP Address 3 LCD IP 4 save changes ATEM Advanced Panel LCD IP IP IP IP IP USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup 1261...

Page 1262: ...Switcher IP Address ATEM Advanced Panel LCD 1 HOME LCD 2 3 IP DHCP IP DHCP ON DHCP OFF DHCP IP DHCP ATEM Advanced Panel IP 192 168 10 60 DHCP IP DHCP IP IP DHCP ON 1262...

Page 1263: ...4 IP IP IP 5 6 save changes save changes ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 1 HyperDeck CUT AUTO 2 720p 1080i 8K 1263...

Page 1264: ...3 ATEM Constellation 8K Lock to Talk Press to Talk PROD TALK 4 Blackmagic Design CUT AUTO 5 CALL SDI Blackmagic Design 1264...

Page 1265: ...ATEM Blackmagic Design ATEM ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Software USB ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel Blackmagic ATEM Switcher Mac PC ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Setup 1265...

Page 1266: ...USB USB ATEM ATEM 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Update 4 ATEM 1 USB ATEM USB USB ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Update 4 ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel USB ATEM IP U...

Page 1267: ...SDI SDI UHD HD SD ATEM SDI HDMI SDI XLR ATEM Production Switcher HDMI SDI UHD HD SD Blackmagic Design H 264 Encoder HyperDeck HDMI SDI XLR SDI HDMI HD UHD ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K HD UHD 8K ATE...

Page 1268: ...M Constellation 8K Aux SDI SDI SDI M E ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 1 SDI M E 1 2 HD UHD SDI Mix Effects 1 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 3 M E 4 M E 1 M E 2...

Page 1269: ...ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 40 40 HD UHD 10 8K 10 8K 1 1 1 ATEM Constellation 8K 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 CUT AUTO 4 4 AUTO 1269 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1270: ...LCD 4 Mix Dip Wipe DVE 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET DVE 6 SET LCD AUTO LCD MP1 MP2 Media Player 1 Media Player 2 ATEM Constellation 8K 8K HD UHD 4 LCD 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 1270 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1271: ...BARS LCD LCD 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 SET 5 SET 6 1271 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1272: ...LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD LCD SDI LCD 4 1 4 2 LCD 4 3 LCD 1272 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1273: ...1 SET 2 LCD ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control 1 DSK 1 MIX 1 ON OFF 1 DSK 1 MIX ON OFF LCD LCD DSK 1 MIX 1 ON OFF ATEM FTB FTB LCD 1273 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1274: ...FTB LOCK LOCK LOCK LCD PROD TALK ENG TALK LOCK 1 LOCK 2 ATEM Constellation 8K LCD LCD LCD ATEM LCD SDI LCD ATEM Constellation 8K 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 7 SET 8 MENU 1274 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1275: ...MENU LCD 4 ATEM Constellation 8K PROD TALK ENG TALK 5 XLR PROD TALK ENG TALK ATEM Software Control ATEM Constellation 8K CALL ATEM Constellation 8K 1275 ATEM Constellation 8K...

Page 1276: ...e Control ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1 ATEM Software Control Preferences 2 ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1276 ATEM Softw...

Page 1277: ...Blackmagic SDI ATEM 4 1277 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1278: ...UT Control Shift 1 0 Input 11 20 Control 1 0 Input 1 10 CUT CUT Space CUT Return Enter AUTO ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K HD 64 4 UHD 64 4 8K 24 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 64 2 ATEM...

Page 1279: ...M E Broadcast Studio 64 2 ATEM Constellation 8K 100 8K HD 4K UHD 4 Media Player 1 ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM HDMI SDI OB ATEM ATEM Software Control SDI HDMI ATEM XLR RCA XLR 1279 ATEM Software C...

Page 1280: ...TEM Production Studio 4K ATEM ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM 1 8 1 Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve ATEM Software Control ATEM Camera Control Blackmagic Design ATEM Advanced Panel 1280 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1281: ...M Constellation 8K 4 7 10 13 16 Blackmagic HyperDeck IP Auto Roll HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck Remote RS 422 PTZ GVG100 ATEM Software Control M E Mix Effects Mix Effects M E Mix Effects 1 Mix Ef...

Page 1282: ...TS Input BLACK SUPERSOURCE 1 M E ATEM SHIFT Bar BARS 1 M E COLOR 1 SHIFT Color 2 MEDIA 1 2 ATEM Shift Preview Program PGM 2 2 M E Mix Effects 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 3 M E 4 1282 ATEM Sof...

Page 1283: ...CUT CUT AUTO AUTO AUTO ATEM Advanced Panel AUTO AUTO ATEM Advanced Panel DVE ATEM Production Studio 4K DVE PREV TRANS PREV TRANS DVE PREV TRANS 1283 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1284: ...BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 BKGD ON AIR ON AIR DSK TIE TIE DSK DSK DSK DSK 1 ON AIR ON AIR DSK DSK DSK AUTO AUTO DSK DSK AUTO FTB FTB FTB AFV 1284 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1285: ...ATEM 1285 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1286: ...2 ATEM SUPERSOURCE 1 M E ATEM SuperSource Picture in Picture PIP SuperSource PIP ATEM M E 4 DVE DVE M E 1 ATEM M E 1 ATEM 2 M E 4 M E M E 1 2 ATEM AFV Audio Follow Video AFV 1286 ATEM Software Contro...

Page 1287: ...4 Hyperdeck ATEM 6 8 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDeck USB ATEM ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM 1M E ATEM2 M E Production Switcher ATEM 1 M E 2 M E 4 M E SDI HDMI ATEM Produc...

Page 1288: ...AFV EXT Cam4 Cam7 Cam4 Cam7 AFV AFV AFV FTB 1288 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1289: ...2 M E 4 M E ATEM Cam1 ON AFV Cam2 AFV Cam4 Cam7 ON Cam3 Cam5 Cam6 Cam8 ON AFV ON ON AFV AFV AFV Audio follow video ON SOLO ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast Studio XLR 1289 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1290: ...SDI HDMI AFV AFV Fade to Black Audio out Monitor Audio AFV ON XLR XLR ON DIM DIM DIM ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 5 XLR 1290 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1291: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Fairlight ATEM Constellation 8K 6 Fairlight Fairlight 1291 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1292: ...6 6 6 6 1 6 1 6 6 6 1292 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1293: ...L 30 395 Hz 30 Hz 395 Hz 100 Hz 1 48 kHz 450 Hz 7 91 kHz 1 4 kHz 21 7 kHz 2 3 4 5 1293 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1294: ...ON OFF 6 3 4 5 6 1294 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1295: ...Threshold 20dB 20dB 40dB 40dB Range Ratio Attack Hold Release 1295 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1296: ...15 20 dB 8 dB 50dB 45dB 0dB 0dB 18dB 60dB 1 0 1 1 85 1 1 0 0 5ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 50dB 45dB 0dB 0dB 18dB 60dB 0 5ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 1296 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1297: ...50dB 35dB 0dB 1 0 1 2 0 1 1 0 0 7ms 1 4ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 50dB 12dB 0dB 0 7ms 0 7ms 30ms 0 0ms 0 0ms 4s 50ms 93ms 4s 35dB XLR 45dB Fairlight Fairlight 1 0dB 2 1 3 4 5 6 1297 ATEM Sof...

Page 1298: ...Fairlight Media Preview shift 1298 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1299: ...ATEM PNG TGA BMP GIF JPEG TIFF WAV MP3 AIFF ATEM Photoshop ATEM Shift Preview Program ATEM Media Player Media ATEM Advanced Panel Photoshop 1299 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1300: ...HyperDeck ATEM ATEM 1300 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1301: ...1080p29 97 1080p29 97 1080p29 97 1080p50 1080p50 1080p50 1080p59 94 1080p59 94 1080p59 94 2160p23 98 2160p23 98 2160p23 98 2160p24 2160p24 2160p24 2160p25 2160p25 2160p25 2160p29 97 2160p29 97 2160p2...

Page 1302: ...HD SDI HD SDI HD 1080i HD SDI HD SD ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2160p59 94 UHD 1080p29 97 2160p50 1080p25 ATEM 1 M E 2 M E production Switcher HD HD SDI SD 720p50 1080i50 625i50 PAL 720p59 94 1080...

Page 1303: ...DI HD Monitor audio SDI 15 16 ATEM SDI 15 16 SDI 15 16 ATEM Constellation 8K 13 14 15 16 SDI ATEM Talkback Converter 4K ATEM Camera Converter Blackmagic Design SDI 15 16 SDI TRS RCA to TRS RCA TRS TRS...

Page 1304: ...EM Constellation 8K 720p 320 1080i 1080p 1600 2160p 400 4320p 100 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 720p 320 1080i 1080p 1440 2160p 360 ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K SD 900 720p 360 1080i 180 ATEM Came...

Page 1305: ...8 1 8 1 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 8K 4 HD UHD 8K 4 7 10 13 16 8 16 ATEM 6 9 On Off On Off HD 16 9 4 3 SD 4 1305 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1306: ...ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K HDMI SDI 1 Input 1 1 HDMI SDI 1306 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1307: ...ATEM Advanced Panel Camera 1 CAM1 HyperDeck HyperDeck 4 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM Software Control HyperDeck IP HyperDeck On Off ATEM Blackmagic HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck RS 422 Remote VIS...

Page 1308: ...22 VISCA GVC SDI ATEM 1 6 ATEM Constellation 8K Mac OS ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control Outputs 24 HD UHD 6 8K ATEM A B M E A B A B Direct ATEM Software Control 1308 ATEM Software Cont...

Page 1309: ...Software Control USB 1 3 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 ATEM ATEM Software Control 4 ATEM Software Control XML ATEM Media Pool Mac Command S Windows Ctrl S XML ATEM Software Control 1309 ATEM Software Co...

Page 1310: ...1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 ATEM 4 ATEM USB ATEM Software Control ATEM USB 1310 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1311: ...ro Studio Camera URSA Mini URSA Broadcast Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve ATEM SDI ATEM SDI SDI Blackmagic Studio Camera SFP SDI SDI ATEM Camera Control SDI 1 Blackmagic SDI ATEM SDI 2 ATEM SDI SDI SDI 3 I...

Page 1312: ...udio Camera ATEM SFP 2 ATEM SDI ATEM 3 ATEM SDI ATEM Converter SDI SDI 4 Blackmagic LCD 1 ATEM CAM 1 1 ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Studio Camera PGM Blackmagic Studio Camera ATEM Studio Converter...

Page 1313: ...Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Mini On Air YRGB Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve YRGB YRGB 1313...

Page 1314: ...Mac COMMAND Windows CONTROL T W 1314...

Page 1315: ...db 1315...

Page 1316: ...DaVinci Resolve CCU Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve Shift RGB Shift 1316...

Page 1317: ...YRGB YRGB ALT Command Y YRGB Y Lum Mix YRGB Y RGB DaVinci Resolve YRGB 50 50 180 Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve 1980 1317...

Page 1318: ...l DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve 12 5 5 ATEM 7 1 ATEM DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel 1 DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel USB C ATEM Software Control 2 C...

Page 1319: ...DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel Y Lift Y Y Gamma Y Y Gain Y Contrast Highlights Saturation Hue RGB YRGB 1319...

Page 1320: ...Deck ATEM Adavanced Panel ATEM HyperDeck Extreme 8K HDR HyperDeck Extreme Control HyperDeck Blackmagic HyperDeck SDI HDMI ATEM HyperDeck 1 HyperDeck ATEM 2 HyperDeck REM REM HyperDeck HyperDeck Studio...

Page 1321: ...TEM Software Control ATEM HyperDeck IP ATEM Software Control HyperDeck ATEM Adavanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Software Control HyperDeck 4 HyperDeck IP HyperDeck IP HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDec...

Page 1322: ...k HyperDeck HyperDeck 5 HyperDeck ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck Hyper...

Page 1323: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck 1323 HyperDeck...

Page 1324: ...LED HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel LCD HyperDeck SETTINGS ATEM Advanced Panel LCD 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck LCD HyperDeck ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel HyperDe...

Page 1325: ...HyperDeck 1 SDI 4 Camera 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck 1 2 3 4 IP HyperDeck IP ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck IP HyperDeck HyperDeck 3 HyperDeck IP IP IP HyperDeck IP IP HyperDeck IP HyperDeck Hyper...

Page 1326: ...erDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck LCD On HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 1326 Hyper...

Page 1327: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck LCD HyperDeck SHIFT HyperDeck 1327 HyperDeck...

Page 1328: ...M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck SETTINGS HyperDeck TRANSPORT 1 ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel TRANSPORT 3 LCD HyperDeck 132...

Page 1329: ...ATEM ATEM M E ATEM ATEM Adavanced Panel ATEM ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel M E M E ATEM M E 4 M E LCD ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel M E M E ATEM M E 1329 A...

Page 1330: ...ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel ATEM Constellation 8K M E 4 ATEM M E SHIFT 20 SHIFT 1 2 PROGRAM SHIFT SHIFT 1330 ATEM...

Page 1331: ...PREVIEW SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT shift SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT 1 2 CUT CUT AUTO AUTO LCD LCD 1331 ATEM...

Page 1332: ...AUTO LED AUTO AUTO LED DVE STING LCD ARM PREV TRANS PREV TRANS BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 BKGD BKGD 1332 ATEM...

Page 1333: ...ON ON MACRO MACRO 10 10 LCD ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel DSK DSK TIE TIE DSK DSK LCD DSK 1 DSK CUT ON AIR DSK DSK DSK DSK AUTO AUTO DSK DSK 1333 ATEM...

Page 1334: ...M E ATEM M E M E M E LCD M E FTB FTB FTB FTB LCD AFV ON FTB AFV OFF LCD 4 HOME LCD LCD LCD 1 WIPE 2 LCD 3 1 WIPE 2 LCD 3 HOME PREV TRANS PREV TRANS LCD VISCA 1334 ATEM...

Page 1335: ...3 DVE VISCA PTZ VISCA PTZ VISCA ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM REMOTE RS 422 SERIAL OUT ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM RS 422 RS 422 DB 9 DE 9 RJ12 ATEM LCD RS 422 PTZ RS 422 1335 ATEM...

Page 1336: ...ATEM 1 M E 2 M E REMOTE RS 422 PTZ PTZ LCD VISCA PTZ CAMERA CONTROL VISCA 1 VISCA VISCA 2 LCD Camera 1 LCD RS 422 ATEM Broadcast Panel VISCA PTZ CAMERA CONTROL VISCA VISCA 1336 ATEM...

Page 1337: ...Z SDI PTZ Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera SDI PTZ SDI Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera PTZ Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Design www blackmagicdesign com kr support PTZ PTZ DB 9 RS 422 PTZ ATEM ATEM...

Page 1338: ...LCD ATEM ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel M E ATEM Advanced Panel LCD ATEM CUT 1338 ATEM...

Page 1339: ...CUT CUT CUT 1 2 CUT CUT AUTO DVE 1339 ATEM...

Page 1340: ...1 2 3 LCD 4 AUTO AUTO DVE DVE 1340 ATEM...

Page 1341: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 MIX LCD 3 LCD 4 MIX LCD DIP ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 LCD 3 LCD 4 1341 ATEM...

Page 1342: ...DIP LCD ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 WIPE LCD 3 4 LCD 5 6 1342 ATEM...

Page 1343: ...SHIFT SHIFT ATEM Advanced Panel Z ATEM Advanced Panel X Y X Y 1343 ATEM...

Page 1344: ...DVE ATEM DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel DVE 1 2 DVE DVE DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 3 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 4 DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel Z ATEM Advanced Panel X Y X Y 1344 ATEM...

Page 1345: ...DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 2 LCD 1345 ATEM...

Page 1346: ...3 ON 4 AUTO 25 1346 ATEM...

Page 1347: ...4320p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD SD 180 DVE 1 2 TRANSITION STYLE 3 4 LED ATEM Software Control 5 1347 ATEM...

Page 1348: ...ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Advanced Panel 10 1 LCD Profiles 2 3 4 LCD 1 LCD Profiles 2 3 LCD Restore 1348 ATEM...

Page 1349: ...1 LCD Profiles 2 3 Clear Empty 1349 ATEM...

Page 1350: ...ATEM ATEM SDI HDMI 8 ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel 50 ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K HD UHD 8K 1 2 3 4 1 2 1350 ATEM...

Page 1351: ...ATEM shift ATEM Software Control 3 4 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K MP1 3 MP2 4 MP 1 KEY MP 2 KEY 3 4 1 2 3 ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel 1 MEDIA PLAYER 2 LCD 3 4 1351 ATEM...

Page 1352: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel CUT 1 caps lock shift 2 ATEM Advanced Panel 1352 ATEM...

Page 1353: ...CUT CUT OFF ON ON OFF CUT 1 2 CUT 1 caps lock 2 3 ATEM Advanced Panel CUT 1 2 CUT 1353 ATEM...

Page 1354: ...AUTO AUTO DVE 1 2 3 4 5 AUTO 6 7 1354 ATEM...

Page 1355: ...1 caps lock 2 3 4 5 6 return enter ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 4 AUTO AUTO 1355 ATEM...

Page 1356: ...DVE DVE 1 2 3 4 5 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP MIX MIX 3 LCD ATEM Advanced Panel 4 1356 ATEM...

Page 1357: ...MIX LCD 1 2 3 4 5 6 1357 ATEM...

Page 1358: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP LCD 3 LCD 4 5 DIP LCD 1358 ATEM...

Page 1359: ...1 2 WIPE 3 4 5 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 WIPE LCD 1359 ATEM...

Page 1360: ...3 4 LCD 5 ATEM Advanced Panel Z ATEM Advanced Panel X Y X Y ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource HD UHD 4 8K ATEM 1 M E 2 M E 1360 ATEM...

Page 1361: ...1 STING 2 3 4 5 6 1 3 1361 ATEM...

Page 1362: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 STING 2 LCD 3 LCD MEDIIA PLAYERS 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 5 1362 ATEM...

Page 1363: ...1 3 DVE ATEM 1 M E 2 M E DVE DVE DVE ATEM Constellation 8K HD UHD DVE 8K DVE DVE DVE 1 2 DVE 3 DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 1363 ATEM...

Page 1364: ...4 DVE ATEM Advanced Panel DVE 1 2 DVE DVE DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 3 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE 4 AUTO 1364 ATEM...

Page 1365: ...DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 1365 ATEM...

Page 1366: ...1 DVE DVE DVE DVE 2 DVE DVE 3 Effect 4 5 6 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 DVE LCD DVE DVE DVE DVE 2 LCD 3 1366 ATEM...

Page 1367: ...ON 4 DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 25 1367 ATEM...

Page 1368: ...20p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD SD 180 DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 4 ATEM Advanced Panel 5 ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 PREV TRANS PREV TRANS 4 5 PREV TRANS 1368 AT...

Page 1369: ...M DVE ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel 4 M E DVE DSK DVE DVE M E 2 DVE ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 12G SDI ATEM Production Studio 4K 6G SDI KEY MASK 1 2 Aux SD HD UHD 1369 AT...

Page 1370: ...1370 ATEM...

Page 1371: ...Photoshop ATEM Photoshop Photoshop ATEM Targa Photoshop ATEM ATEM Advanced Panel 1371 ATEM...

Page 1372: ...1 1 1 M E 1 2 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 LCD KEYERS 2 LCD M E 3 4 5 On Off DVE 1372 ATEM...

Page 1373: ...1 1 1 2 3 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 DSK 1 TIE LCD KEYERS 2 DSK 1 DSK 2 3 LCD 4 1373 ATEM...

Page 1374: ...HDMI Blackmagic Design DeckLink Intensity ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 1374 ATEM...

Page 1375: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 1 LCD 2 3 LCD 4 Y Suppress ATEM Advanced Panel SHIFT RESET SHIFT Y Suppress 1375 ATEM...

Page 1376: ...0 DVE 1 2 0 3 6 4 5 Y Suppress ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 7 3 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 M E 1 1376 ATEM...

Page 1377: ...ME 1 PVW LCD M E 1 4 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 1 LCD 2 3 LCD 4 Chroma Adjustments 5 ATEM Advanced Panel Z ATEM Advanced Panel LCD Preview Chroma 1377 ATEM...

Page 1378: ...M E 1 ATEM Advanced Panel Chroma Adjustments M E 1 ME 1 KEY MASK 1 MultiView 1378 ATEM...

Page 1379: ...1379 ATEM...

Page 1380: ...18 1380 ATEM...

Page 1381: ...1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 4 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 1 KEY 1 LCD KEY 1 2 LCD 3 4 5 1381 ATEM...

Page 1382: ...DVE X Y DVE DVE 3D 1 2D DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 1382 ATEM...

Page 1383: ...DVE DVE 1 DVE 1 1 M E 1 DVE 2 ME 2 DVE 3 DVE DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 DVE 1 KEY 1 2 LCD DVE 3 4 DVE 1383 ATEM...

Page 1384: ...RESET DVE X DVE Y DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE DVE 3D 2D 3D 3D 3D DVE SHIFT 3D 1384 ATEM...

Page 1385: ...DVE 3D DVE EFFECTS KEYS DSK KEYS DVE DVE Next Transition ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 1 KEY ON ON OFF 2 ON ON OFF Next Transition ON OFF 1 BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 1385 ATEM...

Page 1386: ...2 3 CUT AUTO ON OFF KEY 1 KEY 2 1 KEY 1 ON KEY 1 2 KEY 1 ON KEY 1 KEY 1 KEY 1 OFF 3 KEY 1 KEY 2 ON KEY 1 KEY 2 BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 1386 ATEM...

Page 1387: ...4 KEY 1 KEY 2 BKGD KEY 2 KEY 2 OFF On Off On Off DSK TIE ON OFF 1 DSK CUT ON OFF 2 DSK AUTO DSK 3 DSK TIE On Off DSK TIE DSK TIE Tie DSK On Off ON OFF 1387 ATEM...

Page 1388: ...dobe Photoshop Photoshop Photoshop Photoshop ATEM CS5 Photoshop ATEM ATEM ATEM IP IP 192 168 10 240 Photoshop Photoshop ATEM 8K 7680 x 4320 UHD 3840 x 2160 1080 HD 1920 x 1080 720p HD 1280 x 720 PAL S...

Page 1389: ...raphics ATEM Switcher ATEM Photoshop ATEM Switcher Media Pool 1 2 Pre Multiply Alpha ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel SDI ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Advaced Panel AT...

Page 1390: ...ATEM Production Studio 4K LCD AUX LCD Mac OS Windows ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM AUX 1 AUX 2 Auxiliary 1 3 M E SHIFT 4 HOME 1390...

Page 1391: ...ayer 1 1 RGB Media Player 1 Key 1 Media Player 2 2 RGB Media Player 2 Key 2 Program SDI Preview Clean Feed 1 Clean Feed 2 1 2 SuperSource ATEM 2 M E SuperSource Picture in Picture PIP ATEM Constellati...

Page 1392: ...Control Panel GUI SuperSource SuperSource SuperSource SuperSource GUI SuperSource ATEM SuperSource GUI SuperSource 4 GUI X Y 2 4 SuperSource Preset Menu SuperSource box 1 box 1 box 3 2 M E Destination...

Page 1393: ...Enable on off Crop Menu GUI ATEM GUI ATEM Panel SuperSource 1 M E 2 M E 1393...

Page 1394: ...GUI ATEM DVE ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource GUI ATEM SuperSource GUI SuperSource ATEM Switcher SuperSource GUI ATEM SuperSource Box 1 Box 2 1394...

Page 1395: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control Shift Command M Mac Shift Control M Windows 100 20 ATEM Software Control 1395...

Page 1396: ...3 3 3 ATEM Software Control ATEM 1 3 2 3 ATEM 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 1 4 5 ATEM Software Control 1396...

Page 1397: ...6 BARS 7 COL1 8 9 3 3 10 AUTO 1 11 2 5 0 2 5 3 3 2 5 12 BLK AUTO ATEM 13 14 1397...

Page 1398: ...ATEM 1 3 2 3 ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1398...

Page 1399: ...1 2 3 4 Blackmagic Studio Camera DVE 1399...

Page 1400: ...20 20 1400...

Page 1401: ...ced Panel ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM Software Control 6 1 LCD 2 LCD 6 3 LCD LCD 4 SHIFT Color Bars 5 SHIFT COL...

Page 1402: ...6 WIPE 7 LCD 2 00 8 AUTO Color 1 9 MACRO 10 2 LCD 2 11 SHIFT BLK MIX AUOT ATEM 12 MACRO ATEM Advanced Panel 6 6 ATEM Software Control 6 LCD ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM 2 Color 1 2 2 1402...

Page 1403: ...U 4 Blackmagic Design CCU 4 CCU 4 Blackmagic Design 4 CCU ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design URSA Broadcast URSA Mini Pro 4 6K URSA Mini and Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio C...

Page 1404: ...ATEM Camera Control Panel ATEM ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM ATEM CCU LCD 1404 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1405: ...ATEM IP IP DHCP IP DHCP IP IP IP LCD CCU LCD LCD DHCP IP 1 IP ON DHCP IP IP 2 IP DHCP OFF IP 3 IP 1405 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1406: ...4 5 IP IP IP IP IP IP 1 IP 2 LCD 3 SDI CCU CCU LCD CCU 1406 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1407: ...LCD ATEM A B LCD 8 CCU A CCU 1 4 B CCU 5 8 A B CCU CCU A B 1407 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1408: ...LCD CCU 4 CCU 2 CCU 1 CCU 1 DHCP IP ATEM LCD ATEM AUX 1 ATEM Constellation 8K 1408 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1409: ...ON OFF LED LCD CCU CCU SCENE FILE CCU REL ABS CCU 1409 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1410: ...WHITE RGB BLACK FLARE RGB BLACK FLARE RGB RGB Y 1410 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1411: ...CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU CCU LCD LCD LCD CCU 1411 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1412: ...CCU CCU 5 1 CCU STORE 2 CCU 1412 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1413: ...CCU 1 1 2 LCD 3 4 CCU 1 1 CCU ND CC Blackmagic Design ISO 1413 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1414: ...ON f2 8 ATEM Software Control f5 6 f2 8 f5 6 f5 6 ATEM Software Control CCU f2 8 ATEM Software Control f5 6 f2 8 f2 8 1414 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1415: ...W B W B BARS 50 1 50 Blackmagic SmartScope 4K 1415 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1416: ...RGB D EXT EXT CCU F 1416 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1417: ...F CCU ATEM Software Control 1 2 f4 0 f8 0 1 2 f4 0 3 4 f8 0 1417 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1418: ...IRIS MB ACTIVE IRIS MB ACTIVE MASTER BLACK auto iris CALL PANEL ACTIVE CCU CCU ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design CCU 1418 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1419: ...SmartView HD GPI and Tally Interface 8 ATEM 1 M E GPI and Tally Interface ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 M E Production Studio 4K 20 GPI and Tally Interface GPI and Tally Interface GPI 5V 14mA 30V...

Page 1420: ...Tally 16 Blackmagic ATEM Setup GPI and Tally Interface ATEM USB GPI and Tally Interface ATEM Setup 1 GPI and Tally Interface ATEM 2 GPI and Tally Interface USB 3 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 4 ATEM ATEM Adva...

Page 1421: ...ATEM IP 192 168 10 240 6 GPI and Tally Interface ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher 9 16 Set tally outputs Switcher Inputs 1 8 7 Apply USB LED ATEM GPI and Tally Interface 8 Blackmagic ATEM Setup USB GPI...

Page 1422: ...ATEM XLR TRS TRS 1 4 XLR TRS RCA ATEM RCA HiFi iPod RCA HiFi ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR XLR SMPTE ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR 1422...

Page 1423: ...SDI HDMI ATEM HDMI SDI SDI HDMI ATEM Software Control Audio SDI HDMI ATEM XLR 1 4 XLR TRS ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR 1423...

Page 1424: ...Digital Interface MADI ATEM Constellation 8K MADI BNC 100m 75 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI BNC 1 4 TRS MADI In MADI 1 64 48 kHz 24 64 EQ 64 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI Out 1 8K MADI Out 1 1 10 SDI 1 10 1...

Page 1425: ...MADI Out 2 8K MADI Out 2 1 10 SDI 1 10 3 4 11 12 13 TRS 14 PGM HD UHD MADI Out 2 1 30 SDI 1 30 3 4 31 32 PGM TV ATEM ATEM 1425...

Page 1426: ...1 MIDI Mac PC USB 2 MIDI Mac Audio MIDI Setup Window Show MIDI Window MIDI 3 ATEM Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Behringer BCF 2000 Mackie Control Mapping f...

Page 1427: ...4 ATEM Software Control MIDI ATEM Software Control ATEM ATEM ATEM ON ON ATEM ATEM 1427...

Page 1428: ...ROD TX PROD RX PROD RX PROD TX ENG RX ENG RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ATEM Constellation 8K RJ45 RS 422 RS 422 DE 9 RJ12 PTZ RS 422 DE 9 RJ12 8 3 2 7 1 4 6 9 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RS 422 PTZ TX TX GND GND RX RX 1...

Page 1429: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 1430: ...meter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for paramete...

Page 1431: ...128 through 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and opera...

Page 1432: ...values from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate...

Page 1433: ...4 3 2 2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4 0...

Page 1434: ...e _ _ BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd d...

Page 1435: ...ause ve multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage medi...

Page 1436: ...02710 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 s...

Page 1437: ...ugh the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they ar...

Page 1438: ...s 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on...

Page 1439: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF RelativeP...

Page 1440: ...ww blackmagicdesign com kr support Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design About ATEM Software Control ATEM Mac ATEM Software Control About Blackmagic Camera Windows ATEM Software Control About ATEM Black...

Page 1441: ...D 201602001 MSIP REM BMD 201602001 R REM BMD 201805002 MSIP REM BMD PStudio4K R REM BMD 201803001 MSIP REM BMD 201410016 R REM BMD 201804001 KCC REM BMD ATEMCameraConv MSIP REM BMD 201602002 KCC REM B...

Page 1442: ...40 C Blackmagic Design Use only at altitudes not more than 2000m above sea level www P65Warnings ca gov IT 1442...

Page 1443: ...ic Design d BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC Copyright 2020 Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design DeckLink HDLink Workgroup Videohub M...

Page 1444: ...2020 ATEM...

Page 1445: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM ATEM www blackmagicdesign com ru ATEM USB Blackmagic Design...

Page 1446: ...480 1480 1481 CALL 1481 ATEM Software Control 1482 1482 1483 1484 1484 1485 1486 1487 1487 1491 1493 1493 ATEM Constellation 8K 1496 Fairlight 1497 1498 1500 Fairlight 1503 1504 ATEM 1505 1506 1517 Da...

Page 1447: ...1595 1601 1601 ATEM Software Control 1601 ATEM Advanced Panel 1607 ATEM Camera Control Panel 1609 1609 1610 1611 1612 1617 1625 GPI and Tally Interface 1625 1628 1628 SDI HDMI 1629 MADI ATEM Constella...

Page 1448: ...ATEM ATEM Production Studio M E ATEM A B ATEM Ethernet ATEM M E M E ATEM M E 1448...

Page 1449: ...M E ATEM M E CUT AUTO M E Program ATEM M E M E 1449...

Page 1450: ...DSK TIE CUT MIX FTB M E Select Select A B A B A B Transition Control A B A B CUT AUTO M E Preview Program M E 1450...

Page 1451: ...HD 8K HD 1080p 59 94 Ultra HD 2160p 59 94 8K 4320p 59 94 ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Production Studio 4K SD HD Ultra HD SDI HDMI ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K SD HD Ultra...

Page 1452: ...roduction Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K SD HD Ultra HD 20 SDI Ultra HD 12G SDI Ultra HD 2160p 59 94 BNC ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 7 3 ATEM 4 M E Bro...

Page 1453: ...HDMI SDI MULTIVIEW ATEM 1 ATEM IEC ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel XLR 12 UPS 2 Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet 3 Ethernet Switcher Control Ethernet 1453...

Page 1454: ...68 10 240 192 168 10 60 ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel Blackmagic ATEM ATEM 1 www blackmagicdesign com ru support 2 Blackmagic ATEM Switchers 3 Continue...

Page 1455: ...up Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP ATEM ATEM Software Control Mac Blackmagic ATEM Switchers Blackmagic ATEM Switchers ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Studio Camer...

Page 1456: ...nt to allow the following program to install software on this computer Yes 4 Found new hardware Install automatically Desktop Video Your new hardware is ready for use 5 Start Programs Blackmagic Desig...

Page 1457: ...Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP IP 1 Ethernet Switcher Control ATEM Ethernet 2 3 ATEM Software Control IP ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control A B M E A B 1457...

Page 1458: ...EM Software Control ATEM IP Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP 1 Windows Mac Ethernet 2 IP 192 168 10 50 IP 51 Apply ATEM Software Control IP ATEM 192 168 10 240 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 1...

Page 1459: ...IP Mac IP Windows ATEM Software Control 2160p 29 97 1080i 59 94 720p 59 94 525i 59 94 NTSC NTSC 1080i 50 720p 50 625i 50 PAL PAL 1459...

Page 1460: ...phic 16 9 525i 59 94 16 9 NTSC 625i 50 16 9 PAL HDMI HD Ultra HD SDI ATEM Television Studio HD ATEM Television Studio Pro HD ATEM Television Studio Pro 4K SDI 5 8 ATEM Constellation 8K 8K 40 HD Ultra...

Page 1461: ...Input 1 ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K HDMI SDI 4 20 ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 13 16 ATEM 6 9 Ultra HD 1461...

Page 1462: ...ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 10 13 16 HyperDeck HD Ultra HD 16 64 ATEM Constellation 8K HyperDeck ATEM 6 8 HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 1462...

Page 1463: ...oduction Switcher 1920 x 1080 HDMI SDI ATEM 6 8 ATEM Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM SDI HDMI Ethernet HyperDeck ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM HyperDeck ATEM ATEM ATEM HDMI HD Ultra HD SDI Blackmag...

Page 1464: ...I 4320p 4320 x 7680 Ultra HD 2160p 3840 x 2160 1080i 1920 x 1080 HD 720p 1280 x 720 NTSC 720 x 486 PAL 720 x 576 HDMI HDMI HDMI HDCP HDMI HDCP DVD Mini Converter Analog to SDI ATEM 1 M E Production Sw...

Page 1465: ...ernet IP Ethernet ATEM VPN Ethernet IP ATEM Software Control IP IP ATEM IP IP DHCP IP DHCP IP IP IP IP ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup USB ATEM DHCP Static IP IP IP IP ATEM Software Control IP ATEM IP ATEM...

Page 1466: ...c ATEM Setup USB 1 USB ATEM ATEM Setup 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Configure IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Cancel ATEM Setup 4 IP Save 5 ATEM Configure Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM NETWRK SETUP Ethern...

Page 1467: ...IP IP ATEM Advanced Panel 1 IP 2 IP 3 IP 4 ATEM Advanced Panel IP IP IP IP IP USB Blackmagic ATEM Setup 1467...

Page 1468: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 HOME 2 3 IP DHCP DHCP ON DHCP OFF IP ATEM Advanced Panel IP 192 168 10 60 IP DHCP DHCP IP DHCP 1468...

Page 1469: ...4 IP IP 5 6 ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 1 HyperDeck CUT AUTO 2 720p 1080i 8K 1469...

Page 1470: ...3 ATEM Constellation 8K 4 Blackmagic Design CUT AUTO 5 CALL Blackmagic Design SDI 1470...

Page 1471: ...ATEM Blackmagic Design ATEM ATEM Blackmagic ATEM Setup Blackmagic ATEM Setup ATEM ATEM USB Ethernet Blackmagic ATEM Blackmagic ATEM ATEM ATEM Setup Utility 1471...

Page 1472: ...1 USB Ethernet USB ATEM ATEM Setup Utility 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Update 4 1 USB Ethernet USB ATEM ATEM Setup Utility 2 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 3 Update 4 Ethernet ATEM Ethernet USB ATEM IP USB 1472...

Page 1473: ...1 Output 2 Ultra HD 24 12G SD 4320p 24 Quad Link SDI SDI Ultra HD HD SD ATEM SDI SDI HDMI XLR ATEM Production Switcher HDMI SDI Ultra HD HD SD ATEM Blackmagic Design H 264 Encoder HyperDeck SDI HDMI...

Page 1474: ...ction Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K SDI ATEM Constellation 8K SDI Preview SDI M E ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K SDI M E 1 M E 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio...

Page 1475: ...TEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K LOCK 40 HD Ultra HD 10 8K Quad Link 1 1 Program Preview ATEM Constellation 8K 1 4 Program Preview 1 4 1 4 2 CUT AUTO CUT 4 AUTO AUTO 1475 ATEMConstellation 8...

Page 1476: ...MIX WIPE DIP DVE 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET DVE 6 SET MENU AUTO MP1 MP2 1 2 ATEM Constellation 8K 8 HD Ultra HD 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 MENU CUT AUTO 1476 ATEMConstellation 8K...

Page 1477: ...CUT AUTO 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 SET 5 SET 6 MENU CUT AUTO CUT AUTO 1477 ATEMConstellation 8K...

Page 1478: ...SDI 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 1478 ATEMConstellation 8K...

Page 1479: ...1 SET 2 ATEM Constellation 8K Software Control DSK 1 MIX DSK 1 MIX ATEM Software Control DSK 1 MIX FTB ATEM FTB FTB 1479 ATEMConstellation 8K...

Page 1480: ...FTB LOCK LOCK LOCK PROD TALK ENG TALK LOCK LOCK ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control SDI ATEM Constellation 8K 1 MENU 2 3 SET 4 5 SET 6 7 SET 8 MENU 1480 ATEMConstellation 8K...

Page 1481: ...MENU ATEM Constellation 8K PROD TALK ENG TALK 5 XLR ATEM Constellation 8K TALKBACK CALL CALL tally ATEM Constellation 8K 1481 ATEMConstellation 8K...

Page 1482: ...e Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1 ATEM Software Control Preferences 2 Change ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1482 ATEM Sof...

Page 1483: ...Blackmagic SDI ATEM SHIFT 1483 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1484: ...11 20 Shift 0 20 Control 1 0 1 10 Control 1 0 1 10 CUT Control Shift 1 0 11 20 Control Shift 1 0 11 20 CUT Control CUT Space CUT Return Enter AUTO ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K HD 64 4 Ultra HD 64 4 8K...

Page 1485: ...tudio 4K 64 2 ATEM Production Studio 4K 20 2 ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 32 2 ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 32 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 64 ATEM Constellation 8K 100 8 HD 4K Ultra HD 1 ATEM 148...

Page 1486: ...MI XLR RCA XLR ATEM ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM Production Studio 4K CCU DaVinci Resolve Primary Color Corrector Blackmagic 1 8 1 ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control Blackmagic Design 1486...

Page 1487: ...Control Panel ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K 4 7 10 13 16 ATEM Blackmagic HyperDeck IP HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck RS 422 GVG100 ATEM Software Control M E M E Mix Effects Mix Effects 1 Mix Effects...

Page 1488: ...M E INPUTS BLACK SUPERSOURCE SHIFT BARS BARS COLOR 1 COLOR 2 COLOR 1 SHIFT MEDIA 1 2 ATEM Shift Preview Program PGM 2 ATEM 2 M E ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K M E 3 M E 4 1488 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1489: ...UT CUT AUTO RATE AUTO Rate AUTO ATEM Advanced Panel AUTO AUTO ATEM Advanced Panel Transition Style mix wipe dip DVE ATEM Production Studio 4K Transitions PREV TRANS PREV TRANS 1489 ATEM Software Contr...

Page 1490: ...on BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 Transition Control BKGD Program Preview ON AIR ON AIR TIE TIE DSK Rate Transition Control 1 ON AIR ON AIR AUTO AUTO DSK RATE FTB FTB FTB Fade to Black AFV 1490 ATEM Sof...

Page 1491: ...ATEM 1491 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1492: ...Color Generator 1 2 ATEM SuperSource ATEM SuperSource PIP SuperSource Upstream Key M E M E 1 ATEM 2 M E ATEM 4 M E M E Downstream Keys ATEM Pre Multiplied Key FTB AFV 1492 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1493: ...oadcast Studio 4K Hyperdeck ATEM 6 8 Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio HyperDeck Capture USB ATEM Production Switcher ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM 1 M E 2 M E 4 M E SDI HDMI XLR ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast...

Page 1494: ...AFV EXT Cam4 Cam7 AFV AFV FTB 1494 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1495: ...SOLO MONITOR ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Cam1 ON AFV Cam2 AFV Cam4 Cam7 ON Cam3 Cam5 Cam6 Cam8 ON AFV AFV AFV AFV ON SOLO ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast Studio XLR 1495 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1496: ...SDI HDMI AFV FTB XLR DIM DIM ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K 5 XLR ATEM Production Studio ATEM Broadcast Studio XLR ATEM Constellation 8K 1496 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1497: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Fairlight ATEM Constellation 8K Fairlight Fairlight 1497 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1498: ...1 6 1498 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1499: ...30 395 30 395 100 1 48 450 7 91 1 4 21 7 Q 2 3 4 5 Q 1499 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1500: ...3 4 5 1500 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1501: ...20 40 1501 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1502: ...15 20 8 50 45 0 0 18 60 1 0 1 1 1 1 10 1 0 5 1 4 30 0 0 0 0 4 50 93 4 50 45 0 0 18 60 0 5 1 4 30 0 0 0 0 4 50 93 4 1502 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1503: ...50 35 0 1 0 1 2 0 1 10 1 0 7 1 4 30 0 0 0 0 4 50 93 4 50 12 0 0 7 0 7 30 0 0 0 0 4 50 93 4 35 XLR 45 Fairlight Fairlight 1 0 2 3 4 5 6 1503 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1504: ...Fairlight Shift 1504 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1505: ...ATEM PNG TGA BMP GIF JPEG TIFF WAV MP3 AIFF ATEM c Photoshop ATEM SHIFT ATEM ATEM Photoshop 1505 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1506: ...Multi View HyperDeck 1506 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1507: ...80p 25 1080p 25 1080p 29 97 1080p 29 97 1080p 29 97 1080p 50 1080p 50 1080p 50 1080p 59 94 1080p 59 94 1080p 59 94 2160p 23 98 2160p 23 98 2160p 23 98 2160p 24 2160p 24 2160p 24 2160p 25 2160p 25 2160...

Page 1508: ...5 Ultra HD HD SDI ATEM Production Studio 4K HD 1080i HD SDI HD SD HD SD ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2160p 59 94 Ultra HD 1080p 29 97 2160p 50 1080p 25 ATEM 1 M E ATEM 2 M E HD SD SDI 720p 50 1080i...

Page 1509: ...SDI XLR ATEM Constellation 8K MADI BNC SDI HDMI 15 16 SDI 15 16 SDI 15 16 ATEM Constellation 8K 13 14 15 16 SDI Blackmagic Design ATEM Talkback Converter 4K ATEM Camera Converter 15 16 SDI TRS RCA RC...

Page 1510: ...onstellation 8K 720p 3200 1080i 1080p 1600 2160p 400 4320p 100 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 720p 3600 1080i 1080p 1440 2160p 360 ATEM 1 M E 2 M E Production Studio 4K SD 3600 720p 360 1080i 180 ATEM...

Page 1511: ...Multi View Multi View 1 8 1 8 ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 8K 4 7 10 13 16 HD 16 9 4 3 SD 1511 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1512: ...ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM HDMI SDI ATEM 1 M E Production Studio 4K 1 HDMI SDI Input 1 1 HDMI SDI 1512 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1513: ...ATEM 20 Camera 1 Cam 1 HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio ATEM Software Control IP HyperDeck Blackmagic HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck RS 422 VISCA GVG100 1513 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1514: ...RS 422 ATEM SDI ATEM ATEM Constellation 8K Mac ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control HD Ultra HD 24 8K ATEM A B ATEM A B Direct ATEM Software Control 1514 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1515: ...ATEM Software Control USB 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 ATEM ATEM Software Control 4 ATEM Software Control XML Command S Mac CTRL S Windows XML 1515 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1516: ...1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 4 ATEM USB USB ATEM Software Control ATEM USB ATEM 1516 ATEM Software Control...

Page 1517: ...Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Mini ATEM DaVinci Resolve Blackmagic SDI SDI ATEM SDI Blackmagic Studio Camera SFP ATEM Software Control SDI 1 SDI Blackmagic SDI 2 SDI ATEM SDI SDI 3 ID 1 Cam 5 ATEM...

Page 1518: ...Blackmagic Studio Camera SFP SMPTE 2 SDI ATEM Converter SDI 3 SDI ATEM SDI In ATEM Converter SDI 4 Camera Number 1 Cam 1 ATEM Camera Number 1 ATEM Software Control Blackmagic PGM Blackmagic Studio AT...

Page 1519: ...Blackmagic Studio Camera Micro Studio Camera URSA Mini YRGB Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve YRGB YRGB Paste to all 1519...

Page 1520: ...Shift Command Mac Control Windows 1520...

Page 1521: ...dB 1521...

Page 1522: ...DaVinci Resolve Blackmagic DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve DaVinci Resolve RGB Shift 1522...

Page 1523: ...YRGB YRGB Y ALT Command YRGB YRGB RGB 50 50 180 1523...

Page 1524: ...00 RGB Lum Mix RGB YRGB Blackmagic ATEM DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve 12 5 5 ATEM 7 1 DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel 1 DaVinci Resolv...

Page 1525: ...DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel DaVinci Resolve ATEM Software Control DaVinci Resolve Micro Panel Y Lift Y Gamma Y Gain Contrast Highlights Saturation Hue Hue Lum Mix RGB YRGB 1525...

Page 1526: ...trol System Control ATEM HyperDeck Extreme 8K HDR HyperDeck Extreme Control HyperDeck Blackmagic HyperDeck ATEM SDI HDMI Ethernet 1 Ethernet HyperDeck ATEM 2 REM HyperDeck HyperDeck Studio Mini 3 Hype...

Page 1527: ...reme 8K HDR ATEM Constellation 8K Quad Link SDI HyperDeck IP HyperDeck ATEM Software Control System Control ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Software Control IP HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck Ethernet IP...

Page 1528: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Software Control HyperDeck HyperDecks HyperDeck HyperDeck 1528 HyperDeck...

Page 1529: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck 1529 HyperDeck...

Page 1530: ...eck HyperDeck HyperDeck System Control HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel SETTINGS ATEM Advanced Panel HYPERDECK HYPERDECK HyperDeck ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2...

Page 1531: ...HyperDeck 1 SDI In 4 Camera 4 HyperDeck 1 2 3 4 IP HyperDeck IP ATEM Advanced Panel Ethernet IP HyperDeck 3 HYPERDECK IP IP IP IP HyperDeck 1531 HyperDeck...

Page 1532: ...HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM Advanced Panel HyperDeck ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel MEDIA PLAYERS HYPERDECK HYPERDECK 1532 HyperDeck...

Page 1533: ...SHIFT HyperDeck 1533 HyperDeck...

Page 1534: ...M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDeck HyperDeck ATEM 2 M E 4 M E Advanced Panel SETTINGS HyperDeck 1 3 ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel HyperDe...

Page 1535: ...Ethernet ATEM Software Control M E ATEM ATEM ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel M E M E ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 2 M E Advanced Panel M E 1535...

Page 1536: ...ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel ATEM 4 M E Advanced Panel M E ATEM Constellation 8K M E M E PROGRAM PREVIEW SHIFT 20 SHIFT PROGRAM 1 2 Program SHIFT 1536...

Page 1537: ...Preview SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT PROGRAM PREVIEW PREVIEW SHIFT PROGRAM MACRO 1 2 CUT CUT AUTO AUTO 1537...

Page 1538: ...AUTO AUTO AUTO MIX WIPE DIP DVE STING ARM PREV TRANS PREV TRANS BKGD KEY 1 KEY 2 KEY 3 KEY 4 BKGD BKGD PROGRAM PREVIEW 1538...

Page 1539: ...ON AIR ON AIR ON MACRO MACRO 10 ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel DSK TIE DSK TIE Transition Control 1 DSK CUT DSK CUT DSK AUTO DSK AUTO 1539...

Page 1540: ...M E M E M E FTB FTB FTB AFV AFV HOME 1 WIPE 2 3 1 WIPE 2 3 HOME PREV TRANS PREV TRANS VISCA 1540...

Page 1541: ...VISCA VISCA PTZ CAMERA CONTROL VISCA ATEM Advanced Panel RS 422 REMOTE RS 422 Serial Out ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Ethernet RS 422 RS 422 DB 9 DE 9 RJ12 1541...

Page 1542: ...RS 422 PTZ RS 422 RS 422 Remote ATEM PTZ PTZ VISCA VISCA 1 VISCA 2 1 RS 422 ATEM Advanced Panel VISCA CAMERA CONTROL VISCA 1542...

Page 1543: ...CA SDI SDI Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera SDI SDI Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Design www blackmagicdesign com ru support PTZ PTZ PTZ RS 422 DB 9 ATEM ATEM SETTIN...

Page 1544: ...PREVIEW PROGRAM HOME SETTINGS HOME ATEM Advanced Panel M E CUT CUT Program 1544...

Page 1545: ...CUT ON OFF CUT 1 2 CUT Transition Control CUT AUTO DIP MIX WIPE 1545...

Page 1546: ...1 2 TRANSITION STYLE Transition Control 3 4 AUTO Transition Control AUTO Transition Control DIP MIX WIPE MIX 1546...

Page 1547: ...Advanced Panel 1 2 MIX 3 4 MIX DIP ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP 3 4 1547...

Page 1548: ...DIP Advanced Panel 1 2 WIPE 3 4 5 6 1548...

Page 1549: ...SHIFT SHIFT Z X Y X Y 1549...

Page 1550: ...DVE ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DVE 3 4 AUTO DVE Transition Control Z X Y X Y 1550...

Page 1551: ...PreMult ATEM DVE unavailable Advanced Panel 1 DVE 1551...

Page 1552: ...2 3 Pre Multiplied Key 4 AUTO SET 25 1552...

Page 1553: ...4320p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD 180 1 2 3 4 ATEM Software Control 5 1553...

Page 1554: ...ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1554...

Page 1555: ...1 2 3 1555...

Page 1556: ...M 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD 8K Media Player 1 Media Player 2 Media Player 3 Media Player 4 Media Player 1 Key Media Player 2 Key ATEM Media Player 3 Media Player 4 AT...

Page 1557: ...yer 3 Media Player 4 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K MP1 Media Player 3 MP2 Media Player 4 Media Player 3 Key Media Player 4 Key MP1 KEY MP2 KEY 1 2 3 ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 4...

Page 1558: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel CUT CUT Transition Control Program ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control 1 caps lock shift 2 Program ATEM Advanced Panel 1558 ATEM...

Page 1559: ...CUT CUT 1 2 CUT Cut 1 caps lock 2 3 CUT Advanced Panel 1 2 CUT Transition Control 1559 ATEM...

Page 1560: ...AUTO AUTO 1 2 3 4 5 AUTO 6 7 1560 ATEM...

Page 1561: ...1 caps lock 2 3 4 5 6 return enter ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 3 4 AUTO DIP MIX WIPE 1561 ATEM...

Page 1562: ...AUTO Transition Control MIX 1 2 3 4 5 Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP MIX MIX 3 4 1562 ATEM...

Page 1563: ...MIX DIP 1 2 3 4 5 6 1563 ATEM...

Page 1564: ...ATEM Advanced Panel 1 2 DIP 3 4 Select 5 DIP 1564 ATEM...

Page 1565: ...1 2 3 4 5 Advanced Panel 1 2 WIPE 3 1565 ATEM...

Page 1566: ...4 5 Z X Y X Y ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource HD Ultra HD 8K ATEM 1 M E 2 M E 1566 ATEM...

Page 1567: ...1 STING 2 3 4 5 6 1 frame 1 3 00 Pre Multiplied Key 1567 ATEM...

Page 1568: ...Advanced Panel 1 STING 2 3 MEDIA PLAYERS 4 HyperDeck HyperDeck 5 1568 ATEM...

Page 1569: ...1 frame 1 3 00 Pre Multiplied Key ATEM 1 2 M E ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD DVE 8K 1 2 DVE 3 DVE DVE DVE 4 1569 ATEM...

Page 1570: ...Advanced Panel 1 2 DVE 3 4 AUTO DVE Transition Control 1570 ATEM...

Page 1571: ...PreMult ATEM DVE 1571 ATEM...

Page 1572: ...1 DVE DVE 2 DVE DVE 3 4 5 6 Advanced Panel 1 DVE 2 3 1572 ATEM...

Page 1573: ...Pre Multiplied Key 4 AUTO SET DVE 25 1573 ATEM...

Page 1574: ...4320p 4320p 1920 2160p 2160p 960 1080i 1080i 480 720p 720p 320 SD 180 1 2 3 4 5 ATEM 1 2 3 PREV TRANS PREV TRANS 4 5 PREV TRANS 1574 ATEM...

Page 1575: ...ATEM ATEM ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K Select M E DSK M E 2 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 12G SDI ATEM Production Studio 4K 6G SDI KEY MASK 1 2 SD HD Ultra HD 1575 ATEM...

Page 1576: ...Background Fill Background Fill Key 1576 ATEM...

Page 1577: ...Pre Multiplied Key Photoshop ATEM Photoshop Photoshop ATEM Targa pre multiplied Photoshop 1577 ATEM...

Page 1578: ...1 1 1 M E 1 2 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 KEY 1 KEYERS 2 M E 3 4 5 Pre Multiplied Key 1578 ATEM...

Page 1579: ...1 1 1 2 3 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 DSK 1 TIE KEYERS 2 DSK 1 DSK 2 1579 ATEM...

Page 1580: ...3 4 HDMI ATEM Blackmagic Design DeckLink Intensity Background Fill Key Cut ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 1580 ATEM...

Page 1581: ...1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 KEY 1 KEYERS 2 3 4 ATEM Advanced Panel SHIFT RESET SHIFT 1581 ATEM...

Page 1582: ...1 2 0 3 4 5 ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 7 3 1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 1582 ATEM...

Page 1583: ...M E 1 M E 1 ME 1 PVW 4 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 KEY 1 KEYERS 2 3 4 5 ATEM Advanced Panel Z 1583 ATEM...

Page 1584: ...M E 1 ATEM Advanced Panel M E 1 ME 1 KEY MASK 1 MultiView 1584 ATEM...

Page 1585: ...1585 ATEM...

Page 1586: ...18 Background Fill Key Cut 1586 ATEM...

Page 1587: ...1 1 1 M E 1 2 3 4 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 KEY 1 KEY 1 2 3 4 5 1587 ATEM...

Page 1588: ...DVE 2D 3D Background Fill Key Cut DVE 1588 ATEM...

Page 1589: ...1 1 1 M E 1 DVE 2 M E 2 3 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1 KEY 1 2 DVE 3 4 1589 ATEM...

Page 1590: ...T DVE X Size X Y Size Y Rotation Rot Rst DVE Rst DVE 3D No Bevel 2D Bevel In Out 3D Bevel Out 3D Bevel In 3D DVE Soft Color SHIFT Border Shadow Soft Color Out Width Out Soft Bevel Soft 3D Opacity 1590...

Page 1591: ...Hue Sat Luma Light Angle In Width In Soft Bevel Pos 3D Light Altitude EFFECTS KEYS DSK KEYS DVE Next Transition ON ON ON ON AIR 1 ON KEY Next Transition 2 ON Next Transition Next Transition 1591 ATEM...

Page 1592: ...KEY 3 KEY 4 Next Transition 2 3 CUT AUTO KEY 1 Live KEY 2 1 Next Transition KEY 1 ON Next Transition 2 KEY 1 ON Next Transition KEY 1 OFF Next Transition 3 KEY 1 KEY 2 ON Next Transition BKGD Next Tr...

Page 1593: ...Y 1 KEY 2 Next Transition KEY 2 KEY 2 Next Transition DSK TIE Transition Rate 1 DSK CUT 2 DSK AUTO DSK Rate 3 DSK TIE Transition Control Transition Control DSK TIE Transition Control DSK TIE DSK 1593...

Page 1594: ...obe Photoshop ATEM Photoshop Photoshop ATEM Adobe Photoshop CS5 Photoshop ATEM ATEM Photoshop 192 168 10 240 Photoshop Photoshop 8K 7680 x 4320 Ultra HD 3840 x 2160 1080 HD 1920 x 1080 720p HD 1280 x...

Page 1595: ...ATEM Example Graphics ATEM ATEM Photoshop ATEM Switcher Media Pool 1 2 Pre Multiply Alpha Pre Multiplied Key ATEM SDI ATEM Production Studio 4K ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Constellation 8K HD Ultra HD...

Page 1596: ...ATEM Production Studio 4K Aux Source Mac Windows ATEM Constellation 8K ATEM Software Control ATEM System Control 1 Auxiliary AUX Home 2 Auxiliary 1 3 M E SHIFT 4 HOME 1596...

Page 1597: ...Player 1 1 RGB Media Player 1 Key 1 Media Player 2 2 RGB Media Player 2 Key 2 Program SDI Preview Preview Preview Clean Feed 1 Clean Feed 2 1 2 SuperSource ATEM 2 M E SuperSource PIP ATEM Constellati...

Page 1598: ...SuperSource SuperSource ATEM SuperSource SuperSource SuperSource ATEM SuperSource SuperSource X Y Crop SuperSource Home Preset SuperSource 1 1 3 2 M E 1 M E SuperSource 1598...

Page 1599: ...Enable Source Select Destination Crop ATEM Source Select ATEM SuperSource Select 1 M E Destination 2 M E Pre Multiplied Pre Multiplied 1599...

Page 1600: ...Border ATEM Constellation 8K 8K SuperSource ATEM SuperSource SuperSource ATEM SuperSource SuperSource 1 2 1600...

Page 1601: ...ATEM Software Control ATEM Advanced Panel ATEM ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control Shift Cmd M Mac Shift Ctrl M Windows 100 20 ATEM Software Control 1601...

Page 1602: ...3 00 ATEM Software Control 1 ATEM 1 ATEM Software Control 2 3 1 4 5 ATEM Software Control 1602...

Page 1603: ...6 Bars 7 Col1 8 9 3 00 10 1 11 5 0 12 Blk 13 1603...

Page 1604: ...14 ATEM 1 ATEM Software Control 1604...

Page 1605: ...1 2 3 4 Blackmagic Studio Camera DVE 1605...

Page 1606: ...20 20 1606...

Page 1607: ...M Advanced Panel ATEM Software Control ATEM Software Control ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel ATEM Software Control 6 1 2 6 3 4 SHIFT Color Bars PROGRAM SHIFT 5 SHIFT Col1 PREVIEW Bars Black Color Generators...

Page 1608: ...6 WIPE 7 3 00 8 AUTO 1 9 MACRO 10 11 SHIFT BLACK MIX AUTO 12 ATEM Advanced Panel 6 6 ATEM Software Control MACRO 6 ATEM 1 ATEM Advanced Panel 1608...

Page 1609: ...Camera Control Panel CCU Blackmagic Design CCU ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design URSA Broadcast URSA Mini Pro 4 6K URSA Mini Blackmagic Studio Camera Blackmagic Micro Studio Camera IEC 12 12...

Page 1610: ...ATEM Camera Control Panel Ethernet ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel Ethernet Ethernet ATEM Ethernet Ethernet ATEM 1610 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1611: ...ATEM IP IP DHCP IP IP IP DHCP IP 1 IP DHCP IP 2 IP DHCP IP 3 IP 4 1611 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1612: ...5 IP IP IP IP 1 IP 2 3 SDI Ethernet 1612 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1613: ...A B A 1 4 B 5 8 A B 1613 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1614: ...DHCP IP 1 ATEM Constellation 8K 1614 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1615: ...SCENE FILE SCENE FILE 1615 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1616: ...WHITE BLACK BLACK FLARE 1616 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1617: ...1617 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1618: ...SCENE FILE SCENE FILE 1 STORE 2 SCENE FILE SCENE FILE SCENE FILE 1618 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1619: ...1 1 SCENE FILE 2 3 4 1 SCENE FILE ND CC MASTER GAIN ISO Gain Blackmagic Design MASTER GAIN MASTER GAIN GAIN 1619 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1620: ...REL ABS REL ABS ON f2 8 f5 6 ATEM Software Control f2 8 f5 6 f5 6 ATEM Software Control f2 8 f5 6 ATEM Software Control f2 8 f2 8 1620 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1621: ...W B W B SHUTTER W B SHUTTER W B SHUTTER BARS BARS SHUTTER SHUTTER 50 1 50 SHUTTER RGB Blackmagic SmartScope 4K BLACK FLARE BLACK FLARE 1621 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1622: ...D EXT EXT IRIS IRIS MASTER BLACK 1622 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1623: ...PREVIEW PREVIEW ATEM Software Control SENS COARSE 1 2 COARSE SENS COARSE f4 0 f8 0 1 2 COARSE f4 0 3 4 SENS f8 0 1623 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1624: ...IRIS MB ACTIVE IRIS MB ACTIVE IRIS MB ACTIVE AUTO IRIS AUTO IRIS CALL CALL tally PANEL ACTIVE PANEL ACTIVE ATEM Camera Control Panel Blackmagic Design 1624 ATEM Camera Control Panel...

Page 1625: ...e GPI and Tally Interface Blackmagic SmartView Duo SmartView HD GPI and Tally Interface ATEM 1 M E GPI and Tally Interface 20 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K GPI and Tal...

Page 1626: ...2 GPI and Tally Interface USB 3 Blackmagic ATEM Setup 4 ATEM ATEM Ethernet Configure Address Using Static IP GPI and Tally Interface IP 192 168 10 2 ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher GPI and Tally Interf...

Page 1627: ...6 Set tally outputs Switcher Inputs 1 8 9 16 ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher Switcher Inputs 9 16 7 Apply USB ATEM GPI and Tally Interface 8 Blackmagic ATEM Setup USB GPI and Tally Interface 1627...

Page 1628: ...ATEM XLR TRS 1 4 XLR TRS ATEM RCA RCA Hi Fi iPod Hi Fi RCA ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR XLR SMPTE ATEM 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR 1628...

Page 1629: ...SDI HDMI ATEM SDI HDMI SDI HDMI SDI HDMI ATEM Software Control ATEM XLR TRS 1 4 ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K 2 M E Production Studio 4K XLR 1629...

Page 1630: ...n 8K MADI MADI ATEM Constellation 8K BNC 75 100 ATEM Constellation 8K BNC MADI TRS 1 4 MADI IN 1 64 24 48 64 ATEM Constellation 8K MADI OUT 1 8K MADI OUT 1 1 10 1 2 SDI 1 10 11 12 13 TRS 14 HD Ultra H...

Page 1631: ...MADI OUT 2 8K MADI OUT 2 1 10 3 4 SDI 1 10 11 12 13 TRS 14 HD Ultra HD MADI OUT 2 1 30 3 4 SDI 1 30 31 32 ATEM ATEM 1631...

Page 1632: ...rol 1 MIDI Mac USB 2 MIDI Mac Applications Utilities Audio MIDI Setup MIDI Window Show MIDI Window MIDI Windows 3 Mackie Control ATEM Mackie Control Behringer BCF 2000 Mackie Control Mapping for Cakew...

Page 1633: ...4 ATEM Software Control MIDI ATEM ATEM MUTE ON MUTE ATEM 1633...

Page 1634: ...RJ45 1 234567 8 TX TX TX RX RX TX RX RX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RJ45 TALKBACK ATEM Constellation 8K RS 422 RS 422 DB 9 RJ12 PTZ DB 9 RJ12 8 3 2 7 1 4 6 9 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 RS 422 PTZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 23456 RJ12...

Page 1635: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 1636: ...t8 The parameter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved f...

Page 1637: ...ation types 128 through 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data typ...

Page 1638: ...e exposure values from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file...

Page 1639: ...8 0 HDTV 1 4 3 2 2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from...

Page 1640: ...4 0 latitude _ _ BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees ddd...

Page 1641: ...ckwards 0 pause ve multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 s...

Page 1642: ...00 us 0x00002710 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3...

Page 1643: ...s pass through the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device...

Page 1644: ...tally status 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status...

Page 1645: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF RelativeP...

Page 1646: ...ign com ru support Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design ATEM About ATEM Software Control Mac Applications ATEM Software Control About ATEM Software Control Windows ATEM Software Control About ATEM Soft...

Page 1647: ...BMD 201602001 MSIP REM BMD 201602001 R REM BMD 201805002 MSIP REM BMD PStudio4K R REM BMD 201803001 MSIP REM BMD 201410016 R REM BMD 201804001 KCC REM BMD ATEMCameraConv MSIP REM BMD 201602002 KCC REM...

Page 1648: ...40 C Blackmagic Design 2000 www P65Warnings ca gov IT 1648...

Page 1649: ...BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN BLACKMAGIC DESIGN Copyright 2020 Blackmagic Design Blackmagic Design DeckLink HDLink Workgroup Videohub Multi...

Page 1650: ...Manuale di istruzioni Giugno 2020 Italiano Switcher ATEM per la produzione dal vivo...

Page 1651: ...tallare il tuo switcher ATEM per la produzione dal vivo Lo switcher gestibile da un computer tramite il software incluso oppure da un pannello di controllo esterno acquistabile separatamente Il comput...

Page 1652: ...scelta rapida 1690 Multimedia 1690 Audio 1691 Camera 1692 Finestra impostazioni 1692 Utilizzare il pannello di controllo principale 1693 Men di controllo 1697 Media Players 1699 Utilizzare il mixer a...

Page 1653: ...1813 ATEM Camera Control Panel 1815 Collegare l alimentazione 1815 Connettere uno switcher 1816 Cambiare le impostazioni di rete 1817 Disposizione dei controlli 1818 Controllare le camere 1823 Utilizz...

Page 1654: ...e uno o pi pannelli di controllo esterni I pannelli collegati controllano lo stesso switcher mediante una connessione ethernet Il software di controllo installabile su un numero di computer a scelta s...

Page 1655: ...trollo transizioni Questo tipo di switcher offre un flusso di lavoro altamente efficiente perch basta selezionare una sorgente sul bus di anteprima e verificarla sul monitor collegato prima di sceglie...

Page 1656: ...re questa impostazione consulta la sezione Gestire le trasizioni Gli switcher A B hanno un bus A e un bus B Uno dedicato al programma e indica la sorgente attiva illuminando di rosso il pulsante corri...

Page 1657: ...eo HD 1080p59 94 e Ultra HD 2160p59 94 fino all 8K 4320p59 94 Il pannello di controllo frontale permette di commutare tra sorgenti all istante e di verificarne l esito sul display LCD integrato ATEM C...

Page 1658: ...golo connettore BNC Il pannello frontale dotato di pulsanti di selezione diretta per 6 fonti ausiliarie e di un ampio display LCD per monitorare i contenuti ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K NOTA Il mode...

Page 1659: ...sia collegata correttamente allo switcher Collegare un pannello di controllo ATEM esterno Se hai acquistato un pannello di controllo ATEM esterno puoi collegarlo direttamente senza dover connettere u...

Page 1660: ...EM Advanced Panel 192 168 10 60 Consulta la sezione Connettersi a una rete per tutti i dettagli su come verificare e impostare l indirizzo IP dello switcher La comunicazione tra il pannello e lo switc...

Page 1661: ...i seguenti componenti ATEM Software Control ATEM Setup Lancia ATEM Setup per configurare le impostazioni di rete e per aggiornare il software interno dello switcher ATEM Per accedere ad ATEM Software...

Page 1662: ...diale e delle chiavi Installare il software ATEM su Windows consigliabile disinstallare dal computer eventuali versioni precedenti del software ATEM 1 Assicurati di avere l ultima versione del driver...

Page 1663: ...empi di grafica Usa questi esempi per testare il funzionamento dell archivio multimediale e delle chiavi Collegare un computer Collega il computer direttamente allo switcher per gestirlo aggiungere gr...

Page 1664: ...e clicca Salva Se lo switcher non viene rilevato potrebbe essere necessario cambiare le impostazioni di rete sul computer Cambiare le impostazioni di rete facile e veloce Per cambiare le impostazioni...

Page 1665: ...ngranaggio in basso a sinistra dell interfaccia di ATEM Software Control per accedere alla finestra impostazioni Standard video Lo standard video cambia a seconda del Paese in cui lavori Nel men Gener...

Page 1666: ...eferenze audio Il men Audio permette di selezionare quali uscite monitorare e silenziare il talkback in entrata sugli ingressi e sulle uscite SDI per evitare un potenziale ciclo di feedback nei canali...

Page 1667: ...ATEM offrono 10 riquadri multiview 2 pi grandi per il programma e l anteprima in alto e 8 pi piccoli in basso ATEM Constellation 8K offre anche layout da 4 7 13 o 16 riquadri per visualizzare sorgent...

Page 1668: ...ATEM Constellation 8K Gli indicatori di livello audio si possono abilitare o disabilitare in ogni riquadro singolarmente o contemporaneamente cliccando le rispettive icone o il pulsante Tutti on Anch...

Page 1669: ...onsulta la sezione Controllare HyperDeck per tutti i dettagli su come connettere e gestire HyperDeck tramite ATEM Software Control o un pannello ATEM etserno Ogni connettore dello switcher contrassegn...

Page 1670: ...one dei contenuti solamente ai televisori Per questo motivo le immagini dei dispositivi protetti da HDCP per esempio lettori DVD e set top box non sono visualizzabili In genere le camere e i computer...

Page 1671: ...rollo lo switcher ATEM necessita sempre di un indirizzo IP fisso Cerca un indirizzo IP fisso e disponibile nel rango della rete desiderata I pannelli di controllo si possono impostare sul protocollo D...

Page 1672: ...dere lo switcher Scollega il cavo di alimentazione ricollegalo e poi chiudi la finestra di dialogo Cambia le impostazioni di rete dalla tab Configure di ATEM Setup Impostazioni di rete dei pannelli AT...

Page 1673: ...le 4 manopole sotto il display LCD per cambiare l indirizzo IP come necessario 4 Premi il pulsante contestuale SALVA per salvare i cambiamenti A questo punto il pannello dovrebbe connettersi allo swi...

Page 1674: ...ente un indirizzo IP da un server DHCP Abilita o disabilita l opzione DHCP premendo il pulsante contestuale DHCP ON o DHCP OFF NOTA Se connetti il pannello direttamente allo switcher invece di usare u...

Page 1675: ...n modo diretto Lo switcher il cuore della catena di produzione quindi importante assicurarsi che sia impostato correttamente sin dai primi passi Qui sotto riportato un semplice esempio di utilizzo del...

Page 1676: ...erifica che il tally funzioni su tutte le camere Premi il pulsante di una camera per inviarla all uscita di anteprima La spia tally della camera Blackmagic corrispondente deve illuminarsi di verde Pre...

Page 1677: ...installata una versione pi recente consigliabile aggiornare tutti i dispositivi che intendi usare alla stessa versione del software L installer del software ATEM Per eseguire l aggiornamento connetti...

Page 1678: ...nessione NOTA Durante l aggiornamento tramite USB assicurati che l Advanced Panel sia l unico dispositivo ATEM connesso tramite USB al computer sui cui aperta l utilit Se sono connessi pi dispositivi...

Page 1679: ...TEM Production Switcher includono un cavo breakout per usare audio esterno Programma HDMI Analogamente al programma SDI questa uscita commuta tra Ultra HD HD e SD Trasmette l uscita di programma princ...

Page 1680: ...ermo a piena risoluzione Questa uscita integra l audio del programma SDI M E ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K e ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K offrono un uscita di anteprima SDI per M E 1 e uscite di pr...

Page 1681: ...he l ingresso 1 in onda Se a questo ingresso connessa una sorgente la vedrai sull uscita di programma A differenza dei soliti pannelli di controllo programma anteprima questi pulsanti funzionano sia p...

Page 1682: ...o da un pannello esterno se connesso Oltre agli ingressi principali il pannello frontale ospita anche due pulsanti per i lettori multimediali ovvero MP 1 e MP 2 Se nello switcher sono archiviati dei f...

Page 1683: ...e dal men LCD Per selezionare la modalit cut bus 1 Premi MENU 2 Ruota la manopola fino al men Impostazioni 3 Premi SET per selezionarlo 4 Ruota la manopola fino alla voce Modalit e conferma con SET 5...

Page 1684: ...inaspettato anche se un altro utente ha cambiato una serie di impostazioni e poi ha salvato l intera configurazione dello switcher Livelli audio Oltre a navigare i men LCD la manopola sul pannello fro...

Page 1685: ...l men DSK 1 sul display LCD o su un altro pannello di controllo Al keyer possibile assegnare un ingresso o un lettore multimediale e per farlo puoi usare il men LCD o il pannello di controllo esterno...

Page 1686: ...llo frontale Men LCD I men LCD contengono tutte le impostazioni delle operazioni dello switcher Prova a navigarli per scoprire cosa contengono le diverse pagine Questi men sono organizzati in modo sim...

Page 1687: ...oftware Control o il pannello frontale Il pulsante selezionato si illumina di rosso indicando che possibile regolare il livello del rispettivo canale usando le frecce su e gi Sul retro di ATEM Constel...

Page 1688: ...azioni di rete la modalit delle transizioni e la lingua Generale ATEM Software Control disponibile in inglese tedesco spagnolo francese italiano giapponese coreano portoghese russo turco e cinese semp...

Page 1689: ...er ogni pannello di controllo in modo indipendente Seleziona una camera dal men a discesa Struttura dell interfaccia L interfaccia del software composta da quattro pagine Switcher Audio Multimedia e C...

Page 1690: ...to rimane attiva e il pulsante CUT si illumina di rosso Ctrl Shift 1 0 Commuta le sorgenti degli ingressi 11 20 sull uscita di programma con uno stacco netto Premi e rilascia Ctrl poi Shift 1 0 Commut...

Page 1691: ...lettore 1 il riempimento e la chiave vengono selezionati automaticamente In ogni caso la chiave si pu instradare separatamente cos puoi usarne una diversa se preferisci Audio La pagina Audio contiene...

Page 1692: ...i utilizzano obiettivi compatibili Inoltre possibile regolare il bilanciamento del colore e creare look unici con il correttore primario di DaVinci Resolve integrato nelle camere Blackmagic operanti c...

Page 1693: ...gli su come usare HyperDeck congiuntamente allo switcher ATEM Usa il men Remoto per impostare il tipo di controllo remoto dello switcher ovvero scegliendo la porta RS 422 per controllare i movimenti d...

Page 1694: ...ternamente dallo switcher SuperSource Funzione attiva su tutti gli switcher ATEM con pi di un M E Premi Shift sulla tastiera per passare alle barre Bars Le barre di colore generate internamente dallo...

Page 1695: ...illumina di rosso quando la transizione in corso e il piccolo display Durata ne indica la durata residua in fotogrammi Se hai connesso un ATEM Advanced Panel la leva di transizione del software rispec...

Page 1696: ...Controllo transizioni che andr in onda con la transizione seguente La durata della transizione con chiave DSK indicata nel display Durata sul pannello di controllo Una chiave DSK attiva non compromett...

Page 1697: ...seguito e variano a seconda del modello di switcher utilizzato Anche le funzioni sono diverse in base al modello di switcher connesso I men sono organizzati per priorit di elaborazione Riduci i men a...

Page 1698: ...sizioni Definisci le impostazioni di ciascun tipo di transizione Per esempio la tab Dip offre un men a discesa per selezionare la sorgente della transizione e la tab Wipe le icone per selezionare i mo...

Page 1699: ...zione tramite USB Utilizzare il mixer audio La pagina Audio consente di mixare le sorgenti audio connesse allo switcher tramite HDMI SDI sorgenti esterne e lettori multimediali questi ultimi solo se u...

Page 1700: ...impostare il gain del livello audio per ciascuna camera e sorgente audio I numeri sotto ciascun indicatore rappresentano il livello audio massimo impostato con il fader I numeri sopra ciascun indicato...

Page 1701: ...se il rispettivo video non in onda Quando ON selezionato la spia tally diventa rossa e AFV si deseleziona automaticamente AFV Selezionalo per sfumare l audio in entrata o in uscita quando cambiano gli...

Page 1702: ...re questa funzione DIM Seleziona DIM per diminuire momentaneamente il volume dell audio monitorato senza utilizzare il fader Deselezionalo per tornare al volume di partenza La manopola e i pulsanti re...

Page 1703: ...e gli avanzati controlli Fairlight inclusi equalizzatore parametrico a 6 bande e dinamica per ottimizzare la qualit del suono di ciascun ingresso e del master Questa sezione del manuale illustra il fu...

Page 1704: ...ca sull indicatore dell EQ di un ingresso per aprire la finestra dell equalizzatore parametrico a 6 bande Nel grafico c una linea contrassegnata da numeri da 1 a 6 uno per banda Ogni banda dell equali...

Page 1705: ...a a selezionare il filtro notch filtro elimina banda dal men a discesa e poi clicca su un predefinito alla volta Osserva come cambia la curva del grafico man mano che clicchi i predefiniti di gamma Qu...

Page 1706: ...le alte frequenze Aumenta o diminuisce il livello di volume delle basse frequenze Elimina banda Passa alto Passa basso Rimuove o taglia una determinata frequenza Rimuove le frequenze estemamente basse...

Page 1707: ...amma Definisce la gamma di decibel su cui interviene la funzione Rapporto Definisce la potenza massima con cui interviene la funzione Attacco Definisce il grado di intervento iniziale della funzione P...

Page 1708: ...ambiamenti nei livelli audio all interno del segnale SUGGERIMENTO consigliabile usare il compressore solo dopo aver definito l equalizzazione Recupero Aumenta il livello complessivo del segnale in con...

Page 1709: ...ll indicatore 2 Per dividere un ingresso mono in due canali distinti per l uscita stereo apri la finestra impostazioni dello switcher e clicca sul men Audio Nella tab Split audio spunta le caselle deg...

Page 1710: ...grafica nel computer Tutti i drive collegati al computer sono elencati in questa finesta Clicca sulla freccia a sinistra delle cartelle per vedere le sottocartelle I file che selezioni appaiono nel r...

Page 1711: ...l lettore multimediale da un pannello di controllo esterno Il nome dei file appare sotto lo slot cos facile individuare i contenuti a colpo d occhio I numeri e i nomi dei file sono utilissimi perch so...

Page 1712: ...tare lo standard video dello switcher La sezione Video contiene le impostazioni per selezionare lo standard video dello switcher che deve coincidere con quello delle sorgenti video connesse Se non coi...

Page 1713: ...98 2160p23 98 2160p24 2160p24 2160p24 2160p25 2160p25 2160p25 2160p29 97 2160p29 97 2160p29 97 2160p50 2160p50 2160p59 94 2160p59 94 4320p23 98 4320p24 4320p25 4320p29 97 4320p50 4320p59 94 Per impost...

Page 1714: ...le uscite con conversione in risoluzione minore Per i modelli ATEM Production Studio 4K in Ultra HD l uscita di programma HD SDI trasmette sempre video in risoluzione minore di 1080i per consentire la...

Page 1715: ...uando l uscita audio impostata su monitoraggio audio Imposta l uscita audio Canali audio SDI 15 e 16 A volte per ottenere un determinato effetto potrebbe essere utile connettere in loop una delle usci...

Page 1716: ...i accorcia la durata dell altra Cambia la durata delle clip nell archivio multimediale Durata delle clip Modello Formato video Durata clip ATEM Constellation 8K 720p 3200 fotogrammi 1080i 1080p 1600 f...

Page 1717: ...a che consente di attivare o disattivare la safe area Abilita o disabilita gli indicatori di livello per tutte le sorgenti e il programma con il pulsante Tutti on o Tutti off oppure clicca sulla rispe...

Page 1718: ...l retro dello switcher sono facilmente identificabili perch gli ingressi sono numerati e l etichetta di quelli commutabili ne riporta il numero corrispondente Il men Etichette Per esempio l ingresso 1...

Page 1719: ...a quattro registratori su disco HyperDeck Studio e gestirli da ATEM Software Control Una volta collegati usa questo men per configurare l indirizzo IP selezionare gli ingressi a cui sono collegati at...

Page 1720: ...uscite HD o Ultra HD o sei delle uscite 8K e poi una sorgente da associare Le sorgenti disponibili sono il nero gli ingressi video le barre di colore i segnali di riempimento e chiave dei lettori mult...

Page 1721: ...one dello switcher Seleziona tutti spuntata di default In questo caso ATEM Software Control salva tutte le impostazioni dello switcher Deseleziona le caselle delle impostazioni specifiche che non vuoi...

Page 1722: ...ile Per evitare questo inconveniente salva le impostazioni dello switcher sul computer o su un drive esterno inclusi gli USB Cos facendo avrai sempre a disposizione un backup a cui ricorrere nel caso...

Page 1723: ...nsente la regolazione delle diverse impostazioni Blackmagic Studio Camera si connette allo switcher tramite un cavo SDI o in fibra ottica installando un modulo SFP Interfaccia di controllo camera Conn...

Page 1724: ...l operatore di ripresa potr visualizzare le immagini del programma dello switcher premendo il pulsante PGM sulla camera stessa Connetti le camere Blackmagic Studio Camera tramite fibra ottica sfrutta...

Page 1725: ...ma mezzitoni e gain bianchi per ogni canale YRGB Clicca i pulsanti Lift Gamma o Gain sopra il cerchio cromatico per regolare i rispettivi valori Rotella master Sotto il cerchio cromatico c la rotella...

Page 1726: ...rotella Zoom verso l alto o il basso per zoomare in avanti o indietro Limite Situato sotto la rotella dello zoom questo controllo serve per assegnare una soglia limite all apertura del diaframma evita...

Page 1727: ...t dell otturatore Situata accanto all impostazione per il gain della camera questa impostazione permette di aumentare o ridurre la velocit dell otturatore cliccando sulle frecce sinistra o destra Ridu...

Page 1728: ...dal vivo esattamente lo stesso Il layout del pannello di correzione colore primaria disponibile per ogni camera e visualizza il set completo di controlli Nel pannello trovi tre cerchi cromatici per l...

Page 1729: ...la rotella master Clicca e trascina verso destra o sinistra Trascina verso sinistra per scurire il parametro selezionato verso destra per schiarirlo I valori YRGB sottostanti si aggiornano all istante...

Page 1730: ...r ottenere il giusto mix di entrambe le opzioni sposta lo slider su una posizione intermedia tra RGB e YRGB Qual l impostazione ideale L impostazione ideale non esiste perch la correzione colore un pr...

Page 1731: ...ell immagine regolando solo la luminanza dei mezzitoni Y Gain Modifica il contrasto dell immagine regolando solo la luminanza delle luci Contrast Ruotala in senso orario per aumentare il contrasto in...

Page 1732: ...Deck Extreme 8K HDR e HyperDeck Extreme Control Connessione HyperDeck si connette allo switcher in modo simile alle camere e altre sorgenti video ovvero tramite gli ingressi SDI o HDMI L unica differe...

Page 1733: ...trol Qui puoi configurare la connessione di quattro HyperDeck Digita l indirizzo IP di HyperDeck nel campo Indirizzo IP e scegli l ingresso a cui collegato dal men a discesa Ingresso Clicca Connetti O...

Page 1734: ...voce Ritardo Solitamente per ottenere una transizione naturale sono sufficienti 5 fotogrammi Se vuoi che le riproduzione inizi con un fermo immagine o se preferisci avviarla manualmente su HyperDeck...

Page 1735: ...o Passa alla clip precedente nella lista Play Clicca una volta per avviare la riproduzione Clicca di nuovo per interromperla Se la funzione Auto Roll abilitata la riproduzione partir automaticamente q...

Page 1736: ...nelli ATEM Advanced Panel Anche i pannelli ATEM Advanced Panel consentono di controllare gli HyperDeck Dopo aver connesso i deck allo switcher come descritto nella sezione Connessione usa i pulsanti n...

Page 1737: ...rio impostarne l indirizzo IP per consentire ad ATEM Advanced Panel di poterlo controllare tramite ethernet Naviga il men impostazioni HYPERDECK fino alla terza pagina premendo le frecce destra o sini...

Page 1738: ...ritardarla di qualche fotogramma per ottenere una transizione naturale Funziona proprio come un dispositivo a nastro Per impostare il numero di fotogrammi di ritardo ruota la manopola sotto FOTOGRAMMI...

Page 1739: ...olli inclusi play stop riproduzione continua e avanti indietro SUGGERIMENTO Per riprodurre tutte le clip tieni premuto SHIFT e premi il pulsante contestuale PLAY Nella quarta pagina premi il pulsante...

Page 1740: ...manopola contestuale PANNELLO Con la freccia destra vai alla quarta pagina contenente i controlli di trasporto Ruota la manopola per associare HyperDeck a un set di controlli di trasporto Ricorda che...

Page 1741: ...passo dal software e viceversa Per creare una configurazione ancora pi avanzata sufficiente collegare altri pannelli esterni Questa sezione del manuale spiega come usare i vari modelli dei pannelli AT...

Page 1742: ...un bus ovvero selezione sorgenti programma e anteprima Premi il pulsante SHIFT per vedere i nomi delle sorgenti nascoste per un totale di 20 sorgenti Ci sono due pulsanti SHIFT uno accanto al bus di s...

Page 1743: ...iono sul display sottostante alle uscite ausiliarie e alle chiavi Quando il pulsante MACRO abilitato i pulsanti servono per caricare e riprodurre le macro registrate nei rispettivi slot In modalit mac...

Page 1744: ...o con un aggiornamento PREV TRANS Abilita la modalit di anteprima per verificare la transizione usando la leva Una volta premuto puoi vedere l anteprima della transizione quante volte desideri Questa...

Page 1745: ...Registrare una macro con ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel Sezione chiavi secondarie DSK TIE Abilita la chiave secondaria sull uscita di anteprima insieme agli effetti della transizione seguente e la vincola...

Page 1746: ...inenti che puoi cambiare usando le manopole e i pulsanti sotto e sopra il display I puntini in basso sul display indicano la disponibilit di altre pagine di impostazioni che puoi sfogliare premendo le...

Page 1747: ...ROL hai la possibilit di controllare un gruppo di camere selezionandole una alla volta con la tastiera numerica Con il joystick regoli panoramica e inclinazione Per cambiare la direzione dell inclinaz...

Page 1748: ...arlo necessario rilevare le teste remote connesse Per rilevare le teste remote connesse 1 Premi il pulsante contestuale VISCA 2 Premi DETECT per rilevare le teste remote La prima camera connessa allo...

Page 1749: ...mente preciso La velocit di risposta ai comandi potrebbe cambiare a seconda della testa remota usata Per creare soluzioni di controllo PTZ su misura con connettore DB 9 RS 422 standard consulta la sez...

Page 1750: ...o di gestire le operazioni e regolare le impostazioni velocemente Questa sezione descrive come eseguire diversi tipi di transizione dai pannelli ATEM esterni Transizioni con stacco netto Lo stacco net...

Page 1751: ...uscita di anteprima ora attiva sull uscita di programma e viceversa SUGGERIMENTO Per eseguire le transizioni consigliabile usare il pulsante CUT perch d la possibilit di verificare il video sull uscit...

Page 1752: ...izione ha la sua durata Questo permette di eseguire transizioni pi veloci selezionando il tipo desiderato e premendo AUTO L ultima durata usata per ogni tipo di transizione rimane invariata fino a qua...

Page 1753: ...ale anche di una terza sorgente intermedia Per esempio si pu usare per creare l effetto flash tra una sorgente e l altra o per portare in sovraimpressione un logo La durata della transizione e la sorg...

Page 1754: ...zione wipe Per eseguire una transizione wipe da un pannello ATEM Advanced Panel 1 Sul bus di anteprima seleziona la sorgente video che intendi usare sull uscita di programma 2 Premi WIPE per seleziona...

Page 1755: ...esempio un bordo spesso con un immagine del lettore multimediale ideale per gli sponsor e la pubblicit Impostazioni della transizione wipe Durata La durata della transizione in secondi e fotogrammi Si...

Page 1756: ...ibile fino a quando la chiave non viene rimossa dall immagine in onda e dalla transizione seguente Consulta la sezione Gestire le risorse DVE per tutti i dettagli 3 Usa le manopole e i pulsanti contes...

Page 1757: ...isponibile e utilizzabile in una transizione La transizione con grafica un opzione molto comune che si avvale del DVE per far transitare la grafica su uno sfondo Per esempio in una transizione wipe il...

Page 1758: ...re multimediale o un altra sorgente di ingresso disabilita la chiave premoltiplicata e scegli una sorgente diversa per la chiave 4 Esegui la transizione premendo AUTO oppure manualmente usando la leva...

Page 1759: ...a sorgente video che intendi usare sull uscita di programma 2 Seleziona il tipo di transizione con il pulsante corrispondente nella sezione Tipo di transizione 3 Sposta la leva o lo slider da un estre...

Page 1760: ...stra per spostarti nella pagina successiva del men 3 Seleziona uno slot libero con la manopola 4 Conferma con il pulsante contestuale SALVA La configurazione viene salvata come preferita e baster ripr...

Page 1761: ...la pagina successiva del men 2 Seleziona la configurazione preferita che vuoi eliminare con la manopola Se gi in uso il testo centrale sopra al numero dello slot di colore arancione 3 Premi il pulsant...

Page 1762: ...per creare un passaggio di colore durante una transizione Sul software nella Switcher Palette Generatori di colore clicca uno dei due quadratini e seleziona il colore desiderato con il contagocce Sul...

Page 1763: ...a pagina Switcher apri la tab Media Player 2 Apri il men Lettori multimediali e seleziona una clip o un fotogramma dal men a discesa Multimedia 3 Se selezioni una clip si attiveranno le icone di trasp...

Page 1764: ...i programma lo sfondo cambia mentre le chiavi primarie e secondarie rimangono inviariate Per eseguire una transizione con stacco netto da ATEM Software Control Sul bus di programma seleziona la sorgen...

Page 1765: ...stiera 1 Disabilita il blocco maiuscole 2 Premi il tasto numerato corrispondente alla sorgente video che intendi usare sull uscita di programma La sorgente verr selezionata sull uscita di anteprima e...

Page 1766: ...iona il tipo di transizione cliccando il pulsante corrispondente nella sezione Tipo di transizione 3 Nel men Transizioni clicca la tab del tipo di transizione selezionato 4 Imposta la durata della tra...

Page 1767: ...ui bus di programma e anteprima si invertono per indicare che quella precedentemente sull uscita di anteprima ora attiva sull uscita di programma e viceversa Per eseguire una transizione automatica da...

Page 1768: ...vrapposizione regolabile Rappresentazione grafica di una transizione mix La tab Mix con l impostazione della durata Per eseguire una transizione mix da ATEM Sofware Control 1 Sul bus di anteprima sele...

Page 1769: ...sione un logo La durata della transizione e la sorgente intermedia sono personalizzabili Rappresentazione di una transizione dip La tab Dip con le impostazioni Per eseguire una transizione dip da ATEM...

Page 1770: ...rata o usando la tastiera numerica 4 Per selezionare la sorgente ruota la manopola corrispondente o il bus di selezione sorgenti 5 Esegui la transizione premendo AUTO oppure manualmente usando la leva...

Page 1771: ...ca WIPE nella sezione Tipo di transizione 3 Nel men Transizioni clicca la tab Wipe 4 Usa le impostazioni disponibili per personalizzare la transizione 5 Esegui la transizione premendo AUTO oppure manu...

Page 1772: ...nta arancione Flip flop La transizione alterna direzione standard a invertita ogniqualvolta viene eseguita Il testo di questa impostazione se selezionata diventa arancione Bordo Lo spessore del bordo...

Page 1773: ...ansizione stinger sul software Fonte Il lettore multimediale utilizzato per riprodurre la clip della transizione animata Durata clip La durata della transizione di solito uguale alla lunghezza dell an...

Page 1774: ...Per eseguire una transizione stinger da un pannello ATEM Advanced Panel 1 Premi STING 2 Seleziona un lettore multimediale ruotando la manopola sotto la voce FONTE sul display LCD Regola pre roll attac...

Page 1775: ...senza intaccare la luminanza luminosit Inverti chiave Inverte il segnale della chiave Attacco effetto mix e durata sono codipendenti Per esempio la durata di attacco e mix insieme non pu superare que...

Page 1776: ...a chiave primaria l opzione della transizione DVE rimane non disponibile fino a quando la chiave non viene rimossa dall immagine in onda e dalla transizione seguente Consulta la sezione Gestire le ris...

Page 1777: ...senza intaccare la luminanza luminosit Inverti chiave Quando la chiave non premoltiplicata inverte il segnale della chiave Gestire le risorse DVE ATEM offre un canale DVE utilizzabile in una transizio...

Page 1778: ...afica da un pannello ATEM Advanced Panel 1 Premi DVE Il display LCD mostrer le impostazioni pertinenti Se il DVE gi in uso in una chiave primaria l opzione della transizione DVE rimane non disponibile...

Page 1779: ...destra a sinistra Flip flop La transizione alterna la direzione da standard a invertita ogniqualvolta viene eseguita Le impostazioni indicano quale sar la direzione della transizione seguente Fonte r...

Page 1780: ...sul bus di anteprima che quello sul bus di programma Sull Advanced Panel gli indicatori LED accanto alla leva segnalano l avanzamento della transizione Sul software la leva virtuale si sposta di pari...

Page 1781: ...agini in movimento come riempimento o chiave I segnali di riempimento e chiave sono selezionabili nelle impostazioni delle chiavi primarie e secondarie di ATEM Software Control o dal bus di selezione...

Page 1782: ...segnale di riempimento contiene l immagine video da sovrapporre allo sfondo il segnale di chiave contiene una maschera in scala di grigi usata per definire le parti del segnale di riempimento da rend...

Page 1783: ...ATEM possa utilizzarlo per combinare la grafica al video dal vivo Una volta salvato il documento come file Targa o scaricato direttamente nell archivio multimediale abilita la chiave premoltiplicata e...

Page 1784: ...uale corrispondente sopra al display LCD 3 Ruota la manopola sotto TIPO CHIAVE e seleziona LUMA 4 Ruota la manopola sotto FONTE RIEMP e FONTE CHIAVE per scegliere una sorgente per il riempimento e una...

Page 1785: ...impostare una chiave di luminanza seleziona la stessa sorgente sia per il riempimento che per la chiave 3 Regola altre impostazioni se necessario Impostazioni della chiave secondaria DSK Per impostar...

Page 1786: ...della serie Blackmagic Design DeckLink o Intensity possibile riprodurre le clip con lo switcher stesso Per creare animazioni precise di una durata qualsiasi basta renderizzare e sostituire lo sfondo...

Page 1787: ...Usa le frecce destra e sinistra per spostarti nel men e regolare altre impostazioni per esempio la tonalit il gain l intensit Y il lift e la maschera SUGGERIMENTO Su ATEM Advanced Panel tieni premuto...

Page 1788: ...Disabilita l impostazione Limita soglia chiave 2 Imposta Lift su 0 0 3 Regola il valore di Tonalit di modo che i punti di riferimento del colore siano centrati intorno al nero Regolando la tonalit il...

Page 1789: ...e oppure premi il pulsante corrispondente sul bus di selezione 4 Premi la freccia destra fino alla pagina Regolazione croma 5 Seleziona Campione croma Scegli un area del green screen che copra una gam...

Page 1790: ...ibili sull area dell immagine che vuoi rimuovere e fermati non appena diventa uniformemente opaca Contorno chiave Usa lo slider o la manopola per muovere il contorno dell area intarsiata verso l inter...

Page 1791: ...ai riflessi del green screen Rimozione alone Sposta lo slider per rimuovere in modo uniforme la tinta verde dagli elementi in primo piano Corrispondenza tra primo piano e sfondo Una volta separato il...

Page 1792: ...di creare 18 forme ridimensionabili e posizionabili a scelta L immagine finale composta da sfondo riempimento e intarsio con forma geometrica Sfondo Immagine a schermo intero Riempimento L immagine a...

Page 1793: ...te ovvero andr in onda quando la transizione seguente viene azionata 2 Ruota la manopola sotto la voce TIPO CHIAVE e seleziona Motivo 3 Seleziona una sorgente per il riempimento ruotando la manopola s...

Page 1794: ...en dedicata alla chiave con motivo del keyer pertinente e usa il joystick o la manopola per spostare la forma sul piano verticale e orizzontale Per ricentrare la forma premi il pulsante di selezione d...

Page 1795: ...abella di seguito Impostazioni della chiave DVE Per impostare una chiave primaria DVE da un pannello ATEM Advanced Panel 1 Premi KEY 1 per abilitare il keyer sull uscita di anteprima 2 Ruota la manopo...

Page 1796: ...smussatura esterna del bordo 3D Smussatura int La smussatura interna del bordo 3D Impostazioni del bordo DVE Usa le manopole e i pulsanti contestuali sotto il display per regolare i parametri dei bor...

Page 1797: ...Sofftware Control nei men della rispettiva chiave Chiave animata Le chiavi primarie di luminanza cromatiche e con motivo includono impostazioni aggiuntive per gestirne l animazione Se il canale DVE d...

Page 1798: ...izione seguente prima della transizione Esempio 3 In questo esempio KEY 1 e KEY 2 sono in onda come indicato dai pulsanti ON accesi Lo sfondo selezionato per la transizione seguente come indicato dal...

Page 1799: ...alla sezione Controllo transizioni La chiave apparir e scomparir in concomitanza con la transizione selezionata alla durata visualizzata dal display Durata Premi il pulsante DSK TIE per vedere la chi...

Page 1800: ...o switcher ovvero il suo indirizzo IP L indirizzo IP di default 192 168 10 240 Per esportare versioni differenti dello stesso file Photoshop basta usare la finestra del plug in di esportazione dove pu...

Page 1801: ...persino barre di colore ATEM Production Studio 4K ha una uscita aux mentre la maggior parte degli altri modelli ne ha diverse Invece di apposite uscite aux ATEM Constellation 8K include numerose usci...

Page 1802: ...scita ausiliaria dall apposito men nella sezione System Control Per farlo 1 Nella sezione System Control premi HOME AUX 2 Seleziona Auxiliary 1 3 Premi il pulsante della sorgente desiderata sul bus di...

Page 1803: ...ima ovvero la stessa visualizzata nel riquadro di anteprima della schermata multiview Clean feed 1 Identica all uscita di programma ma non include chiavi secondarie utile per registrare un master senz...

Page 1804: ...uadri 2 3 e 4 Clicca l icona con 3 lineette per resettare le impostazioni Sui pannelli esterni premi HOME SUPERSOURCE PRESET e scegli uno dei quattro layout predefiniti Torna indietro e seleziona il r...

Page 1805: ...a sorgente per lo sfondo dal bus di selezione Select sul pannello M E 1 dal bus Destination sul pannello M E 2 La sorgente selezionata verr collocata dietro i riquadri PiP Dal software se preferisci u...

Page 1806: ...M Software Control clicca la tab Copia Spunta la casella del riquadro che vuoi copiare e poi la casella o le caselle del riquadro i a cui applicarlo I riquadri copiati compariranno dietro al riquadro...

Page 1807: ...all interno dello switcher e si possono azionare indistintamente dal software o dal pannello di controllo La finestra Macro di ATEM Software Control Apri ATEM Software Control e clicca Macro nella ba...

Page 1808: ...zione molto flessibile In fase di registrazione di una macro ricorda di cambiare tutte le impostazioni necessarie per poter creare gli effetti desiderati Registrare una macro con ATEM Software Control...

Page 1809: ...a Perch impostare una durata di 5 secondi e non di 2 come richiesto dall esempio Perch la pausa deve sempre includere anche la durata della transizione in questo caso 3 secondi In questo esempio la pa...

Page 1810: ...cia mostrer un bordo arancione per indicare la riproduzione della macro in corso Se la macro non viene riprodotta come pianificato prova a registrarla di nuovo seguendo il procedimento descritto in al...

Page 1811: ...a a una macro complessa 1 Inizia a registrare la macro Mentre la registrazione in corso apri la tab Riproduci 2 Spunta Richiama e riproduci per riprodurre automaticamente la macro non appena clicchi i...

Page 1812: ...rrispondente Ogni pagina contiene 20 pulsanti Le macro registrate senza nome prendono il numero del proprio slot La finestra Riproduci Richiama e riproduci Casella spuntata la macro viene riprodotta a...

Page 1813: ...amo di voler salvare la macro nello slot 6 1 Premi il pulsante contestuale MACRO per aprire il men sul display LCD 2 Ruota la manopola sotto la voce MACRO e scegli uno slot libero in questo caso 6 Vuo...

Page 1814: ...ferisci cambiare il nome e aggiungere una nota clicca l icona della matita nella finestra Macro di ATEM Software Control Premi MACRO per impostare il bus di selezione delle sorgenti sulla modalit macr...

Page 1815: ...solo pannello Se sono connesse pi di quattro camere e preferisci destinare ciascuna ad una unit in particolare collega un altro pannello per creare un ulteriore postazione di controllo Scegli la conf...

Page 1816: ...terno si trover al centro della configurazione Ora connetti un cavo dalla seconda porta ethernet di ATEM Camera Control Panel al computer o alla presa Se usi ATEM Camera Control Panel solo con lo swit...

Page 1817: ...rete Premi IMPOSTAZIONI per accedere alle impostazioni del pannello La voce DHCP la prima tra le pagine del men I puntini sottostanti rappresentano le pagine disponibili navigabili premendo il pulsant...

Page 1818: ...i quattro campi per cambiarli come necessario 3 Premi SALVA per confermare Quando il pannello identifica lo switcher lo vedrai illuminarsi A questo punto il pannello in grado di controllare le camere...

Page 1819: ...sul display la home visualizza la voce GRUPPO A o GRUPPO B ovvero il gruppo di camere correntemente selezionato per la funzione di controllo Se per esempio sono connesse otto camere e vuoi controllare...

Page 1820: ...tra le pagine del men seguita da una serie di altre pagine dedicate alle impostazioni di rete Queste impostazioni sono descritte nella sezione che spiega come cambiare le impostazioni di rete quando i...

Page 1821: ...voci in senso orario o antiorario Controlli CCU I controlli di ciascuna CCU sono divisi in tre sezioni principali qui sotto elencate Regolazione e salvataggio delle impostazioni della camera Questi c...

Page 1822: ...altre funzioni Il parametro gain Y corrisponde alla luminanza ovvero la luminosit complessiva dell immagine Tutti i dettagli sul bilanciamento del colore sono contenuti nella sezione Controllare le c...

Page 1823: ...ontrollare le camere Questa sezione del manuale illustra le funzioni delle CCU e offre una panoramica su come gestire il controllo delle camere Come prima cosa necessario assegnare una camera a ciascu...

Page 1824: ...utte le impostazioni puoi salvarle come configurazione predefinita e richiamarla in un secondo momento Questa funzione velocizza il lavoro Per salvare una configurazione predefinita 1 Premi il pulsant...

Page 1825: ...a 4 Premi il pulsante numerato 1 su una CCU qualsiasi Ciascuna richiamer la propria configurazione predefinita salvata sul pulsante numerato 1 NOTA La funzione Richiama Tutte va usata con attenzione p...

Page 1826: ...azione partir da f5 6 e ritorner gradualmente in sync con il suo controllo mentre la regoli Questo processo quasi del tutto impercettibile Modalit assoluta In questa modalit le impostazioni del pannel...

Page 1827: ...rso l alto o il basso per aumentarla o diminuirla Una produzione standard solitamente richiede un valore di 50 ovvero 1 50imo di secondo che produce un effetto del mosso gradevole Per ottenere invece...

Page 1828: ...e della camera Il valore preciso dell esposizione in f stop appare nel piccolo display IRIS La parte inferiore della manopola del joystick integra un anello che serve per regolare i livelli principali...

Page 1829: ...assimo del diaframma Supponiamo di dover impostare il diaframma di modo che non superi mai un determinato limite di esposizione Per farlo 1 Sposta il joystick tutto in avanti 2 Ruota la manopola COARS...

Page 1830: ...i ombra pi scure CALL Tieni premuto questo pulsante per far lampeggiare la spia tally sulla camera corrispondente Usa questa funzione per attirare l attenzione degli operatori di ripresa o segnalare c...

Page 1831: ...ro di GPI and Tally Interface indica come connettere un cavo di breakout alla strumentazione video compatibile con i segnali tally a chiusura di contatto per esempio Blackmagic SmartView Duo e SmartVi...

Page 1832: ...up 4 Se lo switcher connesso direttamente al computer o a un ATEM Advanced Panel senza un interruttore ethernet scegli Configure Address Using Static IP GPI and Tally Interface ha un indirizzo IP stat...

Page 1833: ...ts 1 8 Se invece stai configurando la seconda unit spunta la casella Switcher Inputs 9 16 7 Clicca Save La spia LED bianca a destra della porta USB inizier a lampeggiare e rimarr accesa non appena lo...

Page 1834: ...I connettori audio RCA sono compatibili con i dispositivi di largo consumo tra cui HiFi e iPod Collega l audio esterno HiFi agli ingressi RCA dello switcher ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K e ATEM 2 M E...

Page 1835: ...sione audio per ogni sorgente video e di un mixer audio esterno a meno che non si decida di usarlo L audio si pu mixare grazie al mixer di ATEM Software Control e trasmettere in uscita tramite le usci...

Page 1836: ...io digitale a 24 bit di profondit con frequenza di campionamento di 48 kHz Si connettono ad altri 64 canali nel mixer che puoi mixare nell uscita di programma usando gli stessi controlli EQ e dinamica...

Page 1837: ...SDI 1 10 Canale 11 Audio del media player Canale 12 Mic esterno Canale 13 Ingresso audio analogico TRS Canale 14 Audio PGM In modalit HD e Ultra HD MADI Out 2 invia queste sorgenti Canali 1 30 Canali...

Page 1838: ...itivo MIDI Su Mac vai su Applicazioni Utility Configurazione MIDI Audio Vai su Finestra e scegli Mostra Finestra MIDI Assicurati che la superficie di controllo appaia come dispositivo MIDI Su Windows...

Page 1839: ...ella superficie di controllo e osserva l interfaccia del mixer del software per capire se rispecchia correttamente i movimenti Funzione MUTE Nel mixer ATEM l audio attivo o presente nel mix quando il...

Page 1840: ...inatura della porta seriale per cavi di controllo Piedinatura del connettore RS 422 per cavi di controllo RS 422 uno standard broadcast con un comune connettore DE 9 o RJ12 Per usare una soluzione di...

Page 1841: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 1842: ...er specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for parameters that ap...

Page 1843: ...gh 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and operation type...

Page 1844: ...m minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate fps as in...

Page 1845: ...1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4 0 int8 0 fr...

Page 1846: ...s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd decimal deg...

Page 1847: ...ltiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage medium 0 CFast...

Page 1848: ...8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 subtract 0...

Page 1849: ...lly packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they are monitori...

Page 1850: ...on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 6 7 r...

Page 1851: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF RelativeP...

Page 1852: ...ontrollare la versione del software Apri ATEM Software Control e clicca il men Informazioni su ATEM Software Control Su Mac apri ATEM Software Control dalla cartella Applicazioni e clicca Informazioni...

Page 1853: ...compromettono le comunicazioni radio Operare questo dispositivo in ambienti residenziali pu causare interferenze dannose nella cui evenienza l utente dovr porvi rimedio a proprie spese Il funzionament...

Page 1854: ...agic Design per le operazioni di manutenzione Usare il dispositivo a un altitudine non superiore a 2000 m sopra il livello del mare Dichiarazione dello Stato della California Questo dispositivo pu esp...

Page 1855: ...guasti o malfunzionamento dovuti all uso di parti o ricambi non originali Blackmagic Design o d precedenti modifiche o integrazione del prodotto ad altri prodotti con il risultato di rendere la ripara...

Page 1856: ...Manual de Instala o e Opera o Junho 2020 Portugu s Switchers de Produ o Ao Vivo ATEM...

Page 1857: ...es ao vivo Este manual de instruc o es inclui todas as informac o es necessa rias para que voce instale o seu ATEM Production Switcher O switcher ATEM inclui um painel de controle virtual que pode se...

Page 1858: ...tcher 1895 Usar Atalhos de Teclado 1896 Gerenciador de M dias 1896 Mixer de udio 1897 Controle de C mera 1898 Configura es do Switcher 1898 Usar o Painel de Controle Virtual 1899 Paletas de Processame...

Page 1859: ...r o Painel ao Switcher 2022 Alterar Configura es de Rede 2023 Layout do Painel de Controle de C mera 2024 Controlar C meras 2029 Usar Sinaliza o 2037 Enviar Sinaliza o via GPI and Tally Interface 2037...

Page 1860: ...nexo es Ethernet simples O painel virtual ATEM Software Control pode ser instalado em quantos computadores voce quiser sem custo adicional Voce pode montar um sistema de transmissa o ao vivo ATEM para...

Page 1861: ...e de transi o Essa uma maneira muito poderosa de utilizar o switcher pois poss vel selecionar sua fonte na fileira de pr visualiza o e v la na sa da de pr visualiza o de v deo para confirmar que voc t...

Page 1862: ...switchers de v deo h muito tempo voc deve estar acostumado com switchers diretos estilo A B mais antigos Voc pode configurar o seu switcher ATEM no estilo de corte direto A B facilmente nas prefer nc...

Page 1863: ...8K 4320p59 94 O painel de controle integrado com LCD e intercomunica o permite fazer cortes diretamente do painel frontal assim voc pode confirmar rapidamente todas as suas fontes e testar sua configu...

Page 1864: ...is fontes de sai da auxiliares e voce pode monitorar as sai das no LCD integrado ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K OBSERVA O Caso tenha um ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K voc pode atualizar seu switcher p...

Page 1865: ...ecendo na sua televisa o verifique novamente sua conexa o de energia para ter certeza de que o ATEM esteja ligado Plugar um Painel ATEM F sico Se voce adquiriu um painel ATEM fi sico voce na o vai que...

Page 1866: ...nte talvez seja necess rio solicitar a assiste ncia de uma pessoa que saiba como definir enderec os IP Por padra o o switcher e definido como um enderec o IP fixo de 192 168 10 240 e os paine is ATEM...

Page 1867: ...ATEM Switchers instala os seguintes componentes que ser o utilizados pelos switchers ATEM ATEM Software Control Blackmagic ATEM Setup O Blackmagic ATEM Setup usado para configurar par metros de rede i...

Page 1868: ...icos Use os exemplos gr ficos para explorar as funcionalidades de pool de m dia interno e chaveamento Instalar Blackmagic ATEM Software no Windows Recomendamos a desinstala o de quaisquer vers es ante...

Page 1869: ...ns exemplos gr ficos Use os exemplos gra ficos para explorar o pool de mi dia interno e a funcionalidade do chaveamento Conectar Computador Voc pode plugar o seu computador diretamente no ATEM e contr...

Page 1870: ...do seu switcher ATEM ainda n o ser ser detectado n o se preocupe A solu o provavelmente est ligada s configura es de rede do seu computador A altera o das configura es de rede r pida e deve levar ape...

Page 1871: ...da interface para abrir a janela de configurac o es do ATEM Software Control Configurar o padr o de v deo do switcher Voc pode ajustar o padr o de v deo de acordo com a regi o na qual est trabalhando...

Page 1872: ...er o exibidos nas janelas de multivisualiza o de entrada de v deo Ajustar Prefer ncias de udio A aba A udio permite selecionar quais entradas utilizar para monitoramento de a udio Voce tambe m pode si...

Page 1873: ...za es grandes e oito visualiza es pequenas O ATEM Constellation 8K tamb m oferece op es de 4 7 13 ou 16 visualiza es de entrada Voc pode selecionar entre uma variedade de fontes internas e externas pa...

Page 1874: ...o ATEM Constellation 8K Os medidores de udio podem ser ligados ou desligados dentro da visualiza o de cada fonte ou todos de uma vez ao clicar nos respectivos cones em cada visualiza o ou no bot o Ati...

Page 1875: ...cks no switcher ATEM e controla los via ATEM Software Control ou um painel de controle ATEM fi sico consulte a sec a o Controle HyperDeck deste manual Cada conector do switcher possui um r tulo assim...

Page 1876: ...deo no cabo HDMI portanto o fabricante n o permite que o conte do seja visualizado em outros equipamentos que n o sejam televisores Voc n o conseguir visualizar imagens de tais dispositivos Entre os...

Page 1877: ...controle possuam uma localizac a o esta vel para se conectar Isso significa que voce precisa encontrar um enderec o IP fixo dentro da sua rede Os paine is de controle podem ser configurados para ende...

Page 1878: ...uida feche a caixa de di logo Ajuste as configura es de rede usando a aba Configure no Blackmagic ATEM Setup No es B sicas sobre as Configura es de Rede do Painel ATEM F sico As configurac o es de red...

Page 1879: ...inir o enderec o IP para o seu switcher 4 Pressione o bota o funcional Salvar Alterac o es para confirmar o ajuste Agora seu painel se conectara ao seu switcher No ATEM Advanced Panel pressione o bot...

Page 1880: ...o pelo servidor DHCP automaticamente Ative ou desative DHCP ao pressionar o bota o funcional DHCP Ativado Desativado correspondente OBSERVA O Caso esteja conectando a um switcher sem uma rede n o have...

Page 1881: ...ainel frontal Esta e uma forma pra tica de conferir se tudo esta configurado corretamente a partir do switcher sendo o corac a o da cadeia produtiva Esta sec a o fornece um exemplo ba sico de como usa...

Page 1882: ...a funcionalidade da intercomunicac a o e recomenda vel verificar se a sinalizac a o esta funcionando em todas as ca meras Para fazer isso pressione um bota o de fonte de entrada para alterna la para...

Page 1883: ...instalada no seu computador Sempre atualize todos os seus equipamentos ao mesmo tempo de maneira que todos estejam usando a mesma vers o de software Instalador do software ATEM Para realizar uma atual...

Page 1884: ...a atualiza o atrav s da conex o Ethernet OBSERVA O Ao atualizar o software via USB certifique se que o painel avan ado seja o nico dispositivo ATEM conectado via USB ao computador que est executando o...

Page 1885: ...ltra HD HD e SD Ela envia a sa da de v deo de programa principal do switcher e pode ser conectada a televisores projetores de v deo ou at mesmo o H 264 Encoder ou os gravadores de disco HyperDeck ambo...

Page 1886: ...cionada no barramento de pr visualiza o do switcher al m de pr visualiza es de transi es Essa sa da perfeita quando voc deseja utilizar um monitor de pr visualiza o de resolu o completa O udio dessa s...

Page 1887: ...entrada 1 est no ar e caso exista uma fonte de v deo conectada entrada 1 a imagem correspondente ser exibida na sa da de programa No entanto ao contr rio dos pain is de controle de switcher com modo d...

Page 1888: ...ser selecionados no ATEM Software Control ou atrav s de um painel f sico caso possua um Al m dos bot es de entrada principais do painel frontal h outros dois rotulados MP 1 e MP 2 Eles correspondem a...

Page 1889: ...rramento de corte 1 Pressione o bot o Menu 2 Utilize o bot o girat rio para navegar at Configura es 3 Pressione o bot o Set para abrir este menu 4 Navegue pela lista do menu de modos e confirme sua se...

Page 1890: ...embora tamb m possa ser usado para selecionar diferentes op es nos menus da tela LCD Geralmente usado para controle de n vel de udio e poss vel visualizar a fun o sendo controlada na tela LCD O r tul...

Page 1891: ...bot o DSK 1 MIX para coloc lo e retir lo do ar A dura o da transi o ao pressionar o bot o ser configurada no menu de chave downstream na tela LCD ou atrav s de um painel de controle Voc pode alimentar...

Page 1892: ...rtes acidentais Usar os Menus LCD Os menus LCD disponibilizam a opera o quase completa do switcher Nos exemplos desta se o n s usamos os menus recomend vel explorar os menus para visualizar todas as o...

Page 1893: ...s e mix de programa usando o ATEM Software Control ou o painel frontal O bot o selecionado acender em vermelho o que significa que voc pode ajustar seu n vel com os bot es para cima e para baixo O pai...

Page 1894: ...e o de idiomas Prefer ncias Gerais O ATEM Software Control pode ser configurado nos seguintes idiomas ingl s alem o espanhol franc s italiano japon s coreano portugu s russo turco e chin s simplificad...

Page 1895: ...el de controle virtual n o afetar o mapeamento configurado no painel f sico Voc pode atribuir uma c mera a partir do menu suspenso C mera Painel de Controle do Switcher O painel de controle virtual po...

Page 1896: ...taneamente Corte direto permanece ativado e o bota o CUT acende em vermelho Control Shift 1 0 Envia a fonte das entradas 11 20 para a sai da de programa instantaneamente Pressione e solte Control depo...

Page 1897: ...ado no pool de mi dia o canal alfa e carregado automaticamente caso haja um canal alfa inclui do na imagem Quando uma imagem esta tica ou clipe e carregado no leitor de mi dia a sai da do leitor de mi...

Page 1898: ...as pro ximas sec o es Controle de C mera Atrav s da aba C mera no software voc pode controlar c meras remotamente basicamente da mesma maneira que unidades de controle externo de c meras tradicionais...

Page 1899: ...a utiliza o de gravadores de disco HyperDeck com o seu switcher ATEM consulte a se o Controle HyperDeck deste manual Voc tamb m pode definir o comportamento remoto do switcher usando a aba Remoto Isso...

Page 1900: ...ENTRADAS Os boto es de entrada correspondem ao nu mero de entradas externas do switcher BLACK Fonte de cor preta gerada internamente pelo switcher SUPERSOURCE Este recurso est dispon vel em todos os s...

Page 1901: ...ed estiver ativado o indicador da alavanca fader no painel se atualiza para fornecer uma indica o visual do progresso da transi o Estilo de Transic a o Os bot es de estilo de transi o permitem que o o...

Page 1902: ...a pro xima transic a o O chaveador downstream sera transmitido na taxa especificada na janela RATE do bloco de controle de transic a o Se o chaveador downstream estiver vinculado o sinal roteado para...

Page 1903: ...no modelo ao qual voc est conectado e s o uma maneira f cil de ver o processamento dispon vel no switcher Diferentes modelos ATEM ter o caracter sticas diferentes portanto as paletas podem variar As p...

Page 1904: ...transic a o Para a transic a o de imersa o por exemplo a paleta possui um menu suspenso onde voce pode selecionar a fonte de imersa o Para a transic a o wipe a paleta exibe todos os padro es wipe dis...

Page 1905: ...o A aba udio usada para mixar fontes de udio conectadas a qualquer switcher ATEM via HDMI SDI udio externo e tamb m de leitores de m dia integrados aos modelos de switcher ATEM 1 M E 2 M E e 4 M E As...

Page 1906: ...o ganho no ni vel de a udio para cada ca mera e cada fonte de a udio O nu mero verde embaixo de cada medidor de ni vel de a udio exibe o ni vel de a udio ma ximo definido pelo fader O nu mero acima d...

Page 1907: ...elecionar o mix direto como On permite que uma entrada de a udio seja permanentemente mixada na sai da de programa mesmo quando a fonte de vi deo associada na o estiver no ar A luz de sinalizac a o ve...

Page 1908: ...da de monitoramento XLR Desmarque On para desabilitar o udio totalmente via a sa da de monitoramento XLR DIM Selecione Dim para reduzir temporariamente o n vel de udio de monitoramento sem ter que aj...

Page 1909: ...i controles de a udio Fairlight avanc ados que permitem aperfeic oar e refinar a qualidade do som em cada entrada incluindo controles dos ni veis de entrada um equalizador parame trico de seis bandas...

Page 1910: ...nte Clique no indicador do equalizador da entrada para abrir um equalizador parame trico de seis bandas O primeiro item que voce notara e o gra fico ao longo da parte superior da janela com indicadore...

Page 1911: ...faixa de freque ncia selecione um filtro rejeita faixa na lista suspensa de filtros e clique em cada predefinic a o de faixa Voce vera o efeito do filtro se movimentar para uma posic a o na curva do...

Page 1912: ...e aumentar ou diminuir o ni vel de volume para freque ncias mais baixas ao longo do gra fico Rejeita Faixa Passa Altas Passa Baixas Este filtro permite que voce elimine ou corte uma freque ncia defini...

Page 1913: ...aplicara o expansor quando o ni vel do sinal cair abaixo de 40 dB Intervalo Define a faixa de decibe is afetada pela func a o Raz o Define a intensidade ma xima da func a o depois de iniciada Ataque D...

Page 1914: ...as mudanc as nos ni veis de a udio dentro do sinal DICA E recomenda vel aplicar o compressor depois de ter definido os controles de EQ Compensac a o de Ganho Esta configurac a o permite aumentar o sin...

Page 1915: ...ra dividir entradas mono em dois canais separados para sai da este reo va ate as configurac o es gerais do switcher e navegue ate as configurac o es de a udio Ative as caixas de verificac a o correspo...

Page 1916: ...gra ficos Todos os drives conectados ao seu computador sa o exibidos e voce pode selecionar pastas dos mesmos Visualize as subpastas clicando nas setas ao lado de cada pasta A janela de pre visualizac...

Page 1917: ...a ou clipe carregado e exibido sob o compartimento assim voce pode acompanhar quais imagens est ticas e clipes foram carregados Isto e muito u til pois voce vera uma lista de fotogramas e nu meros de...

Page 1918: ...nfigura o de v deo usada para selecionar o padr o de v deo operacional do switcher ATEM necess rio utilizar o mesmo padr o das fontes de v deo que voc est conectando ao seu switcher ATEM Se os padr es...

Page 1919: ...no menu suspenso Definir padra o de vi deo como e clique no bota o Definir Sempre que o padr o de v deo for alterado o switcher remover quaisquer quadros que tenham sido carregados no pool de m dia A...

Page 1920: ...Production Studio 4K em Ultra HD a sa da de programa HD SDI sempre transmitir v deo 1080i de alta defini o convertido para conex o com equipamentos HD SDI As entradas de v deo de alta defini o ou def...

Page 1921: ...nte de udio independente mesmo que n o esteja no ar Essas configura es de monitoramento s est o dispon veis para o mixer de udio quando o monitor de udio estiver selecionado para a configura o de sa d...

Page 1922: ...os Caso precise que um clipe seja mais longo ajuste a estimativa dos quadros Vale lembrar que alongar um clipe encurtar o outro Configurando a dura o de clipes no pool de m dia Tabela de Dura o de Cli...

Page 1923: ...ores de udio podem ser ativados e desativados para todas as fontes do switcher e visualiza o de programa ao habilitar o bot o Ativos nas configura es de multivisualiza o ou voc pode ativ los individua...

Page 1924: ...omo HDMI ou SDI Voc pode identificar conex es altern veis na parte traseira do switcher porque todas as entradas s o numeradas Al m disso as entradas altern veis possuem o mesmo n mero de entrada em s...

Page 1925: ...e CAM1 como um r tulo curto Configura es HyperDeck Ajuste de configura es HyperDeck Voc pode conectar at quatro gravadores de disco Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio e control los via ATEM Software Control...

Page 1926: ...EM Software Control fornece um menu de sa das O menu permite selecionar entre 24 sa das HD ou Ultra HD ou 6 sa das 8K e em seguida selecionar a fonte desejada para essa sa da H uma variedade de fontes...

Page 1927: ...a o Ao salvar com a opc a o Selecionar Todos habilitada o ATEM Software Control salva todas configurac o es do switcher Caso queira salvar configura es especi ficas voce pode remover configurac o es i...

Page 1928: ...lvos ao final da produc a o Caso existam configurac o es que deseja manter voce pode salva las no seu computador e em um drive externo como um drive USB Dessa forma voce pode levar suas configurac o e...

Page 1929: ...na pr pria c mera Voc pode controlar c meras tanto pela conex o SDI comum quanto pela conex o SDI de fibra ptica quando um m dulo SFP opcional estiver instalado em uma Blackmagic Studio Camera Control...

Page 1930: ...r ao pressionar o bot o PGM na c mera Conecte m ltiplas unidades Blackmagic Studio Camera via fibra ptica usando um ATEM Studio Converter preciso ter um m dulo SFP opcional instalado na sua Studio Cam...

Page 1931: ...to es acima do disco de cores Anel Mestre Use o anel mestre abaixo do disco de cores para ajustes de contraste em todos os canais YRGB ao mesmo tempo ou apenas para a lumina ncia de cada configurac a...

Page 1932: ...baixo para diminuir o zoom Configura o do Limitador A configurac a o limitador esta localizada a esquerda do controle de i ris pedestal e e usada para limitar o alcance da i ris Este recurso ajuda a p...

Page 1933: ...dade de aumentar o brilho da sua imagem Cabe ressaltar que a adi o de ganho aumenta o ru do nas suas imagens Controle Velocidade do Obturador O controle da velocidade do obturador est localizado na se...

Page 1934: ...e de correc a o prima ria de cores completa Voce contara com discos de cores e configurac o es como saturac a o disponi veis e tera capacidade para visualizar sombras tons me dios e realces tudo ao me...

Page 1935: ...originais e criativos ao ajustar somente o canal Y Os ajustes do canal Y funcionam melhor quando o ajuste Lum Mix esta configurado para o lado direito usando o processamento YRGB ao inve s do lado es...

Page 1936: ...usu rio pois a corre o de cores um processo criativo onde n o h certo e errado A melhor configura o aquela que voc mais gosta Arraste os deslizadores para a esquerda ou direita para ajustar as configu...

Page 1937: ...imagem ajustando somente Y para gama Y Gain Permite modificar o contraste da imagem ajustando somente Y para realces Contrast Gire no sentido hor rio para aumentar o contraste e no sentido anti hor ri...

Page 1938: ...reme 8K HDR e HyperDeck Extreme Control Conectar HyperDecks Conectar Blackmagic HyperDecks ao seu switcher e muito parecido com a conexa o com ca meras e outras fontes de vi deo atrave s das entradas...

Page 1939: ...alac a o para ate quatro HyperDecks Digite o enderec o IP do seu HyperDeck no campo Enderec o IP e selecione a fonte a qual ele esta conectado no menu suspenso Entrada Clique em Conectar e o seu Hyper...

Page 1940: ...rso de rolagem automa tica Controlar HyperDecks com ATEM Software Control Para controlar os HyperDecks conectados ao seu switcher clique na aba Leitores de Mi dia no painel de controle virtual e selec...

Page 1941: ...epetir o clipe atualmente selecionado e clique novamente para repetir todos os clipes na sua lista de m dias do HyperDeck Para navegar por um clipe utilize o deslizador shuttle jog abaixo das teclas d...

Page 1942: ...lize o controle de sistema e as teclas multifun o do LCD do ATEM Advanced Panel para configurar e controlar seus HyperDecks Para comec ar pressione o bota o Configurac o es no controle do sistema Obse...

Page 1943: ...um HyperDeck navegue ate a terceira pa gina de configurac o es HyperDeck com os boto es de seta esquerda ou direita ou pressione 3 no teclado nume rico no menu de configurac o es HyperDeck Nesta pa gi...

Page 1944: ...iniciar a reproduc a o o corte em si sera atrasado em um nu mero predeterminado de quadros para garantir uma transic a o fluida Isto e como configurar uma pre rolagem em um aparelho de videotape E pos...

Page 1945: ...reproduc a o cessar reproduc a o em loop e avanc ar e retroceder para navegar pelos clipes DICA Para reproduzir todos os clipes aperte e segure a tecla Shift e pressione a tecla multifunc a o Reprodu...

Page 1946: ...sione o potenci metro Painel Usando o bot o de seta direita navegue at a quarta p gina para obter controles de transporte Usando o potenci metro voc pode definir seu HyperDeck para um conjunto de cont...

Page 1947: ...e um painel f sico se precisar de uma solu o mais avan ada Esta se o mostra como usar os diferentes pain is ATEM dispon veis caso voc precise de um painel f sico para a sua produ o ao vivo ATEM 1 M E...

Page 1948: ...sele o de fontes fileira de programa e fileira de pr visualiza o Pressionar a tecla Shift ir alterar a exibi o dos nomes das fontes para que exiba fontes adicionais chamadas de fontes deslocadas perm...

Page 1949: ...habilitado essa fileira de bot es tamb m usada para carregar e executar macros gravados nos compartimentos correspondentes Os bot es acender o em azul quando o bot o macro estiver habilitado A exibi o...

Page 1950: ...dor confira uma transi o antes de execut la na sa da de pr visualiza o usando a alavanca fader Depois que voc apertar este bot o o recurso de pr visualiza o de transi o habilitado e possibilita pr vis...

Page 1951: ...s Usar Macros e Gravar Macros Usando um ATEM 1 M E Advanced Panel Chaveadores Downstream DSK TIE O bot o DSK Tie habilitar o DSK na sa da de pr visualiza o junto com os efeitos da pr xima transi o e v...

Page 1952: ...pontos no menu LCD isto significa que h mais de uma p gina de configura es e voc pode se deslocar por elas ao pressionar os bot es de seta esquerda e direita Por exemplo para alterar a suavidade da bo...

Page 1953: ...remotas Voc pode facilmente controlar um banco de c meras de cada vez pressionando o bot o de controle de c mera e em seguida selecionando cada c mera atrav s dos bot es numerados no teclado num rico...

Page 1954: ...tificar de que as c meras conectadas tenham sido detectadas Como detectar dispositivos conectados 1 Pressione o bot o junto op o VISCA 2 Pressione Detectar A primeira c mera conectada ao seu switcher...

Page 1955: ...o de cabe a de c mera utilizado Caso queira conectar uma unidade PTZ personalizada usando um conector DB 9 padr o RS 422 consulte a se o Conex es de Porta Serial para Cabos de Controle Mapeamento de B...

Page 1956: ...itcher exatamente da mesma maneira As telas LCD de tamanho grande com controles girat rios e teclas permitem ajustar as configura es dinamicamente medida que voc controla o switcher Esta uma maneira r...

Page 1957: ...ava na pr visualiza o agora est no programa e vice versa DICA Recomendamos usar o controle de transi o para fazer transi es por que ele proporciona a oportunidade de conferir o conte do de v deo na sa...

Page 1958: ...a de transi o independente permitindo que voc fa a transi es mais r pidas ao selecionar o tipo de transi o e pressionar o bot o Auto A taxa de transi o previamente utilizada memorizada para aquele tip...

Page 1959: ...o se mistura gradualmente a uma terceira fonte a fonte de imers o Por exemplo a transi o de imers o pode ser utilizada para uma transi o que pede por um flash branco ou uma transi o que rapidamente m...

Page 1960: ...rama para uma transi o wipe Como executar uma transi o wipe no ATEM Advanced Panel 1 No barramento de pr visualiza o selecione a fonte de v deo que voc deseja na sa da de programa 2 Pressione o bot o...

Page 1961: ...o leitor de m dia como sua fonte pode ser usada para patrocinadores ou branding Par metros de Transi o Wipe Taxa A dura o da transi o wipe em segundos e quadros Simetria A simetria pode ser usada par...

Page 1962: ...el para sele o at que a chave seja retirada do ar e da pr xima transi o Consulte Compartilhar Recursos DVE mais adiante nesta se o para mais informa es 3 No menu LCD DVE utilize as teclas e bot es par...

Page 1963: ...portanto estar dispon vel para uso como uma transi o DVE A wipe do logo uma transi o popular que usa o DVE e desloca um gr fico pela tela sobre uma transi o de segundo plano Por exemplo a wipe do log...

Page 1964: ...rquivo de m dia em um leitor de m dia diferente ou uma fonte de entrada diferente 4 Pressione o bot o Auto para desempenhar a transi o como autom tica ou utilize a alavanca fader para uma transi o man...

Page 1965: ...r uma transi o manual 1 No barramento de pr visualiza o selecione a fonte de v deo que voc deseja na sa da de programa 2 Selecione o tipo de transi o usando os bot es de tipo de transi o no bloco de c...

Page 1966: ...controle de sistema para navegar at a p gina de perfil 3 Usando o potenci metro selecione um compartimento de perfil vazio 4 Pressione a tecla Salvar acima do LCD para salvar o perfil Agora o seu per...

Page 1967: ...o painel de controle para selecionar a segunda p gina 2 Usando o potenci metro navegue at o perfil de usu rio que deseja substituir Se o perfil do usu rio estiver em uso o texto acima do n mero do per...

Page 1968: ...icionar bordas coloridas s transi es wipe ou como a cor de imers o para transi es como uma imers o para branco Para ajustar uma fonte de cor no painel de controle virtual v at a paleta de cores clique...

Page 1969: ...Como controlar leitores de m dia no painel de controle virtual 1 Na janela do switcher selecione a paleta do leitor de m dia 2 Use o menu suspenso de sele o de m dia para selecionar um fotograma ou cl...

Page 1970: ...realizado no barramento de programa somente o segundo plano ser alterado e todas as chaves upstream e downstream permanecer o inalteradas Como fazer uma transi o de corte seco no painel de controle v...

Page 1971: ...l de controle virtual usando um teclado 1 Certifique se de que a fun o Caps Lock esteja desativada 2 No teclado pressione o n mero correspondente fonte de v deo que deseja enviar para a sa da de progr...

Page 1972: ...ansi o usando os bot es de tipo de transi o no bloco de controle de transi o 3 Na paleta de transi o selecione a aba de configura es para o mesmo tipo de transi o que o bloco de controle de transi o 4...

Page 1973: ...selecionadas nos barramentos de programa e pr visualiza o s o trocadas para indicar que a fonte de v deo que estava na pr visualiza o agora est no programa e vice versa Como realizar uma transi o auto...

Page 1974: ...uma transi o de mesclagem Configura o da taxa de transi o de mesclagem Como realizar uma transi o de mesclagem no painel de controle virtual 1 No barramento de pr visualiza o selecione a fonte de v d...

Page 1975: ...dor A dura o da transi o de imers o e a fonte de imers o podem ser personalizadas Sa da de programa para uma transi o de imers o Configura es da transi o de imers o Como realizar uma transi o de imers...

Page 1976: ...rrespondente para selecionar a fonte de imers o Voc tamb m pode usar o barramento de sele o para selecionar uma fonte de imers o 5 Fa a a transi o como uma transi o autom tica ou manual a partir do bl...

Page 1977: ...elecione Wipe na barra de tipos de transi o 4 Use as configura es na paleta Wipe para customizar a transi o 5 Fa a a transi o como uma transi o autom tica ou manual a partir do bloco de controle de tr...

Page 1978: ...lip Flop est habilitado a transi o alterna entre normal e revertida toda vez que for executada O texto acender em laranja quando selecionado Borda Largura da borda Suavidade As bordas da forma da wipe...

Page 1979: ...ntrole virtual Fonte O leitor de m dia que ser usado para reproduzir o clipe para a transi o animada Dura o do Clipe A dura o do clipe se refere dura o da anima o A dura o normalmente coincide com a d...

Page 1980: ...Gire o controle rotulado Fonte para selecionar o leitor de m dia desejado Use os bot es de seta para ajustar pr rolagem disparo mesclagem e tempos de dura o conforme necess rio 3 Agora que voc definiu...

Page 1981: ...duzido pelo leitor de m dia Ajuste o valor de ganho at obter a suavidade de borda desejada mas a lumin ncia do v deo de segundo plano brilho n o afetada Inverte Chave Inverte a chave Vale observar que...

Page 1982: ...aparecer o no menu LCD OBSERVA O Se o DVE j estiver sendo usado em uma chave upstream o tipo de transi o DVE n o estar dispon vel para sele o at que a chave seja retirada do ar e da pr xima transi o...

Page 1983: ...ela n o pr multiplicada Compartilhar recursos DVE O ATEM inclui um canal DVE que pode ser usado para fazer transi es DVE ou utilizado em um chaveador upstream Ao selecionar uma transi o DVE se o DVE...

Page 1984: ...igura es DVE aparecer no LCD Se o DVE j estiver sendo usado em uma chave upstream o tipo de transi o DVE n o estar dispon vel para sele o at que a chave seja retirada do ar e da pr xima transi o Consu...

Page 1985: ...ida toda vez que for executada A luz Normal ou Reverse inDICA a dire o da pr xima transi o Preenchimento O sinal de preenchimento o gr fico usado para se movimentar por cima da transi o Chave O sinal...

Page 1986: ...ma e pr visualiza o ficar o ambos vermelhos para indicar que voc est no meio de uma transi o No painel avan ado o indicador da alavanca fader tamb m exibe a posi o e andamento da transi o No painel de...

Page 1987: ...fontes de preenchimento ou chave Os sinais de preenchimento e chave s o selecionados no painel de controle virtual a partir de listas suspensas nas paletas de chaves upstream e downstream No painel av...

Page 1988: ...nto cont m a imagem do v deo que ser empilhada sobre o plano de fundo enquanto o sinal de corte cont m uma m scara em escala de cinza que utilizada para definir as reas da imagem do sinal de preenchim...

Page 1989: ...TEM possa usar para mesclar o gr fico sobre o v deo ao vivo Depois se salvo como um arquivo de imagem Targa ou baixado diretamente para o pool de m dia voc pode selecionar como pr multiplicado no chav...

Page 1990: ...parte superior do menu LCD 3 Utilize o potenci metro abaixo do tipo do indicador Tipo de Chave para selecionar a chave luma 4 Gire os potenci metros Preenchimento e Chave para selecionar uma fonte de...

Page 1991: ...as fontes de preenchimento e chave Se executar uma chave luma selecione a mesma fonte tanto para o preenchimento quanto para a chave 3 Ajustes os par metros de chave para refinar a chave Configura es...

Page 1992: ...ty da Blackmagic Design e depois reproduzir os clipes de v deo para o seu switcher ATEM Se voc renderizar um fundo verde nas suas anima es ser poss vel chavear este verde e criar anima es r pidas e n...

Page 1993: ...e no barramento de sele o de fonte 4 Use os bot es de seta para a esquerda e direita para acessar par metros de chave adicionais como Matiz Ganho Exclus o Y Pedestal e M scara DICA Ao ajustar configur...

Page 1994: ...ontrole de matiz deslocar o ponto preto e o conjunto de pontos correspondente s seis barras de cores ir girar pela tela 4 Ajuste o ganho at que as barras de cores se encontrem pr ximas s caixas de des...

Page 1995: ...m dia Voc tamb m pode selecionar uma fonte de preenchimento pressionando o bot o correspondente no barramento de sele o de fonte 4 Use os bot es de seta direita para acessar a tela de ajustes de croma...

Page 1996: ...bre a rea da imagem que voc deseja remover Recomendamos movimentar o deslizador at que a rea chaveada se torne opaca Borda O deslizador e o potenci metro Borda deslocam a borda da sua rea chaveada par...

Page 1997: ...imeiro plano Por exemplo reflex es verdes ricocheteando de uma tela verde Supress o de Reflexo A supress o de reflexo remove a tonalidade verde geral uniformemente em todos os elementos do primeiro pl...

Page 1998: ...podem ser dimensionadas e posicionadas para produzir o sinal de chave desejado Combina o de um segundo plano com um preenchimento e chave de padr o Segundo Plano Uma imagem em tela cheia Preenchimento...

Page 1999: ...ir ao ar quando a transi o seguinte for realizada 2 No menu LCD dos chaveadores selecionar a chave de padr o utilizando o controle girat rio correspondente do tipo de chave 3 Selecione a fonte de pree...

Page 2000: ...gue at a p gina de sele o de padr o do chaveador que voc est configurando Use o joystick ou os potenci metros para movimentar o padr o vertical e horizontalmente Para recentralizar o padr o pressione...

Page 2001: ...tabela abaixo Configura es de chave DVE Como configurar uma chave DVE no chaveador upstream 1 do ATEM Advanced Panel 1 Pressione o bot o de pr xima transi o Key 1 para habilitar o chaveador na sa da...

Page 2002: ...Chanfro Interno Chanfro interno Borda tridimensional Par metros de Borda DVE Os bot es e potenci metros no controle de sistema s o usados para ajustar os par metros das bordas Existem v rios par metro...

Page 2003: ...ma ferramenta criativa para criar recortes retangulares na tela No painel f sico a m scara configurada para cada chave upstream e downstream do menu de m scara no controle de sistema dispon vel atrav...

Page 2004: ...no momento O bot o Key 1 foi selecionado na pr xima transi o logo ela ir alterar o estado da chave 1 e ativ la para que fique vis vel na sa da de programa Sa da de programa depois da transi o Sa da de...

Page 2005: ...de programa segundo uma taxa exibida na janela de taxa DSK 3 Utilize o bot o DSK Tie para vincular a chave downstream ao bloco de controle de transi o principal Uma vez vinculada a chave downstream se...

Page 2006: ...talac a o correta do plug in ATEM Plug in de exportac a o do ATEM Configurar Localizac a o do Plug in do Switcher Ao executar o plug in para Photoshop pela primeira vez e necessa rio inserir o enderec...

Page 2007: ...es que se combinam ao seu v deo Usar Sa das Auxiliares As sa das auxiliares s o sa das SDI adicionais para as quais voc pode rotear v rias entradas e fontes internas As sa da auxiliares s o bem pareci...

Page 2008: ...a das auxiliares no Windows Menus do ATEM Software Control com sa das de roteamento para o ATEM Constellation 8K Rotear a Sa da Auxiliar usando um Painel ATEM F sico Nos pain is ATEM f sicos voc pode...

Page 2009: ...o limpa id ntica sa da de programa por m n o inclui nenhum dos conte dos do chaveador downstream Ideal para gravar uma sa da m ster sem logotipos e marcas d gua nos chaveadores downstream Alimenta o...

Page 2010: ...Direita Voc pode querer alterar os par metros das janelas 2 a 4 seguindo passos semelhantes Se voc cometer um erro clique no s mbolo de engrenagem direita da aba Controle de Janelas para redefinir os...

Page 2011: ...ndo Selecione a fonte para o segundo plano atrav s do barramento de sele o no painel 1 M E ou atrav s do barramento de destino dedicado no painel 2 M E Isso far com que a fonte de v deo selecionada se...

Page 2012: ...s da janela selecionada no momento para qualquer uma das outras janelas fazendo um clone perfeito com apenas um clique As janelas copiadas aparecer o diretamente atr s da janela principal e ter o a me...

Page 2013: ...clique em Macros na barra de ti tulos ou voce pode pressionar Shift Command M no Mac ou Shift Control M no Windows A janela Macros e uma janela flutuante que pode ser movimentada livremente na sua a...

Page 2014: ...odas as configurac o es necessa rias a fim de criar os efeitos desejados Gravar um Macro usando o ATEM Software Control No exemplo abaixo vamos criar um macro para configurar o seu switcher ATEM para...

Page 2015: ...e permite adicionar uma pausa Ajuste o valor para 5 segundos e 0 quadros Em seguida clique em Adicionar Pausa para confirmar Por que inserir o n mero 5 quando voc deseja introduzir uma pausa de apenas...

Page 2016: ...do em um u nico bota o na janela Macros Seu switcher ATEM tambe m exibira uma borda laranja em torno do painel de controle virtual para indicar que o macro esta sendo executado Caso voce na o obtenha...

Page 2017: ...deseja alterar e em seguida compilar seus macros pequenos de volta no macro extenso Como compilar macros menores em um macro maior 1 Comece a gravar um novo macro Enquanto ele estiver sendo gravado c...

Page 2018: ...ibe quaisquer coment rios que voc tenha inclu do Bot es macro Ap s gravar um macro em um compartimento macro selecionado seu macro aparecer como um bot o macro 20 bot es macro podem ser exibidos em um...

Page 2019: ...e tecla Macro para abrir o menu de macros na tela LCD 2 Usando o controle girat rio sob a op o Macro na tela LCD selecione o compartimento onde deseja gravar o macro Para este exemplo selecione compar...

Page 2020: ...compartimento de macro 6 Voc pode editar o seu macro e adicionar anota es clicando no bot o Editar Macro no ATEM Software Control Para executar o macro pressione o bot o Macro para configurar a filei...

Page 2021: ...Se voc tiver mais de quatro c meras voc pode usar pain is adicionais caso queira atribuir cada c mera a uma CCU dedicada A escolha cabe ao usu rio OBSERVA O As c meras Blackmagic Design que podem ser...

Page 2022: ...conecte a porta Ethernet sobressalente do painel de controle de c mera ao seu computador ou rede Se voc estiver usando o painel de controle de c mera somente com o seu switcher e um computador em uma...

Page 2023: ...ede pressione o bot o de configura es Pressione o bot o Configura es na tela inicial para acessar todas as configura es do painel de controle de c mera A configura o DHCP a primeira configura o na seq...

Page 2024: ...configura es de rede em ambos dispositivos Como configurar o endere o IP do switcher no painel de controle 1 Pressione o bot o de seta para navegar at a op o Endere o IP do Switcher 2 Usando os contr...

Page 2025: ...as as c meras Bancos de C mera A e B Na parte superior da tela inicial voc ver o banco de c mera selecionado Esta configura o exibe qual banco de c meras voc est controlando Por exemplo imagine que vo...

Page 2026: ...c mera Navegue pelas p ginas das configura es pressionando o bot o de seta As configura es da rede incluindo configura es de DHCP e endere o IP s o as primeiras p ginas da sequ ncia Essas configura es...

Page 2027: ...ot es de controle de cada configura o no sentido hor rio ou no sentido anti hor rio para aumentar ou diminuir o brilho Pain is de Controle das CCUs Os controles correspondentes a cada CCU est o organi...

Page 2028: ...o definido para controlar lumin ncia Y Isso aumenta ou diminui a lumin ncia geral ou brilho da imagem Para mais informa es sobre o controle de balan o de cores consulte a se o Controlar C meras Contro...

Page 2029: ...s em cada CCU e oferece uma vis o geral sobre como abordar o controle da c mera O primeiro passo para controlar c meras atribuir uma c mera a uma CCU Atribuir uma C mera a uma CCU Na parte inferior da...

Page 2030: ...ode salvar todos os par metros para cada c mera e reutiliz los mais tarde Esse processo muito r pido Como armazenar uma predefini o de cena 1 Pressione o bot o Store em uma das CCUs O bot o acender em...

Page 2031: ...s para o bot o 1 ser o aplicadas a cada CCU de forma independente OBSERVA O Embora este recurso seja muito poderoso e til utilize o com cuidado pois ele afeta todas as c maras incluindo a c mera que e...

Page 2032: ...olador gradualmente medida que voc faz altera es O processo quase invis vel e prov vel que voc nem perceba Controle Absoluto No modo de controle absoluto as configura es s o sempre sincronizadas com s...

Page 2033: ...ra aumentar a velocidade do obturador e a seta para baixo para reduzir Para uso em produ o a velocidade do obturador geralmente definida como 50 o que significa 1 50 de segundo o que produz um desfoqu...

Page 2034: ...uma avalia o precisa da exposi o f stop observe o indicador da ris Em volta da rodela do man pulo do joystick h um anel que controla o n vel de pedestal O anel possui pequenos ressaltos internos para...

Page 2035: ...cline o joystick at a posi o mais alta para aumentar a configura o de ganho ao m ximo 2 Diminua a configura o girando o bot o Coarse no sentido anti hor rio at que o ganho atinja o limite que voc dese...

Page 2036: ...aliza o da c mera conectada CCU piscar Esta uma maneira til de chamar a aten o dos operadores de c mera ou para que seus operadores saibam que voc est prestes a entrar no ar Ao segurar o bot o de cham...

Page 2037: ...temas de sinaliza o por fechamento de contato como o Blackmagic SmartView Duo e o SmartView HD poss vel conectar at oito dispositivos a uma nica GPI and Tally Interface Apenas uma unidade GPI and Tall...

Page 2038: ...computador e conecte tamb m a fonte de alimenta o fornecida 3 Inicie o Blackmagic ATEM Setup 4 Caso o seu switcher ATEM se conecte diretamente ao seu computador ou painel ATEM Advanced sem uma rede Et...

Page 2039: ...Inputs 1 8 a menos que voc esteja configurando uma segunda unidade para fornecer sinaliza o s entradas 9 a 16 de um ATEM 2 M E Production Switcher 7 Clique em Apply O LED branco direita da porta USB d...

Page 2040: ...RCA s o teis ao usar udio de equipamentos dom sticos como aparelhos de som HiFi e iPods As entradas RCA permitem conectar udio HiFi externo ao seu switcher Os modelos ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K e...

Page 2041: ...deo E n o necess rio usar um mixer de udio externo a n o ser que voc prefira utilizar um O udio mixado na aba de udio do ATEM Software Control e enviado atrav s das sa das de programa SDI e HDMI como...

Page 2042: ...a 24 bits de profundidade com uma taxa de amostragem de 48 kHz Eles est o conectados a 64 canais adicionais no mixer de udio que voc pode misturar na sa da de programa com o mesmo EQ e din mica que os...

Page 2043: ...das SDI 1 10 Canal 11 udio do leitor de m dia Canal 12 Microfone externo Canal 13 Entrada TRS de udio anal gico Canal 14 udio PGM Em modo HD e Ultra HD a sa da MADI 2 envia as seguintes fontes Canais...

Page 2044: ...e controle modernas utilizam USB 2 Verifique se a sua superf cie de controle reconhecida pelo seu computador como um dispositivo MIDI Para computadores Mac v at Aplicativos Utilit rios Configura o de...

Page 2045: ...m o switcher ATEM com sucesso Tente deslizar os faders de ganho para cima e para baixo na sua mesa de som e verifique se os faders do mixer de udio exibem um movimento correspondente no software na te...

Page 2046: ...tellation 8K Conex es de Porta Serial para Cabos de Controle Conex es RS 422 para Cabos de Controle O RS 422 um padr o broadcast que utiliza conectores DB 9 ou RJ12 convencionais Voc pode facilmente r...

Page 2047: ...ens mensagens individuais e cabe alhos de comando s o definidos e tamb m pressupostos como alinhados em 32 bits Removendo Codifica o Um grupo de mensagem codificado em um pacote SMPTE 291M com DID SDI...

Page 2048: ...um de 256 par metros de configura o potenciais dispon veis no dispositivo Os par metros de 0 a 127 s o espec ficos do dispositivo Os par metros de 128 a 255 s o reservados para par metros que se apli...

Page 2049: ...o de 128 a 255 est o dispon veis para fins espec ficos do dispositivo Data void O campo de dados possui 0 ou mais bytes conforme determinado pelo tipo de dados e o n mero de elementos A categoria o p...

Page 2050: ...from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate fps as...

Page 2051: ...2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4 0 int8...

Page 2052: ...BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd decimal...

Page 2053: ...multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage medium 0 CF...

Page 2054: ...10 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 subt...

Page 2055: ...de sinaliza o na sua sa da e atualizam o status de sinaliza o do monitor assim os dispositivos desse monitor conectados sa da individual podem exibir o status de sinaliza o sem conhecer a identidade...

Page 2056: ...tatus 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off...

Page 2057: ...06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF RelativePos...

Page 2058: ...ist ncia t cnica da Blackmagic Design mais pr xima Verificando a Vers o Atualmente Instalada Para verificar qual vers o do software ATEM est instalada no seu computador abra a janela Sobre ATEM Softwa...

Page 2059: ...instruc o es podera causar interfere ncias nocivas nas comunicac o es via ra dio A operac a o deste produto em uma a rea residencial pode causar interfere ncia nociva nesse caso o usua rio sera solic...

Page 2060: ...e o servic o de manutenc a o a assiste ncia te cnica local da Blackmagic Design Utilize apenas em altitudes inferiores a 2000 m acima do ni vel do mar Declara o do Estado da Calif rnia Este produto po...

Page 2061: ...consertar danos ou falhas causadas pelo uso de componentes ou materiais que na o sa o da Blackmagic Design d para fornecer assiste ncia te cnica de um produto que foi modificado ou integrado a outros...

Page 2062: ...Haziran 2020 T rk e Kurulum ve Kullan m K lavuzu ATEM Canl Yap m Switcher leri...

Page 2063: ...tmekteyiz Bu kullan m k lavuzu ATEM Production Switcher inizi kurman z i in ihtiyac n z olan t m bilgileri i ermesi gerekir ATEM switcher bilgisayar n zda al t rabilece iniz bir yaz l m kontrol paneli...

Page 2064: ...Medya Y neticisi 2102 Audio Mikser 2103 Software Kontrol Panelinin Kullan m 2105 lem Paletleri Processing Palettes 2109 Media Players Medya Oynat c lar Sekmesi 2111 Ses Mikserinin Kullan m 2111 ATEM C...

Page 2065: ...225 ATEM Camera Control Panel in Kullan m 2227 Panelin al t r lmas 2227 Panelin Switcher inize Ba lanmas 2228 A Ayarlar n n De i tirilmesi 2229 Kamera Kontrol Panelinin D zeni 2230 Kameralar n Kontrol...

Page 2066: ...rol etmeleri i in basit Ethernet ba lant lar ile ba lanabilirler ATEM yaz l m kontrol paneli ekstra bir cret demeden istedi iniz kadar bilgisayara y klenebilir Kendi ihtiya lar n zla uyu acak zel bir...

Page 2067: ...er ge i ler aras ndan se iminizi yapabilirsiniz Bu bir switcher kullanman n ok etkili bir eklidir nk nizleme s ras ndan kayna n z se ebilir ve istedi iniz ge i i se meden nce do ru kaynak oldu unu tey...

Page 2068: ...zaman daha eski tarz A B direkt anahtarlamaya al k n olabilirsiniz ve ATEM yaz l m tercihlerinde A B anahtarlama i in ATEM switcher inizi kolayl kla ayarlayabilirsiniz Bu ayar nereden de i tirebilece...

Page 2069: ...K 4320p59 94 e kadar video anahtarlayabilirsiniz LCD ekranl dahili kontrol panel ve talkback do rudan n panelden g r nt miksaj yapman za imkan tan r B ylelikle kaynaklar n z h zla teyit edebilir ve ca...

Page 2070: ...yesi 6 adet auxiliary k kaynaklar aras ndan se menizi sa lar ve bu k lar b y k dahili LCD ekranda denetleyebilirsiniz ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K NOT Bir ATEM 2 M E Broadcast Studio 4K n z varsa sw...

Page 2071: ...e i tirilmesi kolayd r oklu g r nt lemeyi halen televizyonunuzda g rm yorsan z ATEM inizin al t ndan emin olmak i in elektrik ba lant n z tekrar kontrol edin Bir ATEM Hardware Panel in Tak lmas Bir AT...

Page 2072: ...ve teknik konular bilen bir arkada n z n yard m n alman z gerekebilir Fabrika ayar olarak switcher 192 168 10 240 sabit IP adresine ayarl d r ve ATEM Advanced paneller de 192 168 10 60 sabit IP adresi...

Page 2073: ...switcher yaz l m ATEM switcher ler taraf ndan kullan lan a a daki eleri y kler ATEM Software Control ATEM Yaz l m Kontrol Blackmagic ATEM Setup Blackmagic ATEM Kurulumu Blackmagic ATEM Setup IP adres...

Page 2074: ...k grafikleri kullan n Blackmagic ATEM Yaz l m n n bir Windows Bilgisayara Y klenmesi En g ncel yaz l m y klemeden nce Windows PC bilgisayar n zda bulunan ATEM yaz l m n n daha nceki s r mlerini kald r...

Page 2075: ...ya havuzu ve keying isimli keyleme i leminin i levselli ini incelemek i in rnek grafikleri kullan n Bilgisayar n z n Tak lmas Bilgisayar n z do rudan bir ATEM switcher e takabilirsiniz b ylelikle swit...

Page 2076: ...n bulunamamas gibi nadir bir durum olursa ok endi elenmeyin z m muhtemelen bilgisayar n zdaki bir network a ayar d r A ayarlar n n de i tirilmesi h zl d r ve sadece k sa bir s re alacakt r A ayarlar n...

Page 2077: ...ayarlar penceresini a mak i in aray z n sol alt ndaki di li ikonu zerine t klay n Switcher video standard n n ayarlanmas Video standard n yay m yapmakta oldu unuz b lgeye uymas i in ayarlayabilirsini...

Page 2078: ...lar n g rebilmeniz gerekir Ses Tercihlerinin Ayarlanmas Ses audio sekmesi ses denetimi i in hangi k lar n kullan laca n se menizi sa lar Ayr ca talkback kanallar nda olabilecek bir yank lanma d ng s n...

Page 2079: ...10 giri i g r nt leyen g sterim ekran vard r ve ATEM Constellation 8K n n 4 7 13 veya 16 giri i g r nt lemek i in ilave se enekleri vard r Bu e itli harici ve dahili kaynaklar bu ekranlarda g r nt len...

Page 2080: ...ion 8K i in oklu g r nt lemenin iste e g re ayarlanmas Her bir kaynak g sterimi i erisinde ses g stergeleri a l p kapat labilir veya her g sterimdeki ilgili ikonlar t klayarak veya all on hepsi a k bu...

Page 2081: ...m n kullanarak veya bir ATEM donan m kontrol paneli vas tas yla onlar nas l kontrol edece iniz konusunda daha detayl bilgi i in bu k lavuzun HyperDeck Kontrol b l m ne bak n Switcher deki her ba lant...

Page 2082: ...verilerini fiilen ifreler yani retici i eri in televizyondan ba ka bir cihazda g r nmesine izin vermez Bu cihazlardan gelen g r nt leri g rme imkan n z olmayacakt r HDCP i erik korumal cihazlar aras...

Page 2083: ...daima sabit bir IP adresine gereksinimi vard r Yani a n z n kapsama alan i inde kullanabilece iniz ba ms z sabit bir IP adresi bulman z gerekir Kontrol paneller DHCP veya sabit IP adreslerine ayarlana...

Page 2084: ...t p a man z i in sizi y nlendirecektir Switcher in elektri ini kapat n tekrar a n ve sonra diyalog kutusunu kapat n Blackmagic ATEM Setup daki configure yap land rma sekmesini kullanarak a ayar n de i...

Page 2085: ...zere ilgili LCD programlanabilir kontrol d melerini kullan n 4 Ayar do rulamak i in save changes de i iklikleri kaydet programlanabilir butona bas n Paneliniz imdi switcher inizle ba lanacakt r ATEM...

Page 2086: ...lmesini mi istedi inize karar vermektir lgili DHCP ON OFF a ma kapama yaz l m butonuna basarak DHCP a k veya kapal olarak ayarlay n NOT Bir a olmadan do rudan bir switcher e ba lan yorsan z o zaman ot...

Page 2087: ...munu yaparken kaynaklar n z n hepsini denetleyebilece iniz ve switcher i do rudan n panelden kontrol edebilece inizdir Bu yap m zincirinin kalbi olan switcher den her eyin do ru bir ekilde kuruldu unu...

Page 2088: ...e tam olarak duyman z gerekeni rahatl kla duyabilirsiniz 4 Talkback in al t n teyit ettikten sonra kameralar n hepsinde tally klar n n al t n kontrol etmek iyi bir fikirdir Bunu yapmak i in nizleme k...

Page 2089: ...lemek isteyip istemedi inizi sorar Yaz l m n ayn s r m n kullanmalar i in ekipmanlar n z n hepsini ayn anda g ncelleyin ATEM Yaz l m Y kleyicisi Bir g ncelleme uygulamak i in ATEM switcher inizi veya...

Page 2090: ...hernet ba lant s zerinden de g ncelleme i lemini yapabilirsiniz NOT USB zerinden yaz l m g ncellerken kurulum yard mc uygulama yaz l m n al t ran bilgisayara USB ile ba l tek ATEM cihaz n Advanced pan...

Page 2091: ...switcher inizin ana program video k ndan g nderir ve televizyonlara video projekt rlerine ve hatta Blackmagic Design in H 264 Kodlay c veya HyperDeck disk kaydedicilerine ba lanabilir Bu k taki ses k...

Page 2092: ...lerinin yan s ra switcher deki preview bus da se ili kayna g sterir Tam z n rl kl bir nizleme monit r kullanmak istedi iniz zaman bu k m kemmeldir Bu k taki ses SDI program sesine g m l d r M E k ATEM...

Page 2093: ...buton kontrol eder Switcher i ilk al t rd n zda giri 1 in k rm z yanan buton oldu unu g receksiniz Bunun anlam giri 1 in yay nda oldu udur ve giri 1 e ba l bir video kayna n z varsa onun program k nda...

Page 2094: ...n her biri ayr ca ATEM Software Control den veya varsa bir donan m kontrol panelinden de se ilebilir Ana giri butonlar n n bir grubunun yan s ra n panelde mp1 ve mp2 olarak etiketlenmi ba ka kaynaklar...

Page 2095: ...kullanarak men ler i inden Settings ayarlar men s ne gidin 3 Set onayla d mesine bas n ve settings men sayfas n n se ilmi oldu unu g receksiniz 4 Listeden a a inerek mode men s ne gelin ve set butonu...

Page 2096: ...an lmas na ra men ncelikle ses seviye ayar i indir Normalde bu ses seviye kontrol i in kullan l r ve LCD men s ne bakarak neyi kontrol etti ini g rebilirsiniz LCD deki etiket d menin neyi ayarlad n si...

Page 2097: ...girip kmas i in DSK 1 MIX butonunu kullanabilirsiniz Butona bast n zda ge i s resi downstream key LCD men s nde veya bir kontrol panelinde ayarlanm olacakt r Bir keyer i bir giri veya bir medya alar...

Page 2098: ...Bu b l mdeki rneklerde men leri kulland k ve men lerde nelerin oldu unu g rmek i in men lerde gezinmek iyi bir fikirdir Ge mi te bir ATEM switcher de yaz l m kontrol panelini kulland ysan z o zaman ya...

Page 2099: ...saj i in kulakl klar n zdaki seviyeleri d zenleyin Se ili buton k rm z yanar yani yukar ve a a oklar n kullanarak seviyesini ayarlayabilirsiniz ATEM Constellation 8K n n arka panelindeki talkback kone...

Page 2100: ...enel Tercihler ATEM Software Control ngilizce Almanca spanyolca Frans zca talyanca Japonca Korece Portekizce Rus a T rk e ve basitle tirilmi ince dillerini g stermesi i in ayarlanabilir ATEM Software...

Page 2101: ...ntrol panelinde yap lan buton e lemesi donan m kontrol panelinde yap lan buton e lemesini etkilemeyecektir A a a lan men den bir kamera atayabilirsiniz Switcher Control Panel Yaz l m kontrol panelinin...

Page 2102: ...0 1 10 aras ndaki switcher giri lerindeki kaynaklar program k na aral ks z anahtarlama yapar Aral ks z anahtarlama etkin kal r ve CUT kesme d mesi k rm z yanar Control Shift 1 0 11 20 aras ndaki switc...

Page 2103: ...kanal da otomatik olarak y klenir Bir medya alara bir sabit resim veya klip y klendi inde medya alar n k hem key g r nt hem de fill dolgu k lar n dahil edecektir Bir medya alar key source g r nt kayn...

Page 2104: ...i kamera kontrol nitelerinin kameralar kontrol etmesine benzer bir ekilde kameralar uzaktan kontrol edebildi iniz yerdir ancak ATEM switcher ler ile bu fonksiyon yaz l ma entegre edilmi tir yani her z...

Page 2105: ...k kaydedicileri kullanma hakk nda daha fazla bilgi i in bu k lavuzun HyperDeck Kontrol b l m ne bak n Ayr ca remote uzaktan kumanda sekmesini kullanarak switcher inizin uzaktan kontrol n ayarlayabilir...

Page 2106: ...URCE Resim i inde Resim Bu zellik 1 den daha fazla M E si olan ATEM switcher lerin t m nde aktiftir Renk ubuklar n Shift tu una basarken se in RENK UBUKLARI Switcher taraf ndan dahili olarak retilen r...

Page 2107: ...esi de ge i in ilerleyi ine g rsel geri bildirim sa lamak i in g ncellenir Transition Style Ge i Tarz Transition Style butonlar kullan c n n mix miks dip dald rma wipe silme DVE geometrik efektler ve...

Page 2108: ...ne ba lar DSK ge i kontrol blo u RATE h z ekran nda belirtilen h zda ge i yapacakt r DSK ba l ysa clean feed 1 temiz sinyal 1 e giden sinyal y nlendirme bundan etkilenmez ON AIR YAYINDA ON AIR butonu...

Page 2109: ...le g re farkl l k g sterir ve switcher de bulunan i lemeyi g rmenin kolay bir yoludur Farkl ATEM modellerinin farkl zellikleri olacakt r yani paletler de i ebilir Paletler ayn zamanda switcher deki i...

Page 2110: ...ler bu key lerin hangi M E ye ba l olduklar n g sterir Transitions Ge i ler Transitions paleti ge i tarzlar n n parametrelerini yap land rabildi iniz yerdir rne in dip dald rma ge i i i in paletin dal...

Page 2111: ...Mikserinin Kullan m Herhangi bir ATEM switcher e HDMI SDI harici ses external audio vas tas yla ba lanan ses kaynaklar ndan ve ayr ca ATEM 1 M E 2 M E ve 4 M E switcher modellerindeki dahili medya oy...

Page 2112: ...ses seviyesindeki gain i ayarlamak zere ses seviye s rg s n s r kleyiniz Her ses seviye g stergesinin alt ndaki ye il rakam s rg n n ayarlad maksimum ses seviyesini g sterir Ses g stergesinin st ndek...

Page 2113: ...rekt miksin ON olarak se ilmesi bir ses giri inin ilgili video kayna yay nda olmasa bile devaml program k na mikslenmesine olanak verir K rm z tally lambas daima yan yor olacakt r nk ses daima yay nda...

Page 2114: ...m sesleri etkisiz hale getirmek i in ON butonunu etkisiz hale getirin DIM Sesi Azaltma Monit r n ses seviyesini s rg ye dokunmadan ge ici olarak azaltmak i in DIM butonunu se in Tercih etti iniz dinl...

Page 2115: ...l kullan rken faydal d r Geli mi Fairlight Kontrolleri ile Ses Miksinizi Geli tirme ATEM Constellation 8K n n her giri ve ana k taki sesin kalitesini geli tirmek ve art rman z sa layan aralar nda giri...

Page 2116: ...olayzer g stergesinin zerine t klay n 6 bant parametrik bir ekolayzeri a mak i in bir giri in ekolayzer g stergesi zerine t klay n lk olarak fark edece iniz madde pencerenin st taraf nda 1 den 6 ya nu...

Page 2117: ...d na h zl bir rnek i in bant filtresi a a a l r men s nden bir notch entik filtresi se in ve sonra her bir aral k nayar n t klay n Filtre efektinin grafik e risi boyunca se ti iniz aral k nayar yla uy...

Page 2118: ...frekans kald rman z veya k sman z sa lar A r bas frekanslar p r zs zce kald rarak tiz frekanslar n etkilenmeden ge mesine izin verir A r tiz frekanslar p r zs zce kald rarak bas frekanslar n etkilenme...

Page 2119: ...n desibel aral n belirler Ratio Katsay Ba lat ld ktan sonra fonksiyonun azami etkisini belirler Attack Atak Ba lad nda fonksiyonun yumu akl n ayarlar rne in uzun bir atak fonksiyonun sinyale yava yava...

Page 2120: ...ltmek istedi inizde bu faydal d r B LG Kompres r EQ kontrollerini ayarlad ktan sonra uygulamak daha iyidir Make Up Telafi Make up ayar s k t rma ayarlar ile birle tirilmi halde genel sinyali art rman...

Page 2121: ...l r b ylelikle kanal eridindeki seviye g stergesinde sinyallerinin en y ksek seviyeleri 0dB nin hemen alt nda kal r 2 Stereo kt i in herhangi bir mono sinyali iki ayr kanala ay rmak istiyorsan z genel...

Page 2122: ...d r Bilgisayar n za ba l t m s r c ler g r nt lenir ve bunlar aras ndan dosyalar n z se ebilirsiniz Alt klas rleri her klas r n yan ndaki oklar t klayarak a abilirsiniz Preview nizleme penceresi se il...

Page 2123: ...lece y klemi oldu unuz sabit resim ve klipleri takip edebilirsiniz Medya havuzundaki sabit g r nt ve klip numaralar n ve dosya isimlerinin bir listesini switcher sekmesindeki medya alar paletinin yan...

Page 2124: ...ar ATEM switcher lerinin i letim video standard n se mek i in kullan l r ve ATEM switcher e ba lad n z video kaynaklar yla ayn video standard na ayarlanm olmal d r E er uyumlu olmazlarsa giri ler do r...

Page 2125: ...7 2160p50 2160p50 2160p59 94 2160p59 94 4320p23 98 4320p24 4320p25 4320p29 97 4320p50 4320p59 94 Video standard n ayarlamak i in men den video standard n ayarlay n ve sonra set ayarla butonunu t klay...

Page 2126: ...n k lar n Ayarlama ATEM Production Studio 4K modellerini Ultra HD de al t r rken HD SDI program k HD SDI cihazlar na ba lant i in her zaman a a evrilmi y ksek z n rl kl 1080i video kart r Y ksek z n r...

Page 2127: ...dan kullan labilir hale gelir Ses k hareketini ayarlama SDI Ses Kanallar 15 ve 16 ATEM switcher inizin k lar ndan birisini arzu etti iniz bir efekti ger ekle tirmek zere bir giri e d ng loop yapmak is...

Page 2128: ...rlaman zda fayda var Medya Havuzu Klip S resini Ayarlama Klip S resi Tablosu ATEM Switcher Video Format Klip S resi ATEM Constellation 8K 720p 3200 kare 1080i 1080p 1600 kare 2160p 400 kare 4320p 100...

Page 2129: ...eresindeki g venli alan ikonunu t klaman z yeterlidir T m switcher kaynaklar ve program g r nt s i in ses g stergeleri oklu g r nt leme ayarlar nda All On Hepsini A d mesi etkinle tirilerek a l p kapa...

Page 2130: ...r De i tirilebilir ba lant lar switcher in arkas ndan tespit edebilirsiniz nk t m giri ler numaraland r lm t r ve de i ebilen her giri etiketinde ayn giri numaras na sahip olacakt r Etiket Ayarlar rne...

Page 2131: ...ede kadar Blackmagic HyperDeck Studio disk kaydedicisini ba lay n ve ATEM Software Control kullanarak onlar kontrol edin HyperDeck leri ba larken IP adresini yap land rmak i in bu ayarlar kullan n Hyp...

Page 2132: ...mek istedi iniz kayna se menizi sa lar Siyah t m video giri leri renk ubuklar medya oynat c fill dolgu ve medya oynat c key k lar program nizleme ve temiz sinyaller dahil olmak zere e itli kaynaklar v...

Page 2133: ...isterseniz ayarlardan se imi tek tek kald rabilirsiniz veya ayarlar n hepsini kald rmak i in Select All ibaresini bir kez t klay n imdi kaydetmek istedi iniz belirli ayarlar se ebilirsiniz 4 Save kay...

Page 2134: ...syalar n z yedeklemeyi kolayl kla unutabilirsiniz Saklamak istedi iniz ayarlar varsa onlar bilgisayar n za ve USB s r c gibi bir harici diske kaydedin B ylelikle ayarlar n z beraberinizde ta yabilirsi...

Page 2135: ...ol paketlerini SDI ba lant s nda farkedece i ve kamerada bulunan zellikleri kontrol etmenizi sa layaca d r Bir Blackmagic Studio Camera ya iste e ba l bir SFP mod l y klendi inde hem normal SDI hem de...

Page 2136: ...gelerinin avantaj n da kullanabilirsiniz Bir ATEM Studio Converter kullanarak fiber optik kablo zerinden bir ok Blackmagic Studio Camera ya ba lanabilirsiniz Optik fiber ile ba lanmas i in st dyo kame...

Page 2137: ...k tekerinin zerindeki se im d mesinden birini t klayarak hangi ayar d zeltece inizi se ebilirsiniz Master Ana Teker T m YRGB kanallar n n ayn anda kontrast d zeltmelerini ya da lift gamma veya gain ay...

Page 2138: ...i t klay n ve yakla t rmak zoom in i in yukar s r kleyin veya uzakla t rmak zoom out i in a a s r kleyin Coarse Ayar Coarse ayar iris pedestal kontrol n n sa taraf ndad r ve iris aral n s n rlamak i i...

Page 2139: ...imlerde g nbat m nda k azald nda ve g r nt n z n parlakl n art rman z gerekti inde Gain ilave edilmesi g r nt lerinizde g r lt y artt raca n belirtmemizde fayda vard r rt c H z Kontrol rt c h z kontro...

Page 2140: ...k i in DaVinci Resolve primary color corrector ana renk d zeltici d mesini t klay n Renk tekerleriniz ve doygunluk saturation gibi kullan l r ayarlar n z olur ve g lge orta ton ve parlakl k ayarlar n...

Page 2141: ...Y kanal ayarlamalar en iyi ekilde al r Normalde DaVinci Resolve kullanan renk uzmanlar n n o unlu u YRGB renk d zelticisini kullan r nk genel gain i etkilemeden renk dengesinde kontrol n z daha fazla...

Page 2142: ...n Blackmagic kameran za kamera kontrol sinyalleri ATEM switcher inizden g nderilir Kameran zdan bir ayar kazayla de i tirildi inde senkronizasyonu devam ettirmek i in kamera kontrol o ayar otomatik ol...

Page 2143: ...st art rmak i in saat y n nde evirin ve kontrast azaltmak i in saat y n n n tersine evirin Parlakl klar Highlight Highlights d mesi se ili kameradaki irisi kontrol eder risi art rmak i in d meyi saat...

Page 2144: ...erDeck Extreme 8K HDR ve HyperDeck Extreme Control HyperDeck lerin Ba lanmas Switcher inize Blackmagic HyperDeck lerin ba lanmas switcher inizin SDI veya HDMI giri leri zerinden kameralar n ve di er v...

Page 2145: ...r girme i lemi HyperDeck inizin IP adresini IP Address kutusuna girmek ve input giri a l r men s nden tak l oldu u kayna se mek kadar kolayd r Connect ba lan ibaresini t klay n ve HyperDeck iniz kontr...

Page 2146: ...otomatik ba latma zelli i se imini kald rabilirsiniz ATEM Software Control ile HyperDeck lerin Kontrol Switcher inize ba l HyperDeck leri kontrol etmek i in yaz l m kontrol panelinde media players me...

Page 2147: ...ili olan klibi d ng ye almak i in loop ibaresini bir kez t klay n ve HyperDeck inizin medya listesindeki her klibi d ng ye almak i in tekrar t klay n Bir klip i erisinde hareket etmek zere HyperDeck i...

Page 2148: ...gibi HyperDeck inizi switcher inize ba lar ba lamaz HyperDeck lerinizi kurmak ve kontrol etmek zere ATEM Advanced Panel in sistem kontrol n ve LCD ekran butonlar n kullanabilirsiniz Ba lamak i in sist...

Page 2149: ...ar Bir HyperDeck in IP adresini girmek i in sol ve sa ok butonlar yla nc HyperDeck ayarlar sayfas na gidin veya HyperDeck ayarlar men s ndeyken say sal klavyede 3 e bas n Bu sayfada u anda se ili olan...

Page 2150: ...emek i in nceden belirlenmi kare say s kadar as l ge i gecikecektir Bu t pk bir video kaset cihaz nda bir preroll nsarma ayarlama gibidir Bu gecikmenin m ddetini bu g stergenin alt ndaki kontrol d mes...

Page 2151: ...lmak zere daha fazla HyperDeck kontrolleri i in media players LCD men s n n nc ve d rd nc sayfalar n kullan n B LG Kliplerin hepsini oynatmak i in shift butonunu bas l tutun ve play yaz l m butonuna b...

Page 2152: ...meye bas n Sa ok butonunu kullanarak aktar m kontrolleri i in 4 sayfaya ilerleyin D nen programlanabilir kontrol d mesini kullanarak HyperDeck inizi bir aktar m kontrolleri seti i in d zenleyebilirsin...

Page 2153: ...ac n z varsa birden fazla donan m paneli ba layabilirsiniz Bu b l m canl yap m n z i in bir donan m paneline ihtiyac n z oldu unda mevcut olan farkl ATEM panelleri nas l kullanaca n z g sterir ATEM 1...

Page 2154: ...buton s ras i in etiketleri g sterir SHIFT butonuna bas lmas shifted sources ismindeki ekstra kaynaklar g stermesi i in kaynak isimleri ekran n de i tirecektir Bu da 20 farkl kaynaktan se im yapmaya i...

Page 2155: ...ce Select Bus Kaynak Se me Veriyolu Kaynak se me veriyolu kaynak isimleri ekran ile birlikte al r ve auxiliary k lar ile keyer lere kaynaklar n atanmas i in kullan l r Makro butonu etkinle tirildi ind...

Page 2156: ...tirilecektir PREV TRANS Ge i i nizle PREV TRANS butonu ge i i nizleme modunu etkinle tirir B ylece s rg kolunu kullanarak kullan c n n bir ge i i nizleme k nda uygulayarak do rulanmas na imkan tan r B...

Page 2157: ...Panel ile Makrolar n Kullan lmas Makrolar n Kaydedilmesi b l m ne bak n Downstream Sistem k ndaki Keyer ler DSK TIE DSK Ba lama DSK TIE butonu bir sonraki ge i efektleri ile beraber DSK y Downstream K...

Page 2158: ...yarlar n bir sayfadan fazla oldu udur ve sol ile sa ok butonlar n kullanarak bu sayfalar aras nda gezinebilirsiniz rne in bir silme wipe ge i inde kenar yumu akl n de i tirmek i in 1 Wipe silme butonu...

Page 2159: ...oom yak nla ma ve uzakla ma i levlerini kontrol etmek i in son derece etkili bir ara t r Bir grup kameray camera control butonuna basarak ve sonra say sal klavye butonlar ile her bir kameray se erek b...

Page 2160: ...irsiniz Fakat ncelikle ba l olan kameralar n tespit edildi inden emin olman z gerekir Ba l cihazlar tespit etmek i in 1 VISCA kontrol se mek zere VISCA yaz l m butonuna bas n 2 Detect tespit et yaz l...

Page 2161: ...ntroller kumanda kolunun hareket seviyesine duyarl d r b ylelikle kamera hareketlerine yava a girip kman z sa lar Bu duyarl l n miktar uzaktan kumandal kafalar aras nda de i ebilir Standart bir RS 422...

Page 2162: ...payla r Geli mi panellerle al rken switcher inizi kontrol etmek sezgiseldir nk paneller switcher inizi tamam yla ayn ekilde al t r rlar Programlanabilir kontrol d meleri ve butonlar ile b y k LCD ekr...

Page 2163: ...nun tam tersini g stermek i in yer de i tirmi tir B LG Ge i leri uygulamak i in ge i kontrol blo unu kullanman z tavsiye edilir nk nizleme k ndaki i eri in program k na g nderilmeden nce onaylanmas i...

Page 2164: ...zin ge i t r n se ip AUTO butonuna basarak daha h zl ge i ler uygulaman z sa lar O ge i t r i in en son kullan lan ge i h z de i tirilene kadar hat rlan r Bir yap m switcher i bir ekimden di erine ge...

Page 2165: ...i i yava yava nc bir kaynakla dip dald rma kayna ile kar r rne in bir dip ge i i beyaz bir fla gerektiren ge i i in veya sponsor logosunu h zla g steren bir ge i i in kullan labilir Dald rma ge i inin...

Page 2166: ...karo Bir wipe silme ge i i i in program k ATEM Advanced panelde bir silme ge i i uygulamak i in 1 Program k nda istedi iniz video kayna n preview nizleme bus s ras nda se in 2 Silme ge i t r n se mek...

Page 2167: ...sponsorluk veya markala t rma i in kullan labilir Silme wipe ge i i parametreleri H z Rate Saniye ve kare olarak silme ge i s resi Simetri Symmetry Simetri eklin g r nt oran n kontrol etmek i in kull...

Page 2168: ...lmayacakt r Daha fazla bilgi i in bu b l mde sonra gelecek DVE kaynaklar n n payla lmas k sm na bak n 3 DVE parametrelerini yap land rmak i in DVE LCD men s nde yaz l m kontrol d melerini ve butonlar...

Page 2169: ...lying key zelli ini etkisiz hale getirin DVE serbest b rak lacakt r b ylece bir DVE ge i i olarak kullan ma elveri li olacakt r Logo silme ge i i DVE kullanan ve bir grafi i ekran zerinden bir arkapla...

Page 2170: ...s n veya farkl bir giri kaynak kullanmak isterseniz key kayna n de i tirebilirsiniz 4 Ge i i otomatik bir ge i olarak uygulamak i in auto butonuna bas n veya manuel ge i i in s rg kolunu kullan n Graf...

Page 2171: ...ek i in s rg kolunu veya ge i s rg s n bir u tan di er uca elle hareket ettirin S rg kolundaki veya ge i kayd r c s ndaki bir sonraki hareket yeni bir ge i i ba latacakt r 4 Ge i esnas nda program ve...

Page 2172: ...iniz imdi panele kaydedilmi tir Paneli tekrar kullanmak istedi inizde profilinizi yeniden y klemeniz yeterlidir Bir kullan c profilini yeniden y klemek i in 1 Kullan c profillerini a mak i in LCD ekra...

Page 2173: ...Programlanabilir kontrol d mesini kullanarak zerine yazmak istedi iniz kullan c profiline ilerleyin Bu kullan c profili u an kullan lmakta ise profil numaras n n zerindeki metnin rengi turuncu olacak...

Page 2174: ...e kullan labilir rne in beyaza dald rma gibi Bir renk kayna n yaz l m kontrol panelinde ayarlamak i in renk paletine gidip renk par as n t klay n ve renk se ici a ld ktan sonra renkleri se ebilirsiniz...

Page 2175: ...zundan bir klip veya sabit bir g r nt se mek i in a a a l r select media medya se me listesini kullan n 3 E er bir hareketli klip se tiyseniz ba lat begin geri y r t step back oynat durdur play pause...

Page 2176: ...uyguland zaman sadece arkaplan de i tirilir ve upstream ile downstream key lerin t m mevcut durumlar n devam ettirir Yaz l m kontrol panelindeki program bus k ndan bir cut ge i i uygulamak i in Progra...

Page 2177: ...ullanarak yaz l m kontrol panelinde bir cut ge i i uygulamak i in 1 B y k harf kilidinin caps lock kapal oldu undan emin olun 2 Program k nda olmas n istedi iniz video kayna na kar l k gelen say tu un...

Page 2178: ...bus s ras nda se in 2 Ge i kontrol blo undaki TRANSITION STYLE ge i t r butonlar n kullanarak ge i t r n se in 3 Ge i paletinde ge i kontrol blo unda se ilen ge i t r ile ayn ayarlar sekmesini se in 4...

Page 2179: ...da se ili kaynaklar yer de i tirirler Bir ATEM Advanced panelde bir auto otomatik ge i uygulamak i in 1 Program k nda istedi iniz video kayna n preview nizleme bus s ras nda se in 2 Ge i kontrol blo u...

Page 2180: ...anelinde bir miks ge i i uygulamak i in 1 Program k nda istedi iniz video kayna n preview nizleme bus s ras nda se in 2 Ge i kontrol blo undaki mix transition style ile miks ge i t r n se in 3 Ge i pa...

Page 2181: ...inin s resi ve dald rma kayna n n ikisi de iste e g re de i tirilebilir Bir dip dald rma ge i i i in program k Dip Dald rma Ge i i Ayarlar Yaz l m kontrol panelinde bir dip ge i i uygulamak i in 1 Pro...

Page 2182: ...ource se mek i in ilgili kontrol d mesini kullan n Dip kayna n z dip source se mek i in ayr ca select bus kullanabilirsiniz 5 Otomatik bir ge i olarak veya manuel bir ge i olarak ge i kontrol blo unda...

Page 2183: ...b y t n ve ge i t rleri ubu undan wipe se ene ini se in 4 Silme ge i ini iste inize g re uyarlamak zere wipe silme paletindeki ayarlar kullan n 5 Otomatik bir ge i olarak veya manuel bir ge i olarak...

Page 2184: ...TersTakla FlipFlop zelli i a kken ge i uyguland her defas nda ge i normalden tersine de i ir Se ildi inde yaz turuncu renkte yanacakt r Border Kenarl k Kenarl n geni li i Softness Yumu akl k Yumu akl...

Page 2185: ...medya oynat c Klip S resi Clip Duration Klip s resi animasyonun uzunlu unu ifade eder S renin animasyonun uzunlu u ile normalde e olmas gerekir Ayr ca klibin sonunu budama trim ile ince ayar yapmak i...

Page 2186: ...kaynak olarak etiketli LCD men yaz l m kontrol d mesini evirin Preroll tetikleme trigger miks ve s re duration zamanlar n gerekti i gibi ayarlamak i in ok butonlar n kullan n 3 Stinger ge i ini do ru...

Page 2187: ...la siyah ise o zaman klip de eri a r d kt r Gain Kazan Gain ayar medya oynat c da geri oynat lan klipte bulunan key in kenarlar n n yumu at lmas n sa layan de eri elektronik olarak de i tirir Arkaplan...

Page 2188: ...deo kayna n preview nizleme bus s ras nda se in 2 DVE ge i ini se mek i in DVE ge i t r d mesine bas n DVE ayarlar LCD men s nde g r necektir NOT Bir upstream key de DVE zaten kullan l yor ise key yay...

Page 2189: ...eder DVE Kaynaklar n n payla m ATEM DVE ge i lerini uygulamak i in veya bir upstream keyer de kullan labilen bir DVE kanal i erir Bir DVE ge i ini se ti inizde e er bu DVE sistemde ba ka bir yerde kul...

Page 2190: ...butonuna bas n LCD ekranda DVE ayarlar men s belirir DVE bir upstream key de zaten kullan l yorsa key yay ndan kar l ncaya ve bir sonraki ge i ten al n ncaya kadar DVE ge i t r ge ersiz olacakt r Daha...

Page 2191: ...r sonraki ge i in y n n g sterir Fill Source Dolgu Kayna Fill doldurma sinyali ge i in st ne ilerlemesi i in kullan lan grafiktir Key Source Key Kayna Key sinyali grafikte kald r lacak b lgeyi belirle...

Page 2192: ...nizleme bus k lar ndaki k rm z ve ye il butonlar n ikisi de bir ge i in ortas nda oldu unuzu g stermek i in k rm z yanar Advanced panelde ge i in konumunu ve ilerlemesini s rg kolu g stergesi de g ste...

Page 2193: ...y kaynaklar olarak kullan lmas n sa larlar Fill ve key sinyalleri yaz l m kontrol panelinde upstream ve downstream paletlerindeki a a a l r listeden se ilir Advanced panelde fill ve key sinyalleri sel...

Page 2194: ...cut sinyali Fill sinyali arkaplan n zerine yerle tirilecek bir video g r nt s i erirken key sinyali fill sinyalinde effaf yap lacak b lgeleri belirlemek i in kullan lan bir gri l ek mask i erir Fill v...

Page 2195: ...za canl video zerine ATEM in grafi i kayna t rma i in kullanabilece i bir alfa kanal ekleyin Sonra Targa g r nt dosyas olarak kaydedildi inde veya do rudan medya havuzuna indirildi inde keyer de pre m...

Page 2196: ...M E keyer i se in 3 Luma key i se mek i in key type key t r g stergesinin alt ndaki kontrol d mesini kullan n 4 Bir fill ve key kayna se mek i in fill source fill kayna ve key source kontrol d melerin...

Page 2197: ...r n belirlemek zere fill source ve key source olarak etiketli a a a l r kontrolleri kullan n Bir luma key uyguluyorsan z fill ve key i in ayn kayna se in 3 Key i geli tirmek zere key parametrelerini a...

Page 2198: ...a lamak ve sonra ATEM switcher e video klipler oynatmak kolayd r Animasyonlar n zda ye il bir arkaplan olu turursan z sonra bu ye ili istedi iniz uzunlukta h zl ve temiz animasyonlar olu turmak i in k...

Page 2199: ...rma y suppress lift ve maskeleme masking gibi d zeltmeyi istedi iniz ilave key parametrelerine eri mek i in sol ve sa ok butonlar n kullan n B LG ATEM Advanced Panel de ayarlama yaparken shift tu unu...

Page 2200: ...olarak ayarlay n 3 Renk tonunu hue renk hex noktalar color hex dots siyah evresinde yo unla ncaya kadar ayarlay n Renk tonu d mesinin ayarlanmas siyah noktay dengeleyecektir ve 6 renk ubu u noktas n n...

Page 2201: ...kan bir kameradand r veya bir medya oynat c ya y klenmi bir grafiktir Ayr ca bir fill kayna n se mek i in kaynak se me source select bus ta ilgili butona da basabilirsiniz 4 Chroma d zeltmeleri ekran...

Page 2202: ...k k nplan yapay olgular n doldurmak i in bu s rg y kullan n S rg y keylenmi alan n z istikrarl bir ekilde opak oluncaya kadar hareket ettirmenizi neririz Key Edge Key Kenar Key kenar s rg s ve kontro...

Page 2203: ...k i in spill ta ma s rg s n ayarlay n Mesela bir ye il ekrandan seken ye il yans malar Flare Suppression Yans ma Bast rma Yans ma bast rma t m nplan elerinden ye il rengi genel olarak kar r nplan n z...

Page 2204: ...ci istenilen key sinyalini retmek i in ebad ve konumu de i tirilebilen 18 adet ekil olu turabilir Bir arkaplan bir fill ve ekil key ile birle tirme Background Arkaplan Tam ekran bir g r nt Fill Dolgu...

Page 2205: ...uyguland nda yay na ge i yapacakt r 2 Keyer ler LCD men s nde ilgili key type key t r kontrol d mesini kullanarak pattern key t r n se in 3 lgili yaz l m kontrol d mesini kullanarak veya kaynak se im...

Page 2206: ...konumland rmak i in ayarlamakta oldu unuz keyer i in ekil se me pattern selection sayfas na gidin ekli yatay ve dikey olarak hareket ettirmek i in kumanda kolunu ve kontrol d melerini kullan n ekli ye...

Page 2207: ...nelde upstream keyer 1 de bir DVE Key haz rlamak i in 1 nizleme k nda keyer i etkinle tirmek zere KEY 1 next transition KEY 1 bir sonraki ge i butonuna bas n 2 Keyer ler LCD men s nde ilgili yaz l m k...

Page 2208: ...enar Bevel Out D a E im Bevel out 3D boyutlu kenar Bevel In e E im Bevel in 3D boyutlu kenar DVE kenar parametreleri Sistem kontrol ndeki d meler ve yaz l m butonlar kenarl klar n parametrelerini d ze...

Page 2209: ...om k rpma kontrollerinden olu ur Mask ile rtme i lemi ekranda dikd rtgen kesintiler olu turmak i in yarat c bir ara olarak da kullan labilir Donan m panelde her bir upstream ve downstream key i in mas...

Page 2210: ...se ilidir bu y zden bir sonraki ge i key 1 in durumunu de i tirecek ve program k nda g r nmesi i in onu ON etkinle tirecektir Ge i sonras program k Ge i ncesi program k Ge i ncesi kontrol panel bir s...

Page 2211: ...gram k nda aktif veya etkisiz olmas i in yava yava ge i yapt rmak zere DSK AUTO butonuna bas n 3 Downstream key i ana ge i kontrol blo uyla ba lamak zere DSK TIE butonunu kullan n Ba lan r ba lanmaz D...

Page 2212: ...entisi Eklenti i in Switcher Konumunun Ayarlanmas Photoshop export eklentisi ilk kez al t r ld nda sizden switcher inizin konumunu se menizi isteyecektir Bu switcher in IP adresidir b ylelikle eklenti...

Page 2213: ...a aktarma esnas nda n arp m i lemi grafik rengini alfa kanal yla birle tirir Auxiliary k lar n n Kullan m Auxiliary k lar e itli giri ler alabilen ve dahili kaynaklar kendilerine y nlendirebilen ekstr...

Page 2214: ...ar Kontrol Men leri ATEM Constellation 8K i in k lar y nlerdirmek zere ATEM Software Control men leri Bir ATEM Hardware Panel kullanarak Aux k n n Y nlendirilmesi ATEM donan m panellerinde sistem kont...

Page 2215: ...r ancak downstream keyer i eri inin hi birini i ermez Downstream keyer lerde logo veya dijital ekran grafikleri olmayan bir master kt kayd yapmak istedi inizde faydal d r Clean Feed 2 Temiz Sinyal 2 B...

Page 2216: ...lt Bottom sol Left ve Right sa d r Bu i lemden sonra buna benzer basamaklarla kutucuklar n parametrelerini 2 den 4 e de i tirebilirsiniz Bir hata yaparsan z Box Control Kutucuk Kontrol sekmesinin RHS...

Page 2217: ...M E paneldeki Select bus bus se me zerinden veya 2 M E paneldeki atanm Destination var bus zerinden arka plan i in kayna se in Bu i lem se ili video kayna n n etkinle tirilmi kutular n arkas na yerle...

Page 2218: ...u g r necektir u an se ili kutunun ayarlar n di er kutular n herhangi birine h zla ve kolayl kla kopyalay p tek bir t klamayla asl n n ayn s n yapabilirsiniz Kopyalanan dosyalar ana master kutunun he...

Page 2219: ...da macros zerine t klay n veya Mac bilgisayarlar i in shift command M tu lar na veya Windows bilgisayarlar i in shift control M tu lar na da basabilirsiniz Makro penceresi masa st nde serbest e hareke...

Page 2220: ...e Control ile bir Makronun Kaydedilmesi A a daki rnekte ATEM switcher inize renk ubuklar ndan renk 1 e 3 saniyelik bir miks ge i i uygulatacak 2 saniye bekledikten sonra siyah renge 3 saniyelik bir mi...

Page 2221: ...edi iniz halde duraklama s resi neden 5 saniye olarak ayarlanmal Bunun nedeni miks ge i i uyguland nda tamamlanmas n n 3 saniye s rmesidir Yani bir duraklama eklemek istedi inizde ge i s resini ve bir...

Page 2222: ...bildirmek i in yaz l m kontrol paneliniz etraf nda turuncu renkli bir er eve de g sterecektir Makronuz bekledi iniz gibi al mazsa daha nceki basamaklar takip ederek makronuzu tekrar kaydedin Bir makr...

Page 2223: ...k makrolar yeniden kaydetmeniz ve sonra k k makrolar n z tekrar daha b y k makronuzda toplaman z gerekir K k makrolar daha b y k bir makroda toplamak i in 1 Yeni bir makro kaydetmeye ba lay n Sonra al...

Page 2224: ...lar sunar Bir makro se ildi inde ekledi iniz notlar da g sterir Makro butonlar Se ili bir makro yuvas na bir makro kaydettikten sonra makronuz bir makro butonu olarak belirecektir Bir sayfada 20 adet...

Page 2225: ...racaks n z 1 Makrolar LCD men s n a mak zere macro yaz l m butonuna bas n 2 LCD nin alt ndaki macro d mesini kullanarak kaydetmek istedi iniz makro yuvas n se in Bu rnek i in yuva 6 Empty bo se ene in...

Page 2226: ...ine t klayarak makronuza yeni bir isim verebilir ve a klamalar ekleyebilirsiniz Makroyu al t rmak i in panelinizin kaynak se me s ras n makro moduna ayarlamak zere makro butonuna bas n Makro modundayk...

Page 2227: ...ontrol edebilece inizdir veya d rtten fazla kameran z varsa ve herbir kameray zel bir CCU ile atamak istiyorsan z ilave paneller kullanabilirsiniz Bu tamam yla size ba l d r NOT ATEM Camera Control Pa...

Page 2228: ...e olacakt r imdi kamera kontrol panelinin yedek Ethernet portunu bilgisayar n za veya a a ba lay n Kamera kontrol panelini sadece switcher inizle ve bir bilgisayarla payla ml bir a zerinde kullan yors...

Page 2229: ...rece iniz ilk men se ene idir A ayarlar na eri mek i in settings yaz l m butonuna bas n Kamera kontrol panel inin t m ayarlar na ula mak i in LCD ana ekran nda settings yaz l m butonuna bas n DHCP aya...

Page 2230: ...i in de iyi bir yoldur Kamera kontrol panelinde switcher in IP adresini ayarlamak i in 1 Switcher IP adresi ayar na gitmek i in ok yaz l m butonuna bas n 2 LCD nin alt ndaki d meleri kullanarak adres...

Page 2231: ...Bu ayar hangi kamera s ras n kontrol etti inizi g sterir rne in 8 tane kamera kontrol etti inizi d n n ve her bir kameraya zel bir CCU atamak istiyorsunuz 1 den 4 e kadar olan kameralar s ra A da ban...

Page 2232: ...na bas lmas kamera kontrol paneliniz i in t m ayarlar a ar Ok yaz l m butonuna basarak ayarlar n sayfalar nda gezinin DHCP ve IP adresi ayarlar da dahil olmak zere a ayarlar s radaki ilk sayfalardand...

Page 2233: ...rlakl ayarlaman z sa lar I klar a mak veya k smak i in her bir ayar i in ilgili kontrol d melerini saat y n nde veya saat y n n n tersine evirin Kamera Kontrol niteleri CCU Panel Kontrolleri Her bir C...

Page 2234: ...kontrol i in ayarlanm t r Bu g r nt n n parlakl n genel olarak art r r veya azalt r Renk denge kontrol hakk nda daha fazla bilgi bir sonraki Kameralar n Kontrol b l m nde sunulmu tur Objektif Kontroll...

Page 2235: ...ol nitesindeki t m zellikleri a klar ve kamera kontrole nas l yakla laca na dair genel bir bak sunar Kameralar n kontrol edilmesindeki ilk ad m bir kameray bir CCU i in atamakt r Bir Kameran n Kamera...

Page 2236: ...t m n kaydedebilir ve sonra geri a rabilirsiniz Bu ok h zl bir i lemdir Bir g r n m dosyas n saklamak i in 1 Bir CCU zerindeki store sakla d mesine bas n Panelin bir dosya y klemek i in haz r oldu unu...

Page 2237: ...ok etkili ve faydal olmas na ra men program k na anahtarlanm kamera da dahil olmak zere t m kameralar etkiledi i i in dikkatli kullan n Hepsini geri a rma recall all zelli ini belirli kurulumlarda ca...

Page 2238: ...yapt k a kontrol r ile yeniden senkronize olacakt r S re hemen hemen g r lemezdir ve fark na bile varmaman z muhtemeldir Mutlak Kontrol Absolute Control Ayarlar mutlak absolute kontrol modunda ilgili...

Page 2239: ...butonlar kameran n rt c h z n de i tirmenizi sa lar rt c h z n art rmak i in yukar ok butonuna ve azaltmak i in de a a ok butonuna bas n Genel yap m i leri i in rt c h z genellikle 50 ye ayarl d r ya...

Page 2240: ...tirdik e g stergesinin eridi yanarak kameran n pozlamas na yakla k bir g r nt sunacakt r Pozlama f stop de erinin kesin bir de erlendirmesi i in iris g stergesine bak n Kumanda kolunun tutma yerinin e...

Page 2241: ...steyebilirsiniz Bunu yapmak i in 1 Gain ayarlar n azami de erine art rmak i in kumanda kolunu en y ksek konumuna itin 2 imdi gain ayar istedi iniz s n ra ula ana kadar coarse st s n r d mesini saat y...

Page 2242: ...ama butonunun bas l tutulmas CCU nun se ili kameras ndaki tally lambas n yak p s nd recektir Bu kamera operat r n n dikkatini ekmek i in veya operat rlere yay na ge mek zere oldu unuzu bildirmek i in...

Page 2243: ...martView Duo ve SmartView HD gibi kontak kapama tally sinyallerini destekleyen video cihazlar na bir da tma kablosu breakout cable ba lanabilir Tek bir GPI and Tally Interface ile 8 adede kadar tally...

Page 2244: ...r olmadan do rudan bilgisayar n za veya ATEM Advanced panele ba lan yorsa statik bir IP ile adresi yap land rmak i in Configure Address Using Static IP ibaresini se in GPI and Tally Interface teslim e...

Page 2245: ...k lar sunmas i in ikinci bir niteyi yap land rmakta olmad n z s rece Set tally outputs Tally k lar n d zenleme se ene i Switcher Inputs 1 8 Switcher Giri leri 1 8 olarak ayarl olmal d r 7 Apply uygula...

Page 2246: ...sistemi veya iPod gibi t ketici cihazlar ndan ses kullan rken faydal d r Harici HiFi sesini RCA giri leri zerinden switcher inize ba lay n ATEM 4 M E Broadcast Studio 4K ve ATEM 2 M E Production Stud...

Page 2247: ...r ses ba lant lar na ihtiyac n z kalmaz Tercih etmedi iniz s rece harici bir ses mikserine gerek yoktur Ses ATEM Software Control un Audio Ses sekmesinde mikslenir ve SDI ile HDMI program k lar zerind...

Page 2248: ...ADI kanallar 1 64 rnekleme h z 48 kHz olan 24 bit derinli inde dijital sesi kabul eder Bunlar aynen video giri sesi miksaj kanallar ndaki gibi ayn EQ ve dinamiklerle program k na miksajlayabilece iniz...

Page 2249: ...0 un 3 ve 4 kanallar Kanal 11 Medya oynat c ses Kanal 12 Harici mikrofon Kanal 13 TRS analog ses giri i Kanal 14 PGM ses HD ve Ultra HD modunda MADI k 2 a a daki kaynaklar g nderir Kanal 1 ila 30 SDI...

Page 2250: ...n r 2 Kontrol y zeyinizin bir MIDI cihaz olarak bilgisayar n z taraf ndan tan nd n do rulay n MAC bilgisayarlar i in Applications Utilities Audio MIDI Setup sekmelerine gidin ve uygulamay ba lat n Win...

Page 2251: ...er yleyse kontrol y zeyinizi ATEM switcher inizle al mas i in ba ar yla yap land rd n z Donan m kontrol y zeyinizin zerindeki gain kazan s rg lerini a a yukar kayd rmay deneyin ve ses mikser s rg ler...

Page 2252: ...ri Port Pim Ba lant lar Kontrol Kablolar i in RS 422 Pim Ba lant lar RS 422 bilindik bir DE 9 veya RJ12 konekt r kullanan bir yay n standard d r Tasar m kendiniz yapmak istiyorsan z bu tip konekt rler...

Page 2253: ...e protocol document Bit fields are packed from LSB first Message groups individual messages and command headers are defined as and can be assumed to be 32 bit aligned Blanking Encoding A message group...

Page 2254: ...meter number specifies one of 256 potential configuration parameters available on the device Parameters 0 through 127 are device specific parameters Parameters 128 though 255 are reserved for paramete...

Page 2255: ...128 through 255 are available for device specific purposes Data void The data field is 0 or more bytes as determined by the data type and number of elements The category parameter data type and opera...

Page 2256: ...values from minimum 0 to maximum n 1 7 Dynamic Range Mode int8 enum 0 1 0 film 1 video 1 8 Video sharpening level int8 enum 0 3 0 off 1 low 2 medium 3 high 1 9 Recording format int16 0 file frame rate...

Page 2257: ...4 3 2 2 4 1 3 2 39 1 4 2 35 1 5 1 85 1 6 thirds 3 2 Frame guides opacity Camera 3 x fixed16 1 frame guide opacity 0 1 1 0 0 transparent 1 0 opaque 3 3 Overlays replaces 1 and 2 above from Cameras 4 0...

Page 2258: ...e _ _ BCD s0DDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 north 1 south DD degrees dddddddddddd decimal degrees 1 longitude _ _ BCD sDDDdddddddddddd where s is the sign 0 west 1 east DDD degrees dddddddddddd d...

Page 2259: ...ause ve multiple speeds forwards 2 flags 1 0 loop 1 1 play all 1 5 disk1 active 1 6 disk2 active 1 7 time lapse recording 3 slot 1 storage medium 0 CFast card 1 SD 2 SSD Recorder 4 slot 2 storage medi...

Page 2260: ...02710 12 4 8 0 0 1 5 3 0 0x10 0x27 0x00 0x00 add 15 to zebra level 15 0 15 f 0x0133 fp 12 4 6 0 0 4 2 128 1 0x33 0x01 0 0 select 1080p 23 98 mode on all cameras 16 255 9 0 0 1 0 1 0 24 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 s...

Page 2261: ...ugh the tally packet on their output and update the monitor tally status so that monitor devices connected to that individual output may display tally status without knowledge of the device id they ar...

Page 2262: ...s 0 off 1 on bit 1 slave device 3 device preview tally status 0 off 1 on bit 2 3 reserved 0b00 bit 4 slave device 4 program tally status 0 off 1 on bit 5 slave device 4 preview tally status 0 off 1 on...

Page 2263: ...01 06 01 VV WW 02 01 FF DownLeft 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 01 02 FF DownRight 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 02 02 FF Stop 8x 01 06 01 VV WW 03 03 FF AbsolutePosition 8x 01 06 02 VV WW 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Y 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z FF RelativeP...

Page 2264: ...m n n kontrol edilmesi Bilgisayar n zda ATEM yaz l m n n hangi s r m n n y kl oldu una bakmak i in About ATEM Software Control ATEM yaz l m kontrol hakk nda penceresini a n Mac bilgisayarda Applicati...

Page 2265: ...d ve kullan lmad takdirde radyo kom nikasyonlar na zararl m dahaleye yol a abilir Bu r n n bir yerle im b lgesinde al t r lmas n n zararl m dahaleye yol a mas muhtemeldir bu durumda kullan c m dahalen...

Page 2266: ...lunmamaktad r Gerekli tamiratlar yerel Blackmagic Design hizmet merkezine y nlendirin Deniz seviyesinden y ksekli in 2000m yi a mad yerlerde kullan n Kaliforniya Eyaleti Beyannamesi Bu r n plastik par...

Page 2267: ...anan hasar n tamir edilmesi c Blackmagic Design par alar ya da malzemesi olmayan r nlerin kullan m ndan kaynaklanan hasar n ya da ar zan n tamir edilmesi ya da d Modifiye veya ba ka r nlerle entegre e...

Reviews:

No comments